LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

University  of  California. 


.L<j..^.A 


GIFT    OF 


^■^ : , 

Class  V^-tt 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/briefgermangrammOOwhitrich 


WHITNEY'S  MODERN  LANGUAGE  BOOKS. 


WHITNEY-KLEMM  GERMAN  SERIES. 

By  William  D.  Whitney,  Professor  in  Yale  College^  and  L.  R. 
Klemm,  Author  of  Lese-  und  Sprachbiicher^  etc. 

RUDIMENTS  OF   GERMAN.     {.In  Preparation:) 

GERMAN  BY   PRACTICE $i  lo 

ELEMENTARY   GERMAN   READER i  oo 

A  COMPENDIOUS  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 150 

BRIEF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 75 

GERMAN    READER 180 

GERMANENGLISH   DICTIONARY 3  50 

GERMAN  TEXTS.     Edited  by  Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney. 

Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm.     Annotated  by  W.  D.  Whitney, 
Prof,  in  Yale  College 75  cents. 

Schiller's  Wilhelm   Tell.     Annotated  by  Prof.  A.  Sachtleben,  of 
Charleston,  S.  C 75  cents. 

Goethe's  Faust.     Annotated  by  Wm.  Cook 80  cents. 

Goethe's  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.    Annotated  by  Prof.  Franklin  Car 
TER,  Williams  College 75  cents. 

Schiller's  Maria  Stuart.     Annotated  by  E.  S.  Joynes,  Prof,  in  Uni 
versity  of  South  Carolina 80  cents, 

Lessing's  Nathan  der  Weise.    Annotated  by  H.  C.  G.  Brandt,  Prof, 
in   Hamilton  College 75  cents. 


WHITNEY'S  FRENCH  GRAMMAR. 

A  Practical  French  Grammar,  with  Exercises  and  Illustrative 
Sentences  from  French  Authors $1  ( 

HENEY  HOLT  &  CO.,  PubUshers,  NEW  YORK, 


A  BEIEF 


German  Grammar 


WITH  REFERENCES  TO  HIS  LARGER  GRABHAR 


WILLIAM  D.  WHITNEY 

Professor  of  Sanskrit  and  Comparative  Philology  and  Instructor  in  Modern 

Languages  in  Yale  College,  AutJior  of  a  German  Gramrnart 

Reader,  and  Dictionary,  Editor  of 

Overman  Texts,  etc.,  etc. 


SECOND  EDITION,  BEVISED  AND  ENLARGED, 


NEW  YORK 
HENKY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

F.  W.  CHRISTERN 
BOSTON:    CARL   SCHOENHOF 


8^3 


Copyright,  1885, 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

OF 

PREFACE. 


THIS  work  has  been  prepared  at  the  instance  of  many- 
teachers,  and  because  there  appeared  to  be  a  call  for  a 
German  grammar  which  should  present  the  most  important 
facts  of  the  language  in  the  briefest  form  consistent  with 
accuracy  and  clearness  of  statement.  It  follows,  as  a  matter 
of  course,  the  same  general  method,  and  uses  the  same  term- 
inology, as  the  author's  larger  work  (A  Compendious  German 
Grammar,  etc.,  H.  Holt  &  Co.),  which  has  been  approved  by 
wide  use  now  during  more  than  fifteen  years ;  and  it  may  be 
used  as  an  introduction  to  the  other.  In  order  to  facilitate 
the  transition,  and  for  the  convenience  of  those  who,  while 
using  it,  desire  to  refer  to  the  fuller  statements  and  explana- 
tions of  the  larger  grammar,  the  numbers  of  the  latter's  para- 
graphs corresponding  to  those  of  this  volume  are  added  in 
parenthesis  to  its  own  paragraph-numbers.  The  exercises  may- 
be used  according  to  the  discretion  of  the  teacher  and  the 
special  needs  and  capacities  of  his  class  ;  and,  where  immediate 
advance  to  reading  is  desired,  the  English-into-German  exer- 
cises may  in  many  cases  be  well  omitted  until  the  grammar 
comes  to  be  gone  over  a  second  time.  The  selected  sentences 
at  the  end  are  intended  to  form  the  ground  for  such  further 
grammatical  drill  as  shall  be  found  desirable. 

W.D.  W. 

Yauc  CoiiLEGE,  May,  1885. 


20657^ 


U   '-''fi: 


CONTENTS. 


Alphabet , §§  1—2 

Pbonunciation 3 — 43 

Vowels,  3-13  ;  diphthongs,  14-18  \  consonants, 
19-42  ;  accent,  43. 

Declension 44 — 117 

Articles,  48-50  ;  —  nouns,  51-G9  ;  first  declension 
of  nouns,  53-61 ;  second,  62-63  ;  irregular,  64 ;  for- 
eign nouns,  65  ;  proper  names,  66-69;  —  adjectives, 
70-82;  adjective  declension,  72-77 ;' adjective  as 
noun  and  adverb,  78-79;  comparison,  80-82;  —  pro- 
nouns, 83-111 ;  personal,  83-87 ;  possessives,  88-90; 
demonstratives,  91-95  ;  interrogatives,  96-100 ;  re- 
latives, 101-106  ;  indefinite,  107-111 ;  —  numerals, 
112-117, 

Conjugation 118—168 

Simple  forms,  118 ;  principal  parts,  119 ;  con- 
jugations, 120 ;  auxiliaries,  122-124 ;  compound 
forms,  126-128;  New  conjugation,  129-132;  Old 
conjugation,  134-139  ;  mixed  conjugation,  141-147; 
modal  auxiliaries,  142-146 ;  passive  conjugation, 
149-154 ;  reflexive,  155—156 ;  impersonal  verbs, 
157-158 ;  compound  verbs,  159-168 ;  separable, 
160-162 ;  inseparable,  163-167 ;  of  either  character, 
168. 

AnvEEBS ,   169—170 

Prepositions 171 — 176 

Prepositions  governing  genitive,  172  ;  dative,  173; 
accusative,  174  ;  dative  or  accusative,  175. 
Conjunctions 177 — 180 

V 


Tl  CONTENTS. 

Special  Uses  op  the  Foems  op  Declension  and  op 

Conjugation 181—201 

Genitive  uses,  182-183 ;  dative,  184  ;  accusative, 
185-187  ;  present  tense,  189  ;  future,  190  ;  subjunct- 
ive mode,  191-192  ;  conditional  sentence,  191 ;  in- 
direct discourse,  192  ;  infinitive,  193-198 ;  partici- 
ples, 199-201. 

Obder  op  the  Sentence 202—206 

Normal  order,  203;  inverted,  204;  transposed,  205. 

Deeivation 207—211 

Verbs,  208  ;  nouns,  209-210  ;  adjectives,  211. 

Compound  Words 212—215 

Terbs,  213  ^  Rouns,  214 ;  adjectives,  215. 

English  and  German 216 — ^217 

The  Gebmant  Language 218 

Selected  Sentences  por  Practice  in  Applying  the 

Bules  op  the  Grammar pp.   106 — 113 

German-English  Vocabulary pp.  115—126 

English-German  Vocabulaey pp.  127—131 

List  op  Irregular  Verbs pp.   133—139 

Index pp.   141  —143 

LIST  OF  EXERCISES. 

PAGE. 

1,    2.    Nouns  of  the  first  declension 13 

3,    4.    Nouns  of  all  declensions 17 

5,    6.    Adjectives  of  various  declension 18 

7,    8.  Adjectives  as  nouns  and  adverbs,  and  compared..  25 

9,  10.     Personal  and  possessive  pronouns 30 

11,  12.  Demonstrative,    interrogative,    and   relative   pro- 
nouns    35 

13,  14.    Numerals 39 

15,  16.     Simple  forms  of  the  auxiliaries 44 

17,  18.    Verbs  of  the  New  conjugation 49 

19,20.    Verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation 55 

21,  22.     Modal  auxiliaries 59 

23,  24.     Passive,  impersonal,  and  reflexive  verbs 63 

25,  26.    Compound  verbs,  separable  and  inseparable 71 


CONTENTS.  VU 

PAGE. 

27,  28.  Adverbs  and  prepositions 77 

29,30.  Conjunctions 80 

31,  32.  Special  uses  of  the  forms  of  declension   83 

33,  34.  Special  uses  of  the  forms  of  conjugation 87 

35,  36.  Infinitives  and  Participles 92 


LIST  OF  EXEECISES  OF  SELECTED  SENTENCES. 

1.  Declension  of  nouns 106 

2.  Declension  of  adjectives 106 

3.  Adjectives  as  nouns  and  adverbs,  and  compared  . .    . .  107 

4.  Pronouns 108 

5.  Numerals :   lOA 

6.  Verbs  of  Old  and  New  conjugations 109 

7.  Modal  auxiliaries 109 

8.  Passive,  reflexive,  and  impersonal  verbs 110 

9.  Compound  verbs,  separable  and  inseparable Ill 

10.  Special  nses  of  the  forms  of  declension Ill 

11.  Special  uses  of  the  forms  of  conjugation 112 

12.  Infinitives  and  participles 112 


a        £,         e 


Aa  BbCc  D  __ 

21    a  S3      b      S    c       2)     b    @    c 

F  f  Gg  Hh  IlJj  Kk 


L  1  Mm  Nn  OoPp 

?        1       mm         5Rn       £)o^p 


Q       q 

a   q 


R         r  S         s 


T      t  U      u 

%  i       U  u 


/ 


V  T 


9^1        @     f      § 


<<^<^^ 


"W-w  Xx  Yy  Zz 


y?r9 


>^^^ 


^^^^ 


ch  ck 

i)       (f 


Compound  Consonants. 
BS  sz  Rch         ep  8t  til        tz 

ff       §        fct)      fp        ji        t^     § 


dJ,^. 


'^/y^  O^^^/^-'t^c^'^ 


ALPHABET. 

1.  (2)  The  letters  of  the  German  Alphabet  are 
as  follows: 


German 

Eoman 

German 

German 

Roman 

German 

letters. 

equiv'ts. 

name. 

letters. 

equiv'ts 

name. 

%    a 

a 

a   (ah) 

% 

tt 

n 

en 

S3,   b 

b 

ba  {bay) 

o, 

0 

o 

o 

^r    c 

c 

tsa 

% 

p 

P 

pa 

2),  b 

d 

da 

£lr 

q 

q 

ku  (koo) 

a,  c 

e 

a 

9t, 

r 

r 

er 

^,  f 

f 

ef 

<B, 

f.« 

8 

es 

®,   9 

g 

ga 

% 

t 

t 

ta 

€>,  § 

h 

ha 

n, 

u 

U 

u  (oo) 

5,    i 

i 

e  (ee) 

iB, 

t) 

V 

fou  (found) 

^r     j 

i 

yot 

S, 

to 

w 

va 

^,  t 

k 

ka 

X, 

? 

X 

ix 

?,  I 

1 

el 

d> 

^ 

7 

ipsilon 

3«,  m 

m 

em 

2, 

a 

z 

tset 

German  is  also  often  printed  in  the  same  letters  as  English. 


2  PRONUNCIATION.  [2 

2.  (5)  The  German  uses  capital  initial  letters, 
like  the  English,  at  the  beginning  of  sentences,  of 
lines  of  poetry,  and  of  direct  quotations ;  but  also, 
for  all  nouns,  and  words  used  as  nouns ;  and  for 
pronouns  of  the  third  person,  when  used  in  ad- 
dress with  the  value  of  those  of  the  second  person ; 
but  not  for  adjectives  of  nationality :  thus,  englif^, 
'English';  franjoftfd^,  'French';  bie  beutfc^e  <Bpxa^t, 
'the  German  language.' 


PEONUNCIATION. 


VOWELS. 


3.  (7)  Each  simple  vowel  sound  is  either  long  or 
short.  The  distinction  must  be  learned  chiefly 
by  practice ;  but  the  following  rules  will  be  found 
of  service :  A  vowel  doubled,  or  followed  by  \),  is 
long ;  a  vowel  is  short  before  a  double  consonant, 
and  usually  before  a  group  of  two  consonants. 

4.  (8)  31,  a  has  the  sound  of  a  in  far,  father: 
long,  in  Slal,  S3a]^n;  short,  in  Sail,  ^anb* 

5.  (9)  @,  e  long  is  pronounced  almost  like  our  e 
in  they;  short  e  is  nearly  our  "short  e"  in  men: 
long,  in  ^eer,  me]f)r;  short,  in  benn,  2Belt 

But  final  unaccented  e  is  pronounced  nearly  like  e  in  butter : 
thus,  @aBe,  gutc.  The  c  of  the  unaccented  endings  en,  cr,  el,  is 
nearly  or  quite  silent,  and  what  sound  it  has  is  the  &wf-sound 
(nearly  as  in  English  token,  poker,  uncle):  thus,  ^abcn,  fiuten, 
§abcr,  guter,  2BanbeI,  toanbeln. 

6.  (10)  3,  i  long  is  like  our  "long  e,"  or  i  m pique; 


13]  PRONUNCIATION.  3 

when  short,  it  is  more  like  our  "short  i'*  in  pin: 
long,  in  i^n,  bir;  short,  in  billtg,  ift 

?•  (11)  D,  0  has  the  tone  of  our  "long  o":  long, 
in  Tloox,  $lOtt;  short,  in  foil,  ®Ott 

8.  (12)  U,  U  long  is  our  u  in  ride;  U  short  is 
nearly  our  u  in  pull :  long,  in  U^r,  gut ;  short,  in 
S3ruft,  ©tunbe* 

9.  (13)  g),  9  is  found  only  in  foreign  words,  and 
is  ordinarily  pronounced  like  an  i  in  the  same 
situation :  thus,  ©^rup,  Slf^K 

MODIFIED  VOWELS. 

10.  (14)  The  modified  vowels  (or  umlauts)  are 
usually  written  with  an  e  after  them,  when  the 
vowel  modified  is  a  capital :  thus,  Sle,  etc.;  other- 
wise with  a  couple  of  dots  over  the  modified 
letter :  thus,  a,  o,  u* 

They  are  products  of  the  alteration  or  "  modification"  of  an 
a  or  0  or  u-sound  by  the  influence  of  an  i-sound  originally 
occurring  in  the  following  syllable. 

11.  (15)  3le,  a  has  the  sound  of  an  open  e,  rather 
opener  than  our  "short  e";  long,  in  ^lager,  pragett; 
short,  in  |)anbe,  2lepfeL 

12.  (16)  Ot,  0  is  nearest  in  tone  to  our  u  in  hurt, 
but  verging  toward  the  e  of  they.  It  is  closely 
akin  with  the  French  ei^-sounds.  Long,  in  fd^ori; 
^Bren;  short,  in  offnen,  |)olIe. 

13.  (17)  Ue,  it  is  the  same  sound  with  the  French 
u.  To  utter  it,  first  round  the  lips  to  the  u-posi- 
tion,  and  then,  without  moving  them,  fix  the  tongue 
to  say  i  (ee) — or  vice  versa.  Long,  in  Uebel,  fii^l ; 
short,  in  ©liidf,  bitnn. 


4  PEONUNCIATION.  [14 

DIPHTHONGS. 

14.  (18)  3*^  is  an  i  lengtlieiied  by  the  addition 
of  an  e :  thus,  bie,  tief. 

15.  (19)  a.  Si  is  pronounced  almost  like  the 
"long  i"  of  isle,  aisle:  thus,  93ettt,  fet* 

6.  2lt  (much  rarer)  has  the  same  sound :  thus, 

c.  Instead  of  ax,  el  are  sometimes  written  a^,  et)» 

16.  (20)  9lu  is  pronounced  like  the  English  ou, 
ow,  in  hoicse,  down:  thus,  ^am,  Sluge. 

17.  (21)  @u  is  nearly  like  the  English  oi  in  JoiY; 
thus,  ^tnttf  euer.  Sleu,  an  is  pronounced  in  the 
same  manner :  thus,  3leuglein,  S^raume* 

18.  (22)  Ui  is  pronounced  like  we:  thus,  j^fut! 

CONSONANTS. 

19.  (23)  93,  b  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English, 
excepting  when  final  or  followed  by  a  consonant, 
when  it  is  likep;  thus,  93uk,  Qtob,  Qt^dbt 

20.  (24)  S,  c  is  hard  before  a,  o,  M,  or  a  con- 
sonant ;  but  soft  before  e,  t,  9 ;  iii  the  latter  case 
it  is  pronounced  like  ts :  thus,  Sato,  Soncert,  Dcean* 

21.  (25)  X),  b  has  the  sound  of  English  d,  ex- 
cepting at  the  end  of  a  word,  or  of  a  syllable  before 
another  consonant,  when  it  is  changed  to  t:  thus, 
Damm,  ©rob,  milb* 

22.  (26)  5/  f  tas  the  same  sound  as  in  English. 

23.  (27)  ®,  (J  has  its  hard  sound  as  in  go,  give, 
excepting  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  when 
it  assumes  the  value  of  ^  (38) :  thus,  ®m^,  Xag, 
tixglid^. 


32j  PRONUNCIATION.  5 

24.  (28)  ^,  ^  has  the  sound  of  English  h  when 
it  begins  a  word,  and  also  in  the  suffixes  l^ett,  ^aft 
Elsewhere  it  is  silent.   X^  is  the  same  as  t    Thus, 

25.  (29)  3/  i  is  always  pronounced  like  our  y 
consonant :  thus,  3ci^r,  jung* 

26.  (30-3)  ^,  I  ?,  I,  2W,  m,  5W,  n,  ^,  p.  These 
letters  have  the  same  sounds  as  their  English  cor- 
respondents. 

27.  (34)  n,  q  is  always  followed  by  u,  and  qu  is 
pronounced  like  lev  (with  labial  v):  thus,  Dual, 
quer. 

28.  (35)  %  X  has  a  more  forcible  utterance  than 
in  English.  In  every  situation  it  must  be  clearly 
heard :  thus,  Sianb,  rotl^,  Slrbeiter,  marmornen 

29.  (36)  ®,  ^  has  its  hissing  sound  only  when 
doubled,  final,  or  standing  before  a  consonant; 
before  a  vowel  it  approaches  the  sound  of  our  z. 
Before  t  and  p  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  it  is 
more  generally  and  properly  pronounced  like  sh  : 
thus,  (3la^,  mJTen,  ©o^n,  93efen,  ftetf,  ©pur^ 

30.  (37)  X,  i  in  words  properly  German  has  the 
sound  of  English  t  In  certain  terminations  (espe- 
cially tion)  of  words  from  the  Latin  or  French,  it 
is  pronounced  like  ts :  thus,  ^at,  Xafd,  Station. 

31.  (38)  9?,  ^  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  has  the 
sound  of  English/.  When  it  occurs  elsewhere,  as 
also  in  foreign  words,  it  is  pronounced  like  our  v : 
thus,  t)tel;  SSater,  ©fkije,  Sacanj. 

32.  (39)  SB,  tt)  is  nearly  like  v  in  English :  thus, 
SBelle,  SBal^n ;  but  after  a  consonant  in  the  same 


6  PBONUNCIATION.  .      [32 

syllable  it  must  be  uttered  between  the  lips  alone  : 
thus,  ixod,  f^tt)cn 

33.  (40)  X,  X  has  the  sound  of  Jcs ;  but  when 
initial,  it  is  pronounced  as  z :  thus,  3lxt,  XmxtXi. 

34.  (41)  §),  9  in  German  is  a  vowel  only. 

35.  (42)  3,  X  is  like  ts:  thus,  3inn,  ^olj. 

CONSONANTAL  DIGRAPHS  AND 
TRIGRAPHS. 

36.  (43)  a.  SI)  has  two  sounds :  one  deeper  or 
more  guttural,  nearly  our  throat-clearing  or  hawk- 
ing sound ;  the  other  more  palatal,  over  the  middle 
of  the  tongue,  approaching  the  ^A-sound,  or  nearly 
as  we  should  pronounce  hy  in  hyen.  The  former 
sound  it  has  after  a,  0,  U,  dU ;  the  latter,  after  any 
other  vowel  or  a  consonant :  thus,  33ad^,  bod^,  ^n6), 
aud^;  n6)t,  i^,  S3iid^er,  gadder,  Soccer,  rei^,  eud^, 
bauc^te,  burd^,  I)old),  mand^er. 

b.  &)§f,  when  the  ^  belongs  to  the  stem  of  the 
word,  is  pronounced  as  is  or  a?:  thus,  SBad)^; 
tt)ad^fen. 

c.  Sl^  initial  (in  words  of  foreign  origin)  is  hard 
like  h,  except  before  t,  i,  where  it  usually  has  the 
palatal  d^-sound  (like  hy):  thus,  S^arafter,  Shrift, 
S|)emie,  Sl)ina ;  in  words  from  the  French,  it  often 
has  the  French  sound  (like  sh) :  thus,  Sl;arabe» 

37.  (44)  Sf  is  equivalent  to  double  f :  thus,  Sldfcr, 
fdMtX. 

38.  (45)  9ig  is  like  ng  in  sing:  thus,  ©ingen, 
ginger,  ®ang. 

39.  (46)  a.  $f  is  pronounced  as  these  two  let- 


43]  PRONUNCIATION.  7 

ters  (but  tlie  f  with  the  lips  alone) :  thus,  ^funt>, 
fd^Iiipfen. 
h.  5)1)  has  the  sound  of /.-thus,  $^afe,  ^^o^p^or. 

40.  (48)  ©d^  is  the  equivalent  of  our  sh :  thus, 

41.  (49)  f  is  pronounced  as  a  double  ^,  and  is  v 
written  instead  of  ^^  at  the  end  of  a  word,  or  after 
a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  or  before  a  consonant : 
thus,  Sa§,  pglid^*     (In  the  English  character,  f  is 
generally  written  ss,) 

42.  (51)  ^  is  the  written  equivalent  of  a  double 
I,   but  is  pronounced  like  a  single  j:  thus,  5^(0^, 

ACCENT. 

43.  (55)  a.  The  accent,  in  words  not  compound, 
is  usually  on  the  radical  syllable :  thus,  bau'fcn, 
banf'bar,  Danf'barfett. 

But  the  accent  is  taken  by  the  suffix  et,  and  by  i  or  ic  in  verbs 
having  the  infin.  in  iren  or  icren. 

6.  In  compound  words,  the  accent  is  usually 
that  of  the  first  member :  thus,  au^'gel^ett,  Slu^'gaug, 
^au^'bewo^ner. 

Exceptions  are  :  compounds  with  inseparable  prefixes  (163\ 
as  Beban'fen  ;  many  with  aE=  and  un=,  as  anmad)'tig,  uncnb'Ud) ; 
compounds  of  direction,  as  fuboft';  and  most  compound  par- 
ticles, as  \i(x%\Xi%  guijor', 

c.  Foreign  words  do  not  follow  these  rules,  and  are  often  ac- 
cented oa  the  final :  thus,  3^ation'. 


DECLENSION.  [U 


r^ 


DECLENSION. 

44.  (58-9)  There  are  two  numbers,  singulae 
and  PLURAL,  and  four  cases :  tlie  nominative,  an- 
swering to  the  English  nominative ;  the  genitive, 
answering  nearly  to  the  English  possessive,  or  ob- 
jective with  of;  the  dative,  corresponding  to  the 
English  objective  with  to  or  for ;  and  the  accusa- 
tive, nearly  the  same  as  our  objective  without 
a  preposition. 

45.  (60)  There  ane  three  genders,  masculine^ 
FEMININE,  and  neuter. 

The  names  of  most  objects  having  conspicuons  sex  are  mas^ 
culine  or  feminine,  according  as  those  objects  are  male  or 
female  ;  but  in  great  part  the  genders  of  German  nouns  follow 
arbitrary  rules,  and  must  be  learned  by  experience. 

But  the  following  rules  will  be  found  of  practical  value  : 

46.  (61)  a.  Masculine  are :  names  of  seasons,  months,  and 
days  of  the  week,  of  the  points  of  the  compass,  and  of  stones  ; 
also  many  derivatives  formed  from  roots  by  change  of  vowel, 
all  those  ending  in  ing  and  ling,  and  many  which  end  in  e(, 
en,  n. 

Thus:  bcr  ©^rud),  *the  speech,*  ber  9'^agel,  *the  nail,*  ber 
ginger,  *  the  finger,*  ber  8ie&Ung,  *  the  darling.' 

b.  Feminine  are  most  names  of  rivers,  of  plants,  fruita,  and 
flowers ;  many  derivatives  ending  in  e  and  t ;  and  all  those 
formed  by  the  secondary  suffixes  ei,  ^eit,  feit,  fdBaft,  ung,  and  in. 

Thus:  h\e(Bpxa^e,  *  speech,' btc  2)?a$t,  *  might,' bie  SSei^beit, 
'wisdom,'  bte  Orbnung,  '  order.* 

c.  Neuter  are  most  names  of  countries  and  places,  of  metals, 
the  names  of  the  letters,  and  other  parts  of  speech  used  as 
nouns,  all  diminutives  formed  with  d)en  and  lein,  most  nouns 
formed  by  the  suffixes  fcl,  fal,  nig,  and  tf)Um,  most  collectives 
and  abstracts  formed  by  the  prefix  ge,  and  all  infinitives  used 
as  nouns. 


49j 


AKTICLES. 


Thus:  ba^  ^aWn,  'the  girl,'  ba|  ^at^f  el,  *  the  riddle,' ba^ 
@ef^xa(^,  'talk,'  ba^  'Btdjm,  *the  act  of  standing.' 

d.  Compound  nouns  usually  take  the  gender  of  their  final 
member. 

e.  Nouns  of  foreign  origin,  though  with  many  exceptions,  are 
masculine,  feminine,  cr  neuter  as  in  the  tongues  from  which 
they  come. 

47.  (62)  Adjectives  and  most  pronouns  are  in- 
flected in  the  singular  in  all  three  genders,  in  order 
to  agree  with  the  noun  which  they  qualify.  They 
make  no  distinction  of  gender  in  the  plural. 


ARTICLES. 

48.  (63)  The  articles  are  declined  as  follows : 

DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


Singular, 

Plural 

masc. 

fern.          neut. 

m.  f.  n. 

Nom, 

ber 

bic         bag 

bie 

'the' 

Gen. 

beg 

ber        beg 

ber 

•of  the' 

Dat. 

bent 

ber        bent 

ben 

*  to  or  for  the ' 

Ace. 

ben 

bie        ha^ 

INDEFINITE 

Singular. 

bie 

ARTICLE. 

•the' 

Nom. 

etn 

etne 

ein 

•a' 

Gen. 

cineg 

etner 

eineg 

•of  a' 

Dat. 

cinem 

einer 

cinem 

•to  or  for  a' 

Ace. 

einen 

eine 

ein 

•a.' 

49.  (65)  The  ace.  neuter  ba§  and  the  dat.  masc. 
and  neuter  bent  are  often  contracted  with  a  preced- 
ing preposition  into  one  word:  thus,  an^,  aitf^, 
in^,  fiir^,  ^um,  beim,  etc.    In  such  contracted  forms, 


10  NOUNS.  [49 

a  preposition  ending  in  n  loses  its  n  before  m : 
thus,  am,  im,  ^om.  The  dat.  fem.  ber  is  in  like 
manner  contracted  with  p  to  jm\  Other  similar 
contractions  sometimes  occur. 

50.  (66)  Special  Uses  of  the  Definite  Article. — a.  The  definite 
article  is  used  with  abstract  nonns  and  those  taken  in  a  uni- 
versal sense  :  thus,  ba^  SeBen  ift  furj,  *life  is  short';  ba§  @olb  i[t 
gelb,  'gold  is  yellow.' 

6.  It  is  often  used  where  we  use  a  possessive  adjective  :  thus, 
ber  Skater  fd)utteUe  ben  ^o^f,  *the  father  shook  his  head.' 

c.  In  many  other  cases  the  article  is  used  or  omitted  where 
the  contrary  is  the  usage  in  English  :  thus,  especially,  it  is 
prefixed  to  the  names  of  seasons,  months,  and  days  of  the  week, 
to  names  of  streets  and  mountains,  to  the  feminine  names  of 
countries,  and  often  to  other  proper  names  :  thus,  im  2B  inter, 
*in  winter';  ber  3)2at,  *May';  in  ber  SdnxJei^,  *in  Switzerland'; 
ber  franfe  ®eorg,  'sick  George,' 

NOUNS. 

51.  (68)  In  order  to  decline  a  noun,  we  need  to 
know  how  it  forms  its  genitiye  singular  and  its 
nominative  plural;  and  upon  these  two  cases  de- 
pends the  classification  of  the  declensions. 

52.  (71-2)  In  all  noun  declension,  feminines  are  invariable, 
in  the  singular,  and  the  nom.,  gen.,  and  ace.  plural  are  alike  ; 
and  in  all  declension  whatever,  the  ace.  singular  of  the  fem. 
and  neut.  is  like  the  nom.,  and  the  dat.  plural  (except  of 
personal  pronouns)  ends  in  n« 

FIRST  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

53.  (69)  1.  The  great  majority  of  masculine 
nouns,  and  all  neuters,  form  their  genitive  sin- 
gular by  adding  ^  or  e^  to  the  nominative.  These 
constitute  the  first  declension;  which  is  then 


60]  NOUNS.  11 

divided  into   classes  according  to  the  mode   of 
formation  of  tlie  nominative  pluraL 

54.  (75)  The  fibst  class  adds  no  ending  to  form 
the  plural;  its  nominatives  are  alike  in  both 
numbers,  except  that  in  a  few  words  (about  20 
masc,  and  the  2  fem.)  the  vowel  is  modified  for 
the  plural. 

55.  (76)  To  this  class  belong  all  masculines  and 
neuters  ending  in  el,  cr,  cn ;  a  few  neuters  having 
the  prefix  ge  and  ending  in  e;  all  the  neuter 
diminutives  in  d^en  and  letn;  and  two  feminines, 
Tlntttr,  '  mother,'  and  Xod^ter,  '  daughter.' 

56.  (77)  Nouns  of  this  class  add  only  ^  in  the 
gen.  sing.,  and  take  no  e  in  the  dative. 

57.  (81)  The  SECOND  class  forms  the  plural  by 
adding  t,  and  usually  modifies  the  vowel  of  the 
principal  syllable,  though  ^ith  many  exceptions. 

58.  (82)  To  this  class  belong  the  greater  number 
of  masculines,  many  neuters,  some  monosyllabic 
feminines,  and  also  the  feminines  ending  in  nip 
and  fal 

59.  (83)  Masculines  and  neuters  take  ^  or  e^  in 
the  gen.  sing.;  the  dat.  is  like  the  nom.,  or  adds  e. 

a.  The  ending  e^  is  generally  taken  by  monosyllables,  g  by 
polysyllables ;  but  most  words  may  take  either,  e^  belonging 
to  a  more  serious  style,  and  g  being  more  colloquial.  Words 
ending  in  a  sibilant  always  take  e^. 

6.  The  use  of  e  in  the  dat.  is  nearly  parallel  to  that  of  e§  in 
the  genitivCo 

60.  (84)  The  great  majority  of  masculines  take 
the  modified  vowel  in  the  plural,  also  all  fem- 
inines, except  those  in  ni§  and  faL 


12 


NOUNS. 


[61 


61.  (87-9)  The  thied  class  adds  er  to  form  the 
nom.  plural,  and  modifies  the  vowel  of  the  stem. 
This  class  is  composed  chiefly  of  neuters,  with  a 
few  masculines.  The  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  are 
formed  as  in  the  second  class. 


EXAMPLES  :    1.  FIEST  CLASS. 


0 

©^aten^ 

©eBirgC; 

50?utter, 

'spade,'  m. 

'mountain  range,'  n. 
Singular. 

'mother,'  f. 

N. 

bcr  ©^)otett 

bag  ©ebtrgc 

bie  5ffJntter 

G. 

beg  ®^Qteng 

beg  ©eMrgeg 

ber  9Kntter 

D. 

bem  ©i^ateu 

bem  @ebirge 

ber  abutter 

A. 

ben  ©paten 

bag  ©ebirgc 
Plural. 

hk  2Kutter 

N. 

bte  ©paten 

bie  ©ebivgc 

bie  2Kutter 

G. 

ber  ©paten 

ber  ©ebirge 

ber  9KUtter 

D. 

ben  ©paten 

ben  ®ebirc|en 

ben  aWiittern 

A. 

bie  ©paten 

bie  ©ebirge 

2.  SECOND  CLASS. 

bie  abutter 

©oH 

3a5r, 

.ganb, 

*Boii,'  m. 

'year,'  n. 
Singular, 

«liand,'f. 

N. 

ber  ©o^n 

ha^  ^afjX 

bie  ^anb 

G. 

beg  ©ol^neg 

he§  -Sa^reg 

ber  §anb 

D. 

bem  ©o^ne 

bem  -3a^re 

bcr  §anb 

A. 

ben  ©o^n 

bag  3^a^r 

Plural 

bie  $anb 

N. 

bie  ©o^ne 

bie  3a^re 

bie  §anbc 

G. 

ber  ©o^ne 

ber  3af)re 

ber  §dnbe 

D. 

ben  ©o^nen 

ben  3ai)rcn 

ben  §dnben 

A. 

bie  ©o^ne 

bie  Sa^re 

bie  ^(inbe 

61] 


NOUNS. 


13 


3,  THIBD  CLASS. 

§a\x^, 

2BeiB, 

9}?ann, 

Srrt^um, 

*  house,'  n. 

*  woman,' 

n.          *man,'  m. 
Singular. 

*  error,'  m. 

N.  ha^  §au§ 

aSeib 

ber  aKantt 

QtXti)VLm 

G.  be^  §aufe§ 

aBeibe^ 

be^  3Kanne^ 

Srrt^um^ 

D.  bem  §aufe 

aseiae 

bem  2}?anne 

■3iTt()um 

A.  ba^  §au5 

2Beib 

ben  Wann 

Plural 

-3rrt^um 

N.  bic  ^aufer 

SBeiber 

bie  9Jtdnner 

3i-rt^umer 

G.  ber  ^dufer 

aSeiber 

ber  SRdnnet 

•Srrtfjumer 

D.  bett  §cittfertt 

2Beibcrn 

belt  Wl'dnmxn 

3crtJ)umern 

A.  bie  |)dufer 

aSeiber 

hie  Wtanntx 

3rrt^umei: 

VOCABULARY. 


fea^  33tDb,  ^c$f  =obe»    bread, 
ber  33ruber,  -xB,  =ubcr«  brother. 
bag  33 ud),  'd)eg,  =M)er4    book. 
bie  33utter*    butter, 
er,  pers.  pron.    he. 
ber  ©arten,  =ng,  -drten,  garden. 
\)a§  ©eBirge    ^ge^,  =ge.    moun- 
tain-range. 
giBt,  3d  swy.     gives. 
^aBen,  3dpZ.    have, 
bie  §anb,  =dnbe^    hand. 
f)at,  3d  sing.    has. 
bag  §aug,  ^cg,  4ufer»    house, 
in,  prep.    in. 
ift,  3d  singf.    is. 


ber  ^afe,  =f^^r  =^*    cheese. 
bag  ^inb/  ^beg,  -ber.    child, 
bag   ^leib,    =beg,   =ber*     dress, 

garment." 
bag  9J2dbd)en,  =ng,  =n»    girl. 
ber  9)?ann,  =neg,  -dnner.    man. 
bie  Gutter,  =utter»    mother, 
ber  Onfel,  4g,  4*    uncle, 
finb,  3d  pi.    are. 
ber  @o^n,  =neg,  =6r)ne*    son. 
bie  ^Dd)ter,  =6(^ter.    daughter, 
unb,  co?i/.    and. 
ber  SSater,  =rg,  ^dter*    father, 
bag  2Bei5,   ^t^,   4er*    woman, 

wife. 


EXERCISE  1. 

NOUNS  OF  THE  FIRST  DECLENSION. 

1.  3)er  £)nM  ift  (^is')  ein  Scuber  beg  aSaterg.    2.  ®ag 
aSeib  ift  bie  abutter  ber  ^inber.    3.  ^k  mmUx  i)at  C  tas ') 


14:  NOUNS.  [61 

Srob,  23utter  unb  ^dfe.  4,  S)er  ajJann  gibt  ('gives')  bent 
aSeibe  ba3  ®(eib.  5»  (Sr  Che')  gibt  di\  Surf)  ben  ^inberm 
6.  ®er  ®o^n  beg  9J?anne§  ift  in  bent  ®arten»  7,  J)ie 
3D^anner  ^aben  ('have')  Surf)cr  in  ben  ^cinben.  8.  !5)ag 
§aug  ift  im  ®ebirge»  9,  3)ie  aj^dbd^en  finb  C  are ')  Soc^ter 
eineg  SSaterg  unb  etner  2Kutter. 

VOCABUriARY. 

and,  unb*  in,  in. 

are,  finb.  is,  ift. 

book,  58 uc^.  man,  2}2ann. 

bread,  33rob.  month,  ber  9}?onat,  -t^,  =tc» 

brother,  33rubcr.  mother,  SO^utter* 

butter,  S3uttcr.  mountain-range,  ©eBirflC. 

chair,  ber  8tul)I,  4eg,  ^u^Ie.  part,  ber  Zf)nl,  A^,  4e. 

child,  tinb.  picture,  ba§  33Ub,  =bg,  =bet. 

day,  ber  ^aQ,  ^flS,  =fle.  room,  baS  dimmer,  =r^,  -r. 

father,  SSater.  son,  <Boi)n. 

garden,  ®arten.  table,  ber  Zx^dj,  ^^d)^^,  '^d}C. 

gives,  QtBt*  tree,  ber  23aum,  -m^,  sdumc 

has,  :^at.  uncle,  OnfeU 

he,  er.  woman,  2BeiB. 

.house,  ^avL^.  year,  bag  3a§r,  =wg,  ^rc. 

EXERCISE  2. 
1.  The  father  has  a  brother  ;  he  is  an  uncle.    2.  The 
child  is   the    son   of  the  father  and  of  the   mother. 

3.  The  mother  gives  bread  and  butter  to  the  children. 

4.  The  man  gives  a  book  to  the  son  of  the  woman. 

5.  The  father  has   a  house   in  the   mountain-range. 

6.  In  the  house  are  tables,  chairs,  and  books.  7.  He 
has  trees  in  the  garden,  and  pictures  in  the  rooms. 
8.  The  month  is  a  part  of  the  year  ;  the  day  is  a  part 
of  the  month. 


63j 


NOUNS. 


15 


SECOND  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

^  62,  (91)  To  the  second  declension  belong  only 
masculine  and  feminine  nouns.  They  form  all  the 
cases  of  the  plural  by  adding  n  or  en  to  the  theme, 
and  masculines  take  the  same  ending  in  the 
oblique  cases  of  the  singular,  while  feminines  are 
unvaried  in  the  singular. 

63.  (92)  a.  Nearly  all  the  feminine  nouns  in  the 
language  are  of  this  declension ;  also  masculines 
of  more  than  one  syllable  in  e,  as  33ote,  *  mes- 
senger'; a  few  monosyllabic  root-words,  as  53ar, 
'bear,'  ®raf,  'count';  and  many  words  of  foreign 
origin,  as  ©tubent,  3Wonar^» 

No  noun  of  this  declension  modifies  its  vowel  in 
the  plural. 


h. 


EXAMPLES  : 


Fcmini 

nes : 

Masculines  : 

©cite, 

SCI)at, 

^naBe, 

©tubcnt, 

'side.* 

*deed.* 

'boy.' 

*  student.* 

^iw^ular. 

N. 

bie  (Seite 

S-^at 

ber  Snabe 

©tnbent 

G. 

ber  (Seite 

Sbat 

bc^  ©naben 

©tubenten 

D. 

ber  ^n\t 

J^at 

bem  ^naben 

©tnbentcn 

A. 

bie  ©eite 

S()at 

ben  Snaben 

©tnbentcn 

Vhxral. 

N. 

bie  ©eiten 

%\0XZ\\ 

bie  ^naben 

©tnbenten 

G. 

ber  ©eiten 

%{)^\.Z\\ 

ber  ^naben 

©tnbenten 

D, 

ben  ©citen 

Si:)aten 

ben  ^naben 

©tnbenten 

A. 

bie  ©eiten 

S:^aten 

bie  ^naben 

©tubenten 

c.  Feminines  in  in  (or  inn)  make  their  plural  in  tnnen  :  thus, 
gurftln,  gurftinnen*  §eiT^  'sir,  man,'  has  §erru  in  the  singular 
and  §erren  in  the  plural. 


16  PKOPER  NAMES.  [64 

IREEGULAR  DECLENSION. 

64.  (97-9)  a.  A  few  masculines  and  neuters  are  of  a  mixed  de- 
clension :  namely,  of  the  first  in  the  singular  and  the  second 
in  the  plural;  as,  @taat  (=e^,  =en),  *  state';  Sluge  (=e§,  =cn), 
*eye';  and  a  number  of  nouns  of  foreign  origin,  as  3ttfe!t  (=e§, 
?en) ;  Softer  (^oftor^,  ^o!to'ren).  Others  form  their  plural 
according  to  either  the  first  or  the  second  declension  :  as  S^zii, 

*  bed,' pi.  93ette  or  33etten. 

h.  A  few  masculines  in  en  drop  the  n  in  the  nom.  sing, 
usually:  thus,  ber  9^ame  or  9f^amen,  'name.'  ^er  Sd)meT3, 
'pain,'  and  ba^  ^er^,  'heart,'  have  lost  the  en  of  their  original 
themes  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing.;  ©comers  follows  also  the 
mixed  declension. 

c.  A  number  of  nouns  have  two  forms  of  the  plural,  belong- 
ing to  two  different  significations  :  thus,  ^anb,  n.,  *bond'  and 

*  ribbon';  ^anbe,  'bonds,'  but  SSdnber,  *  ribbons.' 

d.  Compounds  of  9)2ann,  'man,'  substitute  Ccnte  for  9)?ann  in 
the  plural  when  taken  collectively  :  thus,  £aufmann,  *  merchant,' 
^anfteute, /merchants';  but  pitx  £auf manner,  *two  merchants.' 

NOUNS   OF  FOREIGN  ORIGIN. 

65.  (101)  Most  nouns  of  foreign  origin  are  de- 
clined like  German  nouns,  and  belong  to  the 
regular  declensions. 

a.  Nouns  in  urn,  from  the  Latin,  form  a  plural  in  en :  as, 
(Stnblum,  @tubien. 

5.  A  few  from  the  French  and  English  form  their  plural,  as 
also  the  gen.  sing.,  in  §, :  thus,  feibene  ©o)3^a^,  *  silken  sophas.* 

PROPER    NAMES. 

QQ.  (103)  Names  of  countries  and  places  admit  only  the 
genitive  ending  g.  If  they  end  in  a  sibilant,  they  are  not  de- 
clined :  thus,  S3crlin^,  *  of  Berlin' ;   bon  ^^^ari^^  *of  Paris.' 

67.  (104)  Names  of  persons  are  now  generally  used  with  the 
article  to  indicate  the  case.  When  without  the  article,  the  noun 
adds  g  in  the  genitive  :  thus,  ©d)iUcr^*  


69]  PEOPER    NAMES.  17 

But  masculines  ending  in  a  sibilant,  and  feminines  in  e,. 
take  cn^  in  the  genitive  :  thus,  a}2aj;en5,  ©opI)ien^  ;  and  some- 
times m  in  the  other  oblique  cases. 

68.  (106)  The  plurals  of  masculines,  with  or  without  the 
article,  have  e  (rarely  ert),  with  n  added  in  the  dative  ;  of  femi- 
nines, n  or  en*  3efu^  and  (S^^riftu^  are  usually  declined  as 
Latin  nouns. 

69.  (108)  A  proper  name  following  a  title  that  has  the 
article  before  it  is  left  unvaried  ;  if  without  the  article,  it  takes 
the  genitive  sign,  and  the  title  is  unvaried :  thus,  ber  (So^n 
ilatfer  griebrit^^,  *the  son  of  the  Emperor  Frederick';  but, 
©oin  be^  £aifer^  griebricl)*  But  §err  is  always  declined.  An 
appended  title  is  declined,  whether  the  preceding  name  be  de- 
clined or  not :  thus,  3llesanber  be^  (^ro^ett  @efd)icl)te,  'Alexander 
the  Great's  history.* 

VOCABUIiARY. 

bag  Huge,  ^geg,  =gen*    eye.  bcr  ^ame,  -en^,  =en*    name. 

ber  33anb,  =beg,  ^anber*    ribbon,  ber  ^rcuje,  =en,  =en.    Prussian. 

ha^  33ett,  =tteg,  -ten.    bed.  tn  ^rin^,  ^gen,  ^gen*    prince. 

bie  grau,  =en*    woman,  wife.  ber  ©c^mer^,  =3ettg,  '3en.    pain. 

ber  grtebe,  =beng,  =ben.    peace.  ©d)mibt»    Smith. 

griebrtd).    Frederick.  @o^I)ie,  =eng.    Sophie. 

ber  ®raf,  =fen,  =fen.    count.  bie  ©tabt,  =dbte»    city. 

bie  ©rafin,  4nnen»    countess.  ber  ©tubent,  ^tn,  =ten.  student. 

ber  §err,  =rrn,  =rren.    Mr.,  sir.  bic  ^ugenb,  =ben.    virtue. 

bvig  §er3,  =3eng,  =3en.    heart.  bie  2Baf)r^ftigfeit,  ^kn*    truth- 

ber  5laufmann,  =nn§,  manner,  mer-     fulness. 

chant.  SSiUjelm,  ?mg.    William, 
ber  BmU,  =en,  -en*    boy. 

EXERCISE  3. 

NOUNS   OF   ALL   DECLENSIONS. 

1.  !5)er  ^naht  tft  ©tubent  2,  ^er  ®raf  tft  be^  ^nahm 
Sater.  3.  !Dic  grauen  bcr  ©vafen  finb  ©rdfiunen,  4,  3)ie 
iSat)rt)aftig!eit  ift  eine  Sugenb.  5,  gvtebe  tft  in  bett  ^er^ett 
bei  banner  unb  gmuen.     6.  3)er  ^reuge  ^at  ben  ^ameit 


18  ADJECTIVES.  [70 

O^riebx-trfi.  7.  3)ie  Tl'dnmx  fmb  ^aufleute*  8,  !5)er  ®auf* 
iitann  l^at  SSdnber  in  ber  §anb,  9.  ®a5  ^itib  Ijat  ©rfimer^en 
in  ben  Slugen,  itnb  tft  tm  S3ett.  10»  ^cr  (2o()n  be^  "ipvin^en 
griebvic^  SBil^elm  ift  (Stubent  in  ber  ©tabt  93onn,  11.  6r 
nibt  ©opl^ien^  33ud}  bem  SJlar,  (So^ne  be^  §crnt  ©d^mibt. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

Augusta,  Hugujle,  =eng«  grandchild,  ber  (Bnld,  A^,  4. 

ball,  ber  S3att  :=U^3,  =d(le*  merchant,  £aufmann* 

band,  bag  33anb,  ::beg,  =be.  monarch,   ber   Wlomx^,    =d)cn, 

city,  ©tabt*  '(^en. 

count,  @raf.  ribbon,  93anb. 

cousin,  ber  QSetter,  ?r§,  =rn.  society,  bie  ©efcKfc^aft;  =ten* 

daughter,  bie  ^oc^ter,  ^od^ter.  student,  ©tubent* 

earth,  bie  @rbe,  ^en»  virtue,  ^ugenb. 

emperor,  ber  ^aijer,  =rg,  -r.  William,  3Bi(^e(m.     . 

empress,  bie  ^aiferin,  4nnen. 

EXERCISE  4. 

1.  The  student  is  the  count's  cousin.  2.  The  son  of  the 
Emperor  William  and  of  the  Empress  Augusta  is  in 
Berlin.  3.  He  has  sons,  daughters,  and  grandchildren. 
4.  The  merchant-s  give  the  women  the  ribbons.  5.  The 
virtues  are  the  bonds  of  society  '(the  society  :  50  a). 

6.  The  house  of  the  monarch  is  in  the  city  [of]  Paris. 

7.  The  earth  is  a  ball. 


ADJECTIVES. 

70.  (114)  The  adjective  is  declined  only  when 
used  attributively  or  substantively;  it  remains 
uninflected  when  used  as  predicate,  in  apposition, 
or  as  adverb. 

71.  (115)  The  attributive  adjective  always  pre- 
cedes the  noun  (if  expressed)  which  it  qualifies; 


74]  ADJECTIVES.  19 

it  is  varied  for  number  and  case,  and  (in  tlie  sin^ 
gular  only)  for  gender,  and  agrees  in  all  these 
particulars  witli  its  noun. 

72.  (118)  Each  attributive  adjective  is  subject 
to  two  different  modes  of  declension,  according  as 
it  is  or  is  not  preceded  by  certain  limiting  words. 

73.  (119-20)  a.  The  endings  of  the  first  de- 
clension are  nearly  the  same  with  those  of  the 
definite  article. 

b.  The  SECOND  declension  has  only  the  two  end- 
ings e  and  en :  namely,  e  in  the  sing.  nom.  of  all 
genders  and  in  the  accus.  fern,  and  neuter,  and 
elsewhere  en*     Thus: 

ADJECTIVE   ENDINGS   OF  DECLENSION. 

FIRST  DECLENSION.  SECOND  DECLENSION. 

Plural.  Singular.        Plural. 

n.       m.  f.  n.  m.        f.       n.       m.  f.  n. 

-e§  -e  -c  -c  -c  -ctt 

-c3  -cr  -en  -cu  -en  -en 

-em  -en  -en  -en  -en  -en 

-e^  -e  -en  -e  -e  -en 

c.  Adjectives  ending  in  e,  el,  en,  er,  tisually  reject  the  e  of  tlio 
final  syllable  before  the  declensional  ending :  thus,  ebel, 
•noble,'  ebler,  eble,  eblc^,  etc. 

d.  §od),  'high,'  loses  c  when  declined:  thus,  ^o^er,  ^o^e, 
^o^c^,  etc. 

74.  (121)  a.  The  adjective  takes  the  endings  of 
khe  first  declension,  unless  preceded  by  an  article, 
pronoun,  or  pronominal  adjective,  which  itself  has 
those  endings;  if  so  preceded,  it  has  the  endings 
of  the  second  declension. 

Thus,  as  we  say,  bcr  2Wann,  Hhe  man,'  so  also 


Singular. 

m.       f. 

N. 

-er     -e 

G. 

-e^     -cr 

D. 

-em   -er 

A. 

-en    -e 

20 


ADJECTIVES. 


[74 


guter  SJJann,  '  good  man/  but  ber  gute  Wlann,  '  the 
good  man';  as  Me  grauen,  ^tlie  women/  so  gute 
grauen,  and  gute  f^iJne  grauen,  but  We  guten  [c^onen 
graueu,  Hlie  good  liandsome  women' ;  as  bem  ^inte, 
'to  the  child/  so  gutem  ^tnbe,  and  gutem,  fd^onem, 
•  artigem  ^inbe,  but  bem  guten,  fc^onen,  arttgen  ^inbe, 
'  to  the  good,  handsome,  well-behaved  child.' 

h.  Before  a  genitive  noun  ending  in  ^,  the  adjective  is  more 
usually  of  tlie  second  declension  :  thus,  f alien  2Baf]er^,  *  of  cold 
water,'  ftoI)en  SOJutBe^,  *  with  joyous  spirit.' 

c.  The  ending  e§  of  the  nom.  and  ace.  neuter  is  often 
dropped,  especially  in  poetry:  thus,  fd)on  ^Better,  *  fine  weather,' 
falfd)  @elb,  *  false  money.' 

75,  (122)  Complete  declension  of  an  adjective, 
gut, '  good/  in  both  forms. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 

Singular, 

Plural 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

guter 

gute 

gute^ 

gute 

G. 

gitte^ 

guter 

gute^ 

guter 

D. 

gittem 

guter 

gutem 

guten 

A. 

guten 

gute 

gute^ 

gute 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

Singular. 

Plural 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

ber  gute 

bie  gute 

ha^  gute 

bie  guten 

G. 

be^  guten 

ber  guten 

bc^  guten 

ber  guten 

D. 

bem  guten 

ber  guten 

bem  guten 

ben  guten 

A.. 

ben  guten 

bie  gute 

ba§  gute 

bie  guten 

76,  (124)  As  ein,  fetn  and  the  possessives  (89) 
lack  the  distinctive  endings  in  a  part  of  their  cases 


^^  OF   THE         ^ 

UNIVERSITY   I 

Hft^^UFORH^**^        ADJECTIVES. 


21 


(nom.  sing,  masculine  and  nom.  and  ace.  sing, 
neuteii),  the  adjective  following  those  cases  re- 
tains the  ending  of  the  first  declension.  In  this 
way  arises  a  sort  of  third  or  'mixed'  declension. 
For  example :  etu  guter,  'a  good/  feine  gute,  *no 
good,'  fein  cjute^,  'his  good,'  il^re  guten,  'their  good,' 
are  declined  thus  : 


Singular, 
f. 


Plural, 
m.  f.  n. 


N.  ettt  guter  feine  gute  fein  gute^  i^re  guten 

G-.  eine^  gnten  feiner  guten  feine^  gnten  t^rer  guten 

D.  einem  guten  !etncr  guten  feinem  guten  i^ren  guten 

A.  einen  guten  leine  gute  fein  gute^  i^re  guten 

77.  (125)  a.  The  adjective  has  the  ending  of  the  first  declen- 
sion after  an  indeclinable  limiting  word,  as  a  numeral ;  and 
after  manc^,  ii^eld),  fold),  etc.,  when  used  without  an  ending  of 
declension  ;  thus,  git)et  flUte  ^inber,  'two  good  children'  ;  mand) 
Bunte  33 lumen,  'many  variegated  flowers.* 

h.  (127)  After  indefinite  pronominal  adjectives,  the  ending 
of  the  first  declension  is  generally  taken  in  the  nom.  and  accus. 
plural  ;  thus,  einlge  groje  £aften,  'sundry  big  boxes.* 

c.  After  a  personal  pronoun,  the  same  ending  is  taken  as 
after  a  possessive ;  thus,  i(^  armcr  Z^ox,  *I  poor  fool,'  but  \m 
armen  St^ioren,  *we  poor  fools.* 


VOCABULARY. 


oBer,  conj.  but. 

alt,  adj.  old. 

ber  ^^fel,  r%  3le^feL  apple. 

arm,  adj.  poor. 

artig,  adj.  good,  well-behaved. 

einige,  adj.  pi.  some. 

e^,  pron.  it. 

bie  greube,  r^ben*    joy. 

fromm,  adj.  pious. 


filudlic^,  adj.  happy. 
gut,  adj.  good. 
f)<xh^f  1st  si7ig.  have, 
^aglid),  adj.  ugly. 
^uBfd),  adj.  pretty, 
id),  pron.  I. 
immer,  adj.  always, 
fletn,  adj.  small,  little. 
Tteu,  adj,  new. 


22  ADJECTIVES.  [77 

md}t,  adj.  not.  fc^i^^trg,  adj.  black, 

teicfe,  adj.  rich.  fuj,  adj.  sweet. 

fc^(e(^t,  Gc?;*.  bad.  n)ei§,  ck?/.  white. 

f(J)6n,  a(^j.  handsome,  beautiful,  ^axtii^f  adj.  tender, 
ber  @(^u^,  4^^/  4^*    shoe. 

EXERCISE  5. 

ADJECTIVES    OF   VABIOUS   DECLENSION. 

1.  @utc,  fromme  ^tnber  finb  bte  ^reube  gdrtUd^er  9}Juttcr. 

2.  !Dev  alte  9}Jann  gibt  bent  artigen  ^naben  ein  f^one^  ^ud), 

3.  S)a^  fleine  ^inb  ber  armen  alten  grau  l^at  alte^^dgtidjc 
®d^u()e.  4.  Die  ^ubfd^e  S:od)ter  be^  reic^en  ©rafen  gibt  bem 
armen  ^inbe  neue  (Sd)u^e.  5.  gin  gnte^  ^inb  ift  immer 
glud(irf).     6.  2)a§  3Kdbd)en  ift  artig,  aber  e^  ift  m^t  pbfd). 

7.  aSeige^  Srob  ift  gut,  aber  fd^marae^  33rob  ift  ni^t  f(f)(ed)t. 

8.  -3c^  armer  Wlann  ^be  fd)Ied^te^  33rob,  9.  6r  ^at  cinige 
fii^e  Sle^fel 

VOCABUIiARY. 

always,  immer.  king,  ber  £6ntg,  =fl§,  -flc. 

bad,  fc&led^t,  unarttg*  large,  grog. 

beautiful,  fd)6n.  little,  flein. 

black,  fd)tDar3.  no,  adj.  tdn* 

box,  ber  ^ci\kn,  =n§,  ?n.  noble,  ebel. 

boy,  ber  £nabe,  =Bcn,  =Ben.  not,  ntd)t. 

clothes,  bie  0eiber,  pi.  n.  old,  alt. 

cold,  fait.  poor,  arm. 

good,  gut.  people,  bie  Seute,  n.  pi, 

liappy»  fllMUi^.  rich,  rei(^. 

high,  ^0^^  warm,  ttjarm. 

EXERCISE  6. 
1.  The  good  father  has  bad  children.    2.  A  bad  child 
is  not  happy.     3.  The  beautiful  woman  gives  warm 
good  clothes  to  the  poor  cold  children.     4,  The  little 


80]  ADJECTIVES.  23 

son  of  the  poor  merchant  is  a  good  boy.  5.  He  gives 
the  bad  boys  black  bread.  6.  The  beautiful  house  of 
the  rich  count  is  in  the  high  mountain-range.  7.  The 
old  king  is  a  noble  man.  8.  We  (tuir)  poor  people 
have  no  white  bread.  9»  Rich  merchants  are  not  al- 
ways good  people.  10.  The  beautiful  ribbons  are  in 
the  large  box. 

78  (129)  a.  An  adjective  is  often  used  as  a  sub- 
stantive, either  with  or  without  an  article  or  other 
determining  word.  It  is  then  written  with  a  cap- 
ital letter,  but  retains  its  adjective  inflection,  tak- 
ing the  endings  of  the  first  or  the  second  declen- 
sion according  to  the  rules  already  given :  thus, 
ber  ®ute,  'the  good  man';  3^ve  3?ed)te,  'your  right 
hand.' 

6.  After  etwa^,  'something,'  ttja^,  'what,  some- 
thing,' nic^t^,  '  nothing,'  an  adjective  is  treated  as 
a  substantive  in  apposition ;  it  is  therefore  of  the 
first  declension,  and  written  with  a  capital  initial : 
thus,  tixoo.^  ®Viii^,  '  something  good,'  nic^t^  5Jeue^, 
'nothing  new.' 

79.  (130)  Any  adjective  may  be  used  in  its  un- 
inflected  form  as  an  adverb. 

Thus,  ein  ganjc^  |)ait^,  'a  whole  house';  but  cin 
g  a  n  5  fd)onc^  ^aw^,  '  a  v^^hoUy  beautiful  houso,' 
and  cin  g  a  n  J  f  d^  0  n  gebaute^  ^au^,  '  a  quite  beauti- 
fully built  house.' 

80.  (135)  a.  The  endings  forming  the  compara- 
tive and  superlative  of  adjectives  are  er  and  eft 
(sometimes  shortened  to  r  and  ft). 


24  ADJECTIVES.  [80 

h,  (136)  Monosyllabic  adjectives  whose  vowel 
is  a,  c,  or  u  more  often  modify  those  vowels  in  the 
comparative  and  superlative. 


EXAMPLES  : 

Positive.                          Comparative. 

Superlative, 

fcf)on,  'beautiful'                  frfjoner 

f^onft 

retd),  'rich'                          retdjer 

reidjft 

l^ei§,  'hot'                           ^etger 

^eigeft 

alt,  'old'                             alter 

atteft 

lurj,  'short'                          fiir^er 

fUr^^efl 

fro[),  'glad'                           fro^er 

frol}eft 

bebeuteub,  'significant'         bebeutenber 

bebeutenbft 

81.  (139)   a,  A  few  adjectives  are  compared  ir- 

regularly: thus, 

gut,  'good'                beffer 

befl 

t)ie(,  'much'               nte^r,  nte^rer 

meifl 

l)ocl),  'high'                 I)o^er 

vm 

nal),  'nigh'                nd()er 

nad^ft 

gro^,  'great'              grower 

grofet  (or  groj^eft) 

b    A  few  are  defective :  thus, 

minbefl 

iilUlUti 

t1t1+ff(^Y* 

mittelft 
iuuerft 
augerft 

tt1ttl»V 

auger 

82.  (140)  a.  In  general,  comparatives  and  super- 
lilatives  are  declined  like  simple  adjectives :  thus, 
fc^onerer,  ter  fc^onfte,  etc. 


82]  ADJECTIVES.  25 

The  superlative  usually  has  an  article  or  other  limiting  word 
before  it,  and  so  is  of  the  second  declension. 

h.  The  comparative  is  freely  used  in  its  un- 
inflected  form  as  predicate  and  as  adverb ;  but 
not  the  superlative  ;  for  this,  as  predicate,  is  sub- 
stituted an  adverbial  phrase  with  axti,  '  at  the ': 
thus,  bie  Xagc  ftnb  fitrjer  m  ^erbfte,  itnb  am  furjeften 
im  3Binter,  *the  days  are  shorter  in  autumn,  and 
shortest  in  winter  ;  as  adverb,  such  phrases  with 
am,  5um,  auf^,  etc. 

c.  There  are  a  few  exceptions  :  atlerliet)^,  'charming,'  as  pre- 
dicate ;  1^0(^(1,  *in  the  highest  degree,*  meift,  *for  the  most  part,' 
as  adverbs. 

d.  To  the  superlative  is  sometimes  prefixed  aKer,  to  intensify 
its  meaning  :  thus,  ber  allerfi^onfle,  'the  most  beautiful  of  all.* 

e.  Occasionally,  adjectives  are  compared  by  putting  before 
them  me^r,  'more,*  and  cim  meiften,  'most.* 

VOCABULARY. 

aUerlteBfl,  adj.  charming.  ber  3)?enf(^,  4<i)en,  4(^en.    man, 

alei,  conj..  as,  than.  person. 

om,  ^n  ben.  bie  9ftofe,  4cn.   rose. 

au§er[t,  adj.  uttermost,  extreme,  tot^,  adj.  red. 

bag  gru^ia^r,  =r^,  sre.   spring.  ber  ©ommer,  =r§,  =r.    summer. 

(^^^\<^,  adj.  avaricious,  greedy.  unflel)euer,  adj.  monstrous,  huge. 

Qro6,  adj.  large.  ix)arm,  adj.  warm. 

l)ei§,  adj.  hot.  ber  SSinter,  =r^,  ^r.    winter. 

tarl,  Charles.  bie  ^ietbe,  =ben.    ornament. 

ber  tonifi,  =s^,  =fle*    king. 

EXERCISE  7. 

ADJECTIVES  AS  NOUNS  AND  ADVERBS,  AND  COMPARED. 

1.  S)er  antie  tft  ber  93ruber  be§  3teicf)en.  2.  S)er  ^auf* 
mann  ift  reidjer  a(0  ('than')  ber  ®raf,  aber  ber  ^onig  ift 


26  ADJECTIVES.  [83 

am  attcrreid^ften.  3.  S)ic  Sage  ftnb  tDcirmer  tm  grit^ia^r 
a(^  im  SSinter;  fte  (*they')  ftnb  am  I)et^eften  im  ©om^ 
mer.  4.  Die  Sugenb  tft  bie  fd]onfte  ^mht  be^  aKenfdjen, 
5.  2)a^  Heine  ^inb  tft  artiger  aU  bie  gro^eren.  6.  -garl 
ift  ber  fc^onfte  ber  fteincn  Snaben.  7,  ®ie  (Sd)onc  f)at 
eine  fcf)one  rot^e  9?ofe  in  ber  fd)onen  §anb.  8.  Die  JKofe 
ift  aUerliebft  9.  S)er  3)Zann  ift  dugerft  rei^,  aber  er  ift 
unge^eucr  gei^ig, 

VOCABULARY. 

autumn,  ber  §crBjl,  -te^,  4e.  sister,  bie  @d)to)ef,er,  -m. 

blue,  fclau.  tall,  flro§,  I)0(^. 

flower,  bie  33tume,  =men.  true,  n)a^r. 

learned,  qele^rt.  truthfulness,    bie    SBa^r^aftigs 

give,  3d.  pi  QcBen.  !eit;  -ten. 

pretty,  ^uBf(^.  we,  n)ir. 

red,  TOt^.  winter,   SBinter. 

seek,  Isi  pi.  fuc[)en*  wise,  Ujeife. 

short,  fur3.  young,  jung. 

EXERCISE  8. 
1.  The  rich  give  bread  and  clothes  to  the  poor. 
2.  The  merchant  is  richer  than  the  count,  and  poorer 
than  the  king.  3.  The  days  are  shorter  in  the  autumn, 
and  shortest  in  the  winter.  4.  Truthfulness  is  the 
most  beautiful  virtue.  5.  The  oldest  of  the  sisters  is 
the  tallest,  but  the  younger^  [ones]  are  prettier,  and 
the  youngest  is  prettiest-of-all.  6.  Red  flowers  are 
prettier  than  blue  [ones].  7.  We  seek  (fnd)en)  the 
good,  the  beautiful,  and  the  true.  8.  The  learned 
[man]  is  not  always  a  wise  [man]. 


PERSOITAIi  PRONOUIi'S. 
83.  (151)  The  personal  pronouns  are  thus  de- 
clined : 


83] 


PEESONAL  PRONOUNS. 


27 


rmST  PEBSON. 

Singular. 

Plural 

N. 

^ 

'I' 

h)ir 

'we' 

G. 

ntemev,  mein 

'of  me' 

unfer 

'of  us' 

D. 

mtr 

Ho  me' 

«n6 

'to  us' 

A. 

ntid^ 

'me' 

SECOND  PEBSpN. 

un^ 

'us' 

N. 

hn 

'thou' 

ir)r 

'ye' 

G. 

hdmXf  beiit 

'of  thee' 

euer 

'  of  you ' 

D. 

btr 

'to  thee' 

cud^ 

'to  you' 

A. 

bi^ 

'thee' 

end) 

'you' 

THIRD  PEBSON. 

Singular. 
masc.  fern.  neut. 

N.  er  'he'         fte      'she'       e§  'it' 

G.  f einer,  fein  '  of  him '  t^rer  '  of  her '  f einer,  fein  '  of  it 

D.  i^m  *  to  him '  t^r     '  to  her '  il}m  '  to  it  * 

A.  il)n  'him'       fie      'her'       e^  'it' 

Plural. 
m.  f.  n. 

N.  fie  'they' 

G.  i^rer  'of  them' 

D.  i^nen  'to  them' 

A.  ftc  '  them ' 

84.  (155)  a.  The  personal  pronouns  of  first  and 
second  person  are  also  used  in  the  dative  and  ac- 
cusative reflexively :  thus,  i6)  tt^af^e  mic^,  'I  wash 
myself/  tu  gtbft  Hv,  '  thou  givest  (to)  thyself.'  But 
for  the  third  person  there  is  a  special  reflexive 
pronoun,  ft^,  used  for  both  cases  and  for  all 
numbers  and  genders:  thus,  er  ttJafd^t  ftd^,  'he 
washes  himself,'  jte  geku  jld^,  'they  give  (to)  them- 
selves.' 


28  PEKSONAL  PEONOUNS,  [84 

h.  The  reflexive  pronotins  are  made  emphatic  by  adding  felBjl 
or  fetBcr,  '  self.' 

c.  The  plural  reflexives  often  have  a  reciprocal  sense,  or  mean 
*one  another':  thus,  fie  QcBen  fid),  'they  give  one  another.' 

85.  (153)  In  ordinary  address,  either  to  one 
person  or  to  more  than  one,  the  pronoun  of  the 
third  person  plural,  ©ie,  etc.,  is  used,  correspond- 
ing to  our  you;  it  is  then  written  with  a  capital 
(but  its  reflexive  ftd^  is  not  so  written) ;  the  verb 
agrees  with  it  in  the  third  person  plural :  thus, 
©ie  n)afd^en  jtd^,  *you  wash  yourself  (or  your- 
selves).' Su  (and  its  plural  i^r)  is  used  in  the  lan- 
guage of  familiarity,  of  poetry,  and  of  worship. 

86.  (154)  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular generally  takes  the  gender  of  the  noun  to 
which  it  relates.  But  it  is  seldom  used  in  the 
genitive  and  dative  for  things  without  life ;  for  it 
is  usually  substituted  a  demonstrative,  ber  or  ber^^ 
felbe ;  or,  if  governed  by  a  preposition  (in  dat.  or 
accus.),  a  combination  of  ba,  'there,'  with  the  pre- 
position: thus,  bamit,  'with  it  or  them,'  bafiir,  *for 
it  or  them  '  (literally,  'therewith,  therefor'). 

87.  (154)  a.  The  neuter  e^,  'it,'  is  used  as  the 
indefinite  and  impersonal  subject  of  a  verb,  an- 
swering to  English  it  or  there:  thus,  e^  ift  fetnS3rUi? 
ber,  'it  is  his  brother,'  e^  toax  ttvoa^  barin,  ! there 
was  something  in  it.'  Often  it  serves  merely  to 
change  the  position  of  the  subject:  thus,  e^  ftel^t 
un0  nid)t  bie  Gutter,  'mother  sees  us  not.'  The  verb 
after  it  agrees  in  number  with  the  following  noun 
(predicate  or  logical  subject):  thus,  e^  ftnb  feiue 
©ruber,  'it  is  his  brothers.' 


90]  POSSESSIVES.  29 

K  6^  is  also  indefinite  predicate  or  object,  to 
be  rendered  by  *so'  and  tbe  like:  thus,  ic^  bin  e^ 
nid^t  mi\)X,  'I  am  so  no  longer.'  Instead  of  *it  is 
I,'  and  so  on,  the  German  says  *I  am  it,'  ic^  bin  e^, 
etc. 

POSSESSIVES. 
88.(157)  The  possessives  are:  mein  *my,'  bcin 
*thy,'  fetn  'his,  its,'    \\)x  'her,'   unfer  'our,'  eucr 
'your,'  t^r  'their'  (and  3l;v  'your'). 

The  possessive  3()r  *your'  corresponds  to  Sie  'you*  (85), 
being  i^r  'their'  written  with  a  capital. 

89.  (159)  a.  The  possessives  are  adjectives  only, 
and  are  declined  as  such,  according  to  both  the 
first  and  second  declensions  (75).  But  when  used 
attributively,  before  a  following  qualified  noun, 
they  have  in  the  singular  the  forms  of  ein  (48 :  L  e. 
sing.  nom.  masc.  and  nom.  and  accus.  neut.  mcin, 
not  meiner  and  meine^).  As  predicates,  they  are 
uninflected.  Thus,  ber  33e^er  ift  t)ein,  'the  cup  is 
thine';  ni^t  mdn  33cc^er,  fonbern  beiner  or  ber  beine, 
'not  my  cup,  but  thine.' 

h.  But  instead  of  the  simple  possessives,  when 
used  with  the  definite  article,  are  very  commonly 
substituted  derived  forms  in  ig :  thus,  bet  meinige, 
bie  betnige,  ba^  3l)rige,  etc. 

90.  (161 )  Instead  of  the  possessives,  the  German  often  uses 
the  definite  article,  or  a  dative  of  the  personal  pronoun  :  thus, 
er  f(i)utteUe  ben  £otof,  *he  shook  his  head,'  e^  l<xm  mix  in  ©inn,  *  it 
came  into  my  mind.* 

VOCABUIiARY. 

aucB,  conj.or  adv.  also,  too.  geBe,  1st.  sing,  give. 

ba^  mih,  =bc^,  =ber.  picture.         gibft,  2nd  sing,  givest. 
bie  93lume,  =men.  flower.  ber  §ut,  4^§,  Me*  hat. 


30  DEMONSTRATIVES.  [91 

EXERCISE  9. 
PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1.  Q6)  gcbc  bem  ^inbe  fein  neue^  ^(eib.  2,  ®ibft  bu 
iftm  aucf)  beinen  §ut?  3.  (Sie  l^aben  meine  fd)onen  33Iu^ 
men  in  ber  §aub.  4,  Sd)  f)aU  3^r  23i(b,  nnb  xif  gebe 
3^nen  ba6  meintge.  5.  Q^x  Slpfel  ift  gut ;  metner  ift  fd)ted)t. 
6,  <2ein  ^inb  ift  fd)oner  ate  ha^  3^rige,  7,  Sr  unb  i^ 
fmb  Sriiber. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

am,  1st  sing.  Bin.  handsome,  f$on^ 

art,  2d  sing.  Bijl.  have,  ls<p?.  l^aben* 

friend,  ber  grcunb,  =be§;  =bc,  that,  re?,  pron.  ba^» 

give,  1st  sing.  Qcbe.  yes,  Ja* 

give,  2d  sing.   ^\b^. 

EXERCISE  10. 

1.  Do  you  give  the  child  a  book?  2.  Yes,  I  give 
it  to  him.  3.  Has  she  flowers  in  her  {art.)  hand? 
4.  She  has  my  red  flowers.  5.  Thou  art  my  friend, 
and  I  am  thine.  6.  Your  picture  is  handsomer  than 
his,  but  we  have  the  handsomest  picture.  7.  It  is  my 
picture  that  (ha^)  he  has. 

\  DEMONSTRATIVES. 

91.  (163)  The  demonstratives  are  ter,  fctefer, 
*this  or  that,'  jener,  *yon,  that.'  They  are  used 
both  adjectively  and  substantively. 

92.  (164)  X)tx  when  used  adjectively  is  declined 
precisely  like  the  definite  article  (48:  it  is  the 
same  word) ;  when  used  substantively,  it  has  dif- 
ferent forms  in  a  part  of  its  cases :  thus, 


95]  DEMONSTRATIVES.  31 

Singular,  Plural. 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  ber  bic  ha^  t)ie 

G.  beffen,  (beg)  beren,  (ber)  beffen,  (beg)  beren,  (berer) 

D.  bem  ber  bem  benen 

A.  htn  bic  ha^  bie 

a.  The  abbreviated  forms  of  the  gen.  sing,  are  rare.  The  gen. 
pi.  bcrer  is  used  when  a  limiting  addition  follows :  thus,  bercr, 
bic  mi(^  UeBen,  *  of  those  who  love  me.' 

93.  (165)  ©icfer  and  jener  are  always  declined 
as  adjectives  of  the  first  declension:  thus,  nom. 
bicfer,  biefe,  bicfe^,  gen.  bicfc^,  biefer,  btefe^,  etc. 
2)iefe^  as  nom.  or  ace.  neut.  is  often  contracted  to 
bic^  or  bie§. 

liefer  and  {ener  sometimes  mean  *  the  latter '  and  •  the  former.* 

94.  (166)  a.  ^er  often  takes  the  place  of  the  pronoun  of  the 
third  person  used  emphatically. 

b.  The  neut.  sing,  ba^  and  bieS  are  often  used  as  indefinite 
subjects  of  verbs,  meaning  *this,  these,  that,  those' ;  the  verb 
then  agrees  in  number  with  the  following  predicate  noun : 
thus,  ba^  ftnb  mcine  S3riiber,  'those  are  my  brothers.' 

c.  In  composition  with  prepositions,  ba,  'there,'  and  I)iet, 
'here,'  often  take  the  place  of  cas  s  of  pronouns  :  thus,  bamlt; 
'therewith,'  l^iermit,  'herewith,'  and  so  on. 

95.  (168)  Derjentge,  'that,  that  one,'  andberfelbe, 
'the  same,  he'  are  used  in  the  manner  of  de- 
monstratives, or  almost  of  personal  pronouns. 
Derjenige  is  especially  used  as  antecedent  to  a  re- 
lative: thus,  berjenige  (or  berjenige  Ttann),  melc^er 
gel^t,  *he  (or  'the  man')  who  goes.'  They  are 
made  up  of  the  def.  article  and  following  adjective, 
and  both  parts  are  declined :  thus,  for  example. 


32 


INTERROGATIVES. 


[96 


Singular,  Plural, 

m,  f.  n. 

N.  berientge  btej[etttge  ba^jent.qc  bte}emgett 

G.  be^jemgett  beqenigen  be^ientgett  beqentgen 

D.  bemjenigen  beqenigen  bemj[emgen  benjenigen 

A.  benjemgett  bieienige  ba^jenige  blej[enigen 

mTERROGATIVES. 

96.  (172)  The  interrogatives  are  ttJer,  'who,'  wa^^ 
'what,'  and  ttJeld^er,  'what,  which.' 

97.  (173)  a,  SBer  and  ma^  have  no  plural.  The 
one  denotes  persons,  the  other  things.  They  are 
declined  as  follows: 


N. 

H)cr               '  who ' 

toa^                 '  what ' 

G. 

iDcffen,  (tt)e§)  '  whose ' 

iueffeit,  (meg)    'of  what' 

D, 

mm                '  to  whom ' 



A. 

njeit                *  whom ' 

nja^  .              'what' 

K  For  the  dative  and  accusative  of  tod^  as  gov- 
erned by  prepositions  are  substituted  compounds 
with  n)0,  'where':  thus,  ttJOmtt,  'wherewith,  with 
what,'  mofiir,  'wherefore,  for  what.'  Karely,  mit 
U)a^,  etc.,  are  used. 

98.  (174)  SBcIc^er  is  declined  like  biefer.  As 
an  adjective,  qualifying  a  noun  expressed,  it  means 
either  'what'  or* 'which';  used  absolutely,  it  is 
our  'which.'  Thus,  mldjt^  33u(^,  'what  (or  which) 
book?'  n)eIc^Ci3  i)on  tiefen  Sitd^crn,  'which  of  these 
books?' 

99.  (175)  SEa^,  with  the  preposition  fur,  'for,' 
after  it,  is  used  in  the  sense  of  'what  kind  of?'  It 


103]  RELATIVES.  33 

is  then  invariable,  and  the  words  to  which  it  is 
prefixed  have  the  same  construction  as  if  they 
stood  alone :  thus,  n)a^  fiir  ein  Sud)  ?  'what  sort  of  a 
book?';  m^  fur  ©rob?  'what  kind  of  bread? ' 

100.  (176)  a.  All  the  interrogatives  are  used  also  as  relatives. 

6.  2Ba^  stands  often  for  d\va§,  'something';  \t)d(i)  is  famil- 
iarly used  to  signify  'some':  thus,  ttod)  \va^  Wnt^f  'still  worth 
something' ;  geBen  ©ie  mir  ix>cld)c,  *give  me  some.' 

c.  203 a^  is  used  for  nm  n?a^,  or  iijarum,  *  why.' 


RELATIVES. 

101.  (177)  The  demonstrative  bcr,  and  the  in- 
terrogatives tt)er,  tt)a^,  n)a^  fiir,  and  weld^er  are  used 
also  as  relatives. 

102.  (178)  3Der  and  W3eld)er  are  the  ordinary  rel- 
atives following  an  antecedent.  In  the  nom.  and 
accus.  they  are  used  interchangeably.  In  the 
dative  (except  after  prepositions)  the  cases  of  ber 
are  preferred;  and  in  the  genitive  only  beffen  and 
beren  are  ever  met  with. 

103.  (179)  a.  2Ber  and  iva^,  iva^  fur,  and  hjclc^er  used  adject- 
ively,  are  properly  compound  relatives,  or  antecedent  and  re- 
lative combined. 

Thus,  mx  hd  S^ac^t  ijorBeifu^r,  fa^  bte  glammen,  *  he  who  (who- 
ever) went  by  at  night  saw  the  flames.' 

6.  The  demonstrative  is  often  repeated  for  distinctness  after 
the  compound  relative.  Thus,  \va  md)t  i)orn)di't§  ge^t,  ber  Ummt 
guxucf,  '  whoever  does  not  advance,  he  falls  back.' 

c.  After  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  (especially  a  super- 
lative) taken  in  a  general  sense,  iua§  is  used  instead  of  H§  or 
iveldje^:  thus,  Me^,  iwa^  'con  bit  mir  tarn,  'all  that  came  to  me 
from  thee '  ;  ba§  ©tfte,  Wa^  fie  l)6rtcn,  'the  first  thing  which  they 
heard.' 


34  INDEFINITE   PKONOUNS.  [104 

104.  (180)  For  tlie  dai  or  accus.  case  of  a  rela- 
tive governed  by  a  preposition  is  usually  substi- 
tuted, when  things  and  not  persons  are  referred  to, 
the  compound  of  the  preposition  with  an  adverb. 
The  compounds  of  ta  (ration,  barau^,  etc.)  are  some- 
times so  used,  but  those  of  WO  (ttJO^on,  tDorau^,  etc.) 
are  preferred. 

105.  (181)  A  word  agreeing  with  a  relative  is  put  in  the  third 
person,  even  when  the  antecedent  is  of  the  first  or  second  per- 
son, unless  the  personal  pronoun  be  repeated  after  the  relative: 
Thus,  Mil  bu  c§,  bet  fo  gittert,  *is  it  thou  who  art  trembling 
thus  ? ' ;  but,  W  bu  e^,  ber  bu  fo  gitterft  ? 

106.  (183)  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in 
German:  thus,  tie  greunbe,  We  ic^  Hebe,  'the  friends 
I  love.' 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

1C7.  (185)  ^an  ('one')  is  used  as  indefinite 
subject  to  a  verb  (like  the  French  on,  or  our  one, 
they):  thus,  man  fagt,  Hhey  say,'  'it  is  said.'  If 
any  case  but  a  nominative  is  required,  etuer  is  used 
instead. 

108.  (186-7)  Semanb,  'some  one,'  9l{emanb,  'no 
one,'  are  usually  declined  (in  the  singular  only)  as 
nouns  of  the  first  declension ;  but  sometimes  they 
take  the  endings  em  or  en  in  the  dative  and  en  in 
the  accusative.  Sebermann,  'every  one,'  has  only 
the  genitive  Sebermann^* 

109.  (188)  etttJae,  'something,'  andniAt^,  'noth- 
ing,' are  indeclinable  substantives.     A  following 


"4.!l-^> 


Ill]  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  35 

adjective  or  (with  ctwa^)  noun  is  in  apposition: 
thus,  etma^  ®cId,  'some  money.' 

110.  (191)  DJJand^,  'many  a,  many,'  fol(^, 'such,' 
and  all,  'all,'  before  other  limiting  words  are  often 
undeclined:  thus,  fold^  etu  SJJantt,  'such  a  man,' 
i)on  ad  bem  ®lan^e,  'by  all  the  splendor.' 

HI.  (192)  25 id,  'much,'  and  tt)enii5,  'little,'  are 
also  undeclined,  except  after  another  limiting 
word ;  also  in  ein  njenig, '  a  little.'  SJZe^r, '  more,'  and 
IDCnijer,  'less,'  are  nearly  always  unvaried. 

VOCABULARY. 

Bin,  1st  sing.  am.  freunbli(f),  adj.  friendly. 

chm^f  pron.  something,  some-    man,  pron.  one,  people,  they. 

"what.  Sf^iemanb,  pron.   no  one. 

ber  greunb,  =be§,  =be.  friend.         n)a^  fur,  what  sort  of. 

EXERCISE  11. 

DEMONSTRATIVE,     INTERROGATFTE,    AND    RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

1.  3)iefe  ^xan  ift  meine  9Jtutter.  2,  SBer  ifl  ber  3Sater  ie=? 
ner  ^inbef?  3.  3^  bin  e^.  4  gjjer  fmb  biefe  ^naben? 
5.  3)a^  finb  meine  33ruber.  6.  3d)  bin  ber  greunb  beffen, 
ber  mir  freunbltrf)  ift.  7.  3^teieni.qen,  bie  reid)  finb,  ftnb  nirfjt 
immer  glMUc^.  8,  SBeld)e^  ^ni)  fjat  fie?  9.  (Sie  ijat  ha^^. 
ienige,  ba^  hn  t^r  gtbft.  10,  Ba^  fiir  etn  SUb  ^aben  ®ie? 
11.  3d)  ^abe  ba^  S3t(b  g^riebrid)^  be^  ©rogen.  12.  2Ba^ 
gibt  man  bir?    13.  9Jiemanb  gibt  mir  etn)a^  ©c^one^. 

VOCABULARY. 

anything,  etiua^.  some,  einige,  p?. 

no  one,  S^iemanb.  what  sort  of,  n)a^  fiir. 

nothing,  nid)t§.  ugly,  ^aJUc^. 


36 


NUMEBALS. 


[112 


EXERCISE  12. 

1.  Who  is  my  friend  ?  2.  It  is  I.  3.  Which  book 
have  you  ?  4. 1  have  this  [one],  and  you  have  that 
[one].  5.  What  sort  of  flowers  has  she  in  her  hand? 
6.  Those  are  beautiful  flowers  ;  but  I  have  some  which^ 
are^  uglyl  7.  These  are  the  books  which  my  father^ 
gives'  mel  8.  No  one  is  the  friend  of  him  who^  is'^  no 
one's^  friend^  9.  Have  you  anything  good?  10.  I 
have  nothing  bad. 

Note  that  after  a  relative  tlie  verb  has  to  be  put  at  the  end 
of  the  clause,  instead  of  after  its  subject.  This  order  is  indicated 
by  the  figures  appended  to  some  of  the  words  in  the  exercise. 


\ 


ISlTJMERAIiS. 

112.  (197)  The  caedinal  numerals  are  as  fol- 

lows : 

1.  etn 

11.  elf  (etlf)                    21,  ein  unb  gUjati^tg 

2.  ^tod 

12,  gtDoIf                        22.  3tt)et  unb  giDanjig 

3.  bret 

13.  breije^n                    30.  bretgtg 

4.  t)ler 

14.  tjierge^n                    40.  bier^tg 

5.  fiinf 

15.  funfge^n  (funf^e^n)    50.  fiinf^tg  (funfjtg) 

6.  fe^g 

16.  ferfiae^n  {\^d)^^{)n)    60.  fedj^tg  (ferfi^^ig) 

7.  fieben 

17.  fieb^e^n  (fieben^e^n)  70.  fiebgig  (fiebcftjtg) 

8.  ai)t 

18.  acfjtae^n                   80.  a^t^ig 

9.  neun 

19.  neunjefitt                  90.  neim^ig 

10.  gefju 

20,  3tt)an3ig                  100,  ^unbert 

1000.  taufenb              1,000,000.  mtimi 

113.  a.  The  odd  numbers,  between  twenty  and  a  hundred, 
are  formed  always  by  prefixing  the  name  of  the  unit  to  that  of 
the  ten,  with  unb,  'and,'  interposed:  thus,  brei  unb  3tt)an3ifl, 
•three  and  twenty '  (not  ^njan^ig^bret,  'twenty-three  '). 

h.  The  higher  numbers,  Ijunbert,  taufenb,  million,  are  multi- 
plied by  prefixed  numbers,  as  in  English :  thus,  fe(f)§  l)unbert, 


115]  NUMERALS.  37 

600 ;  bret  unb  adjtgtg  taufenb,  83,000.  The  German  says  einc 
9}?iGion/  *  a  million,'  as  we  do  ;  but  simply  i^unbert,  'a  hundred,* 
taufenb,  *  a  thousand'  ;  ein  I}unbert,  ein  taufenb,  mean  'owe  hun- 
dred,' 'one  thousand.' 

114.  (198-9)  a.  ein,  'one/  is  fully  inflected. 
When  used  adjectively,  it  is  declined  like  the  in- 
definite article  (48) ;  when  standing  for  a  noun,  like 
an  adjective  of  the  first  declension:  thus,  eiucr  ^Ott 
CUC^,  'one  of  you'  (but  einc^  in  nom.  and  accus.  neut. 
is  usually  contracted  to  eine) ;  when  preceded  by  a 
limiting  word  (usually  bet),  it  is  declined  like  an 
adjective  in  that  position:  thus,  bet  eine  fptad^,  *the 
one  spoke.'  It  is  uninflected  in  the  compound 
numbers,  ein  nnb  jwanjig,  etc. 

6.  ^\m\  and  trei  have  gen.  and  dat.  plur.  forms  —  gtoeicr,  gitseien; 
bxcter,  breien  —  sometimes  used  for  distinctness. 

c.  The  other  numerals  are,  with  rare  exceptions,  uninflected. 

d.  33eibc  is  often  used  for  'two' :  thus,  meine  Beiben  23xubcr, 
*  my  two  brothers.' 

115.  (211)  a.  After  a  numeral,  a  noun  expressing  measure- 
ment (unless  it  be  a  feminine  noun  in  e)  usually  has  the  sin- 
gular form:  thus,  ad)t  gu§  lang,  'eight  feet  long,'  ^etmga^,  'ten 
casks,'  5el)n  taufcnb  2}?ann  \iccd,  '10,000  men  strong';  gU^anstg 
Wl^xli  '  twenty  marks  ';  but  funf  2)?cilen  ivctt,  *  five  milf^s  distant.* 

5.  (216)  And  the  following  noun,  expressing  the  Cxx^"" 
measured,  is  usually  left  unvaried  (as  if  in  apposition  with  the 
other),  unless  preceded  by  an  article  or  other  limiting  word  : 
thus,  gc^tt  ga§  Sbm,  'ten  casks  of  beer,'  jiuei  5pfunb  St^ee,  'two 
pounds  of  tea,'  brei  (SKen  ^ud),  '  three  yards  of  cloth '  ;  but,  ein 
@ta^  biefeg  SBein^;  'a  glass  of  this  wine,'  pi^\  ^funb  guten  Stf)ee^, 
'two  pounds  of  good  tea.' 

c.  The  same  rules  are  followed  after  indefinite  numerals  : 
thus,  einiQe  gu§,  'some  feet,'  \x>\t  v>iel  ^funb  ?  'how  many 
pounds  ? ' 

d.  The  time  of  day  is  expressed  by  UJr,  'hour,'  which  is  not 
varied  :  thus,  ein  llf)r,  '  one  o'clock,'  gel)n  U(^r,  *ten  o'clock.'    For 


38  NUMERAI^.  [115 

the  half-hour,  I)aIB,  *  half,'  is  prefixed  to  the  next  higher  number: 
thus,  ^alB  fedj^,  'half  past  five.'  The  quarters  are  generally- 
counted  with  auf,  *  toward,'  and  the  following  hour :  thus,  ein 
9]icrtel  auf  bret,  'quarter  past  two,'  brci  93icrte(  auf  fieBen,  'quarter 
before  seven.' 

116.  (203)  a.  The  obdinal  numerals  are  ad- 
jectives, formed  from  the  cardinals  by  the  suffixes 
t  and  ft:  from  the  numbers  2-19,  by  adding  t; 
from  the  higher  numbers,  by  adding  ft ;  they  are 
declined  like  other  adjectives.  Thus:  t>er  jweitc, 
*the  second,'  bie  neunte,  'the  ninth,'  ba^  fed^je^nte, 
'the  sixteenth,'  ber  jmaniicifte,  '  the  twentieth,'  bte 
l^unbertfte,  'the  hundredth,'  ba^  taufenbfte,  'the 
thousandth.' 

6.  But  the  ordinal  of  ein  is  erjl,  'first';  brei  forms 
irregularly  britt;  and  ad^t,  a<i)t  (instead  of  aii^tt); 
anber,  'other,'  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  Jtt)eit, 
'second.' 

c.  Compound  numbers  add,  as  in  English,  the 
ordinal .  ending  only  to  their  last  member :  thus, 
ber  jwei  unb  jmanjigfte,  22d,  ber  l^unbert  unb  erfte, 
101st,  im  ad^tje^n  ^unbert  fiinf  unb  ac^tjtgften  3a^re, 
'in  the  1885th  year.' 

il7.  (207)  a.  For  'one  and  a  half  is  generaUy  used  anbert? 
'i)alh  ;  for  *  two  and  a  half,'  britt^alB— and  so  on,  adding  ^al6  to 
the  next  higher  ordinal. 

5.  The  name  of  a  month  is  unvaried  after  an  ordinal :  thus, 
ben  neunten  50iai,  '  the  ninth  of  May.' 

VOOABUIiARY. 
93ctUn*    Berlin.  bic  glafd)c,  <fc^en.    bottle. 

ba^  93ier,  =rg.    beer.  bag  ®Ia^,  =fc^,  -afer.    glass. 

ba^  gag,  =§e^,  =affcr.  barrel,  vat.    bag  3at)r,  =re5,  =re.    year, 
bergcbtuar,  -^r^.    February.         iung,  adj.  young. 


117]  NUMERALS.  39 

fo^et,Mshig,  costs.  bie  U^r,  srcn,    hour,  o'clock. 

bie  2Karf,  =fen.    mark.  urn,  prep.  by. 

ber  S^otoemfcer,    November.  bcr  S5icrtel,  4^,  4.    quarter, 

nur,  adv.  only.  ba§  2Baffer,  -r^*    water, 

ober,  conj.  or.  ber  SScin,  =n^,  =ne.    wine, 
ber  ^ag,  =geg,  =fle.    day. 

EXERCISE   13. 

NUMERALS. 

1.  Scrtin,  ben  4tcn  9?ot)ember  1884.  2.  g^  ift  fed^^  U^r. 
3.  &  ift  brei  ^iertet  auf  neun  U^r.  4.  3)a§  Sa^r  ^at 
gtDoIf  9J?onate  ober  365  Sage.  5.  (gin  Wonat  Ijat  30  ober 
31  Sage;  aber  ber  2te  3)Zonat,  g^eSruar,  l)at  nur  28  Sage. 
6.  3Kein  jungftcr  SSruber  ift  21  3al)re  ait ;  ber  altefte  ift 
alter  urn  C  ^J  0  7  3a^re  unb  9  5!Konate ;  ber  ^meite  ijlt  in 
feinem  25ten  -Sa^re.  7.  gu  l)at  brei  glafdjen  SBein,  fiinf 
3^a)j  Sier,  unb  nur  gmei  ®ta^  2Baffer.  8.  3)ie[cr  SSein 
foftct  ('costs')  brei  9»ar!  bie  3^(afd]c. 

VOCABULARY. 

bottle,  Stafd)c.  or,  ober. 

broad,  brcit.  pound,  ba§  ^funb,  rbe^,  =bc* 

cloth,  ba^  Zwii),  'd)t§,  =ud)er.  row,  bie  Oiei^e,  -^m. 

foot,  ber  gug,  =§cg,  =u§e.  sugar,  ber  3"<^c^/  =^^» 

long,  lang.  sweet,  fug. 

o'clock,  U^r.  yard,  bie  gUe,  4en« 

only,  nur.  wine,  SSein. 

EXERCISE   14. 

13.  27.  56.  83.  119.  472.  1071.  1492. 
1.  In  my  garden  are  63  trees,  in  3  long  rows  ;  in  the 
first  row  are  15  trees,  in  the  second  are  21,  and  in  thB 
third  are  27.  2.  My  second  sister  is  16  years  old. 
3.  My  house  is  40  feet  long,  and  25  broad.  4.  I  have 
ten  pounds  of  sugar  and  six  yards  of  good  cloth.     5. 


X 


40  CONJUGATION.  [118 

The  merchant  has  22  bottles  of  wine,  but  only  7  bottles 
of  the  sweet  wine.     6.  It  is  10  o'clock,  or  half  past  ten. 


CONJUGATION. 

VERBS. 

118.  (235)  The  simple  forms  of  the  verb  are  (as 
in  English):  two  tenses,  present  and  preterit, 
each  having  two  modes,  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive; an  imperative  (in  only  the  second  pers., 
sing,  and  pL);  an  infinitive;  and  two  participles, 
present  and  past  (the  latter  usually  passive).  All 
the  rest  of  the  conjugation  is  made  with  auxiliary 
verbs. 

119.  (237)  The  principal  parts  (from  which  the 
others  may  be  made)  are :  the  infinitive,  the  pre- 
terit indicative  (1st  sing.),  and  the  past  participle: 
thus,  lieben,  Uebte,  geliefct;  geben,  gab,  gegeben. 

120.  (246)  Verbs  are  divided  into  two  con- 
jugations, according  to  the  way  in  which  they 
make  their  preterit  and  participle. 

a.  Verbs  of  the  OLD  (or  "strong")  conjugation 
form  the  preterit  by  a  change  of  vowel  (without 
added  ending),  and  the  participle  by  the  ending 
en  (with  or  without  change  of  vowel):  thus,  geben, 
gab,  gegeben;  jtngen,  fang,  gefungen;  piegen,  peg,  ge^ 
flogen* 

K  Verbs  of  the  new  (or  "weak")  conjugation 
form  the  preterit  in  it  (or  cte),  and  the  participle 
int(oret):  thus,  lieben,  liebte,  geliebt;  ret'cn,  ret)ete, 
gerebet* 


122]  CONJUGATION.  41 

c.  The  past  participle,  in  both  conjugations,  has 
usually  the  prefix  ge. 

121.  (237)  The  personal  endings  are  the  same  ip  both  con- 
jugations :  ft  (or  eft)  in  2d  sing.,  t  (or  et)  in  3d  sing,  p^  pres.  in- 
die, only  ;  en  (or  n)  in  1st  and  3d  pi.,  t  (or  et)  in  2d  pi.  Th& 
presence  or  absence  of  e  in  the  endings  depends  chiefly  on  ease 
of  pronunciation  ;  but  it  is  usually  retained  in  the  subjunctive. 
The  infinitive  ends  always  in  n  f usually  en);  the  present  parti- 
ciple, in  nb  (or  enb  :  made  by  adding  b  to  the  infinitive).  The 
infinitive  often  takes  the  sign  gu,  *to.'  The  1st  and  3d  sing, 
subj.  always  end  in  e  ;  and  in  the  Old  conjugation  (only  excep- 
tionally in  the^ew),  the  vowel  of  the  preterit  is  modified  in  the 
pret.  subjunctive. 

a.  The  inflection  of  the  tenses  is.always  regular,  except  in 
the  2d  and  2d  sing,  of  the  pres.  indicative,  which  in  many 
verbs  show  peculiarities  ;  and  those  peculiarities  are  sometimes 
shared  also  by  the  2d  sing,  imper. 

122.  (239)  The  auxiliary  verbs  used  in  making 
the  compound  tenses  and  the  passive  voice  of 
other  verbs  are  three:  ^aben,  *have';  feitt,  'be'; 
and  lt)erbcn,  'become.'  They  are  conjugated  as 
follows  in  their  own  simple  forms  : 

a.  ^aben: — principal  parts,  ^aben,  l^attt,  ge^abt 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

FresenL 
Singular,  Singular. 

1  td^  ^abe     *I  have'  id)  ^abc  'I  may  have' 

2  bu  l)aft      *  thou  hast'     bu  ^abeft  '  thou  mayest  have 

3  er  ^at       '  he  has '         er  ^abe  '  he  may  have ' 

Flural  Plural, 

1  iDir  f)aben  *  we  have '  mx  ^aben '  we  may  have ' 

2  i^r  ^abt    *  ye  have '  i^u  ^abet  '  ye  may  have ' 

3  fie  ^aben  'they  have '  fie  ^abeu  'they  may  have' 


42 


CONJUGATION. 


[125 


Preterit 
Singidar,  Singular, 

id)  ^atte  '  I  had '  id)  ^dtte  '  I  might  have ' 

bu  l^atteft '  thou  hadst'  hn  ptteft  'thou  mightest  have* 


er  l^attc '  he  had ' 

Plural. 
tt)ix  fatten  *we  had' 
i^r  f)aiUt  'je  had' 
fic  l^atten  'they  had' 


cr  l&dtte  'he  might  have ' 

Plural, 
Wix  f}dtten  '  we  might  have ' 
i^r  ^dttet  'ye  might  have ' 
fie  fatten  '  they  might  have ' 


IMPERATIVE. 
Singular 

2  \)(At  (bu)  '  have  thou ' 


Plural, 
liaht  (i^r)  'have  ye' 


INFINITIVE. 

^abcn  'to  have' 

PABTICIPLES. 
Present.  Past. 

l^abcnb  'having'  gefjabt        'had' 

6.  (325,329)  Note  that  the  German  does  not  make  in  any  verb 
such  distinctions  as  *I  have,  I  do  have,  I  am  having,'  *Ihad, 
I  did  have,  I  was  having,'  etc.;  all  are  alike  expressed  by  id) 
IjOhe,  i(^  l)attt.  The  subjunctive  is  sometimes  to  be  rendered 
in  English  also  by  other  auxiliaries  than  *  may 'and  *  might,' 
and  sometimes  by  our  indicative  (see  191-2). 

c.  ©ein: — principal  parts,  fein,  war,  gewefen. 


INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE, 

Present, 

Preterit. 

Present. 

PreterU. 

id)  bin 

id)  wax 

t^fei 

id)  W'dxc 

hn  bift 

-bu  njarft 

bu  feiefl 

hn  iDdreft 

ertft 

cr  wax 

er  fet 

er  Ujcire 

mx  fmb 

toxx  waxen 

wix  feien 

ttjir  njciren 

i^r  fcib 

iijx  waxt 

i^r  fciet 

i^r  wdxtt 

fie  fmb 

fic  ttjaren 

fie  feien 

fie  waxm 

122] 


CONJUGATION. 


43 


IMPERATIVE. 

fei  feib 

INFINITIVE. 

fein 

PAETICIPLES. 

Present,  Past, 

feienb  getDcfen 

d.  SBerben: — principal  parts,  wevbeit,  warb  or 
tt)urte,  gen?orben* 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Present, 

id)  njerbc 
hn  iDtrft 
er  tt)trb 
mir  njerben 
i^r  hjerbet 
fie  njcrben 


trf)  ttjarb,  murbe 
bu  Ujarbft,  it)urbeft 
er  xoaxhf  Ujurbc 
totr  njurbcn 
i^r  iDurbet 
fie  njurbctt 


Present, 

x^  ttjerbc 
hvi  rtjerbeft 
er  n)erbe 
h)ir  ttjerbett 
i()r  ttjerbet 
fie  ttjerben 


Preterit, 

id)  miirbc 
hvi  njiirbeft 
er  iDiirbe 
lt)ir  it)Urben 
tf)r  UjUrbct 
fie  itjurben 


IMPERATIVE. 

trerbe  twerbet 

INFINITIVE. 

n^erben 

PARTICIPLES. 

twerbenb  getuorben 

123.  (237.8)  Note  that  in  these,  as  in  all  other  verbs,  the  3d 
pi.,  with  its  pronoun  fie  written  with  a  capital,  is  used  also  in 
the  sense  of  a  2d  pers.,  sing,  or  pi.  (85):  thus,  <Bk  f)aUn,  *you 
have,'  (Bk  VDUtt)en,  *  you  might  become,'  etc. 

124.  (243)  The  lacking  imperative  persons  are  supplied  from 
the  pres.  subjunctive  ;  thus,  ^aBc  er,  *let  him  have,'  i)ahm  \mx, 
*let  us  have,'  ^ateu  fie,  'let  them  have'  (and  ^aUn  @ie,  *do 
you  have');  and  so  in  other  verbs. 


44  AUXILIARIES.  [125 

125.  Arrangement,  a.  The  personal  verb  immediately  follows 
its  subject ;  all  its  modifiers,  as  object,  adverb,  and  so  on,  must 
come  after  it :  thus,  ic^  \v\ixU  banit  hant,  *  I  then  became  ill.' 

b.  But  the  subject  itself  is  also  placed  after  the  verb  (and 
next  to  it)  in  asking  a  question,  and  also  sometimes  to  give  the 
sense  of  'if:  thus,  IjaBe  ti^,  *if  I  have,'  ^dtte  i(^,  'if  I  had,*  or 
*had  I.' 

VOCABULARY. 

Beffer,  adj.  or  adv.  better.  fxant,  adj.  sick,  ill. 

I)ier,  adv.  here.  leer,  adj.  empty. 

Jeber,  pron.  each,  every.  too,  adv.  or  conj.  where. 

Jefet,  adv,  now.  ^ufrieben,  adj.  contented. 

EXERCISE   15. 

SIMPLE  FORMS   OF   THE  AUXILIARIES. 

1.  ^a^  ^atteft  hn?  2  3d^  ^attc  eine  g(afrf)c  SBehi,  abcr 
bic  ^lafc^e  ift  ie^t  leer.  S.  SSSaren  (Sie  im  ©ebirge  ?  4.  Sa, 
wit  ttjaven  funf  Sage  im  ©ebirge.  5.  3Wein  ®o^n  ift  fran!, 
aber  er  wixh  beffer.  6.  2So  finb  (Sie  ?  unb  luo  luaren  fie  a(^ 
fie  l^ier  toax?  7.  (Seine  Heinen  ^inber  tuerbert  jebeit  Sag 
grower.  8.  ©ei  gut  unb  bu  njirft  gliicftid^.  9.  Qij  toixxt 
jufricbett/  ^tte  id)  ein  guteg  33u^. 

VOCABULARY. 

better,  "Beffer.  sick,  fran!.. 

piece,  ba§  (Stu(f,  =!e^,  =fe.  small,  !Iein. 

EXERCISE  16. 
1.  I  am  ;  he  may  be  ;  we  might  become  ;  ye  were  ; 
they  become  ;  she  might  have  ;  thou  mightest  have  ; 
it  might  be.  2.  Are  you?  was  she?  might  he  be? 
dost  thou  become  ?  did  you  have?  have  they?  3.  May 
he  have  ;  may  we  be ;  might  she  have  ;  may  they 
become ;   might  we  have.      4.    Let  him  be ;  let  us 


128]  CONJUGATION.  45 

become  ;  do  you  become  ;  let  them  have  ;  let  her  be- 
come. 5.  I  had  daughters,  and  they  had  sons.  6.  We 
had  a  son,  but  he  was  sick,  and  did  not  become  better. 
7.  Be  ye  good  and  true.  8.  The  child  was  small,  but 
it  was  becoming  larger.  9.  This  man  had  a  piece  [of] 
bread,  and  we  had  some  wine. 

126.  (240)  Compound  Forms,  From  the  auxil- 
iaries \)<AtXi  and  fein,  with  the  past  participle  of 
any  verb,  are  made  for  that  verb  perfect  and  plu- 
perfect tenses,  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  a 
perfect  infinitive,  in  the  same  manner  as  in  Eng- 
lish: thus,  tc^  \Oi^t  flei^^bt,  'I  have  had,' id^  l^atte 
^i\)Oil\,  'I  had  had';  i^  l^abe  0^t\)<i%  'I  may  have 
had,'  id^  \ixiit  o^t\)Ci^i,  'I  might  have  had';  gel;abt 
l)aben,  'to  have  had'; — and  so  ic^  bin  gewefen,  i^ 
tt)ar  gettjefen,  id^  fei  gewcfen,  ic^  ware  gewefen ;  gewefen 
fein;  'I  have  been,'  etc. 

12  7  •  (241)  Most  verbs  (including  all  transitives, 
reflexives,  and  impersonals)  take  l^aben  as  auxiliary; 
but  fein  is  taken  instead  by  a  number  of  intran- 
sitives,  as  fein,  n^erben,  ge^en,  fommen,  fallen,  bleiben, 
begegnen,  folgen,  and  especially  by  such  as  signify 
a  change  of  condition  or  a  movement  of  transi- 
tion. 

128,  (240)  a.  From  the  auxiliary  werben,  with 
the  infinitives,  present  and  perfect,  are  made 
(from  the  pres.  indie,  and  subj.)  a  future  and 
future  perfect,  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and 
(from  the  pret.  subj.)  a  conditional  and  conditional 
perfect:  thus,  ic^  tt)erbe  lf)aben,  'I  shall  have,'  id^ 


46 


NEW  CONJUGATION. 


[128 


ttJerte  geljabt  l^aben,  *I  shall  have  had'  (the  sub- 
junctives are  the  same  in  the  1st  pers.) ;  x6)  ttJUrbe 
l^aben,  'I  should  have/  i^  wurbe  Qt^aU  ])aUn,  *I 
should  have  had ' ; — and  so  i^  werbe  fein,  id^  werbe 
gewefcn  fein;  i^  mxU  fein,  id^  ii^iirbe  getDcfen  feim 

h.  The  passive  is  also  made  with  hjcrben :    see  below,   149. 

c.  Note  that,  in  the  compound  forms  containing  both  an  in- 
finitive and  a  participle,  the  participle  comes  before  the  infin- 
itive, by  an  arrangement  the  reverse  of  that  in  English. 

NEW  CONJTJGATIOlSr. 

129.  (247)  a.  Below  is  given  the  complete  in- 
flection of  a  verb  of  the  New  conjugation,  liebeU; 
*love,'  taking  l;aben  as  auxiliary. 

Principal  parts : — lieben,  Itebtc,  geliebt 


INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present,           FreterUj 

Present 

Preterit, 

*  I  love,'  etc.  *  I  loved,'  etc. 

*  I  may  love,' 

etc.  •  I  might  love, 'etc. 

I  id)  liebe           liebtc 

liebe 

liebete  (liebte,  2C.) 

2  txx  Uebft          liebtefl 

liebefl 

liebeteft 

3  er  liebt            liebte 

liebe 

liebete 

I  n?ir  Heben       liebteit 

lieben 

liebcten 

2  i()r  liebt          liebtet 

liebet 

liebetet 

3  fie  lieben         liebten 

lieben 

liebeten 

Perfect, 

•I  have  loved. 

'etc. 

I  tc^  ^abc  geliebt 

IjoAt  geliebt 

2  \iVi  ^aft  geliebt 

^abeft  geliebt 

3  er  ^at  geliebt 

Ijdht  geliebt 

I  \mx  ^aben  geliebt 

l^aben  geliebt 

2  t^r  ^abt  geliebt 

^abet  geliebt 

3  fie  ^aben  geliebt 

l^aben  geliebt 

129]  NEW   CONJUGATION.  47 

IMPEBATIVE,  *love,'  etc. 

1  tieben  Wiv 

2  UeOe  (Uebe  bu)  Ikht  (tiebt  U)r) 

3  liebc  er  Ikhtn  fie 

INFINITIVE,  'love  (to  love  J'  etc. 
Present,  Perfect. 

Ueben  (^u  Ueben)         getiebt  ^aben  (geliebt  ju  ^ben) 

PARTICIPLES,  'loving,  loved.' 
Present,  Past  or  Passive, 

liebenb  gcUebt 

J.  Further,  the  conjugation  (only  the  synopsis 
of  the  compound  tenses)  of  a  verb  taking  feitt  as 
auxiliary,  namely  \i?ant)ern,  *  wander.' 

Verbs  ending  in  the  infin.  in  eln  and  crn  usually  drop  the  e  of 
the  personal  ending ;  or,  if  that  be  retained,  the  e  of  the  final 
syllable  of  the  root. 

Principal  parts : — wanbern,  tt)anberte,  gett)anbert. 


INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

li)  wanbcre  (wanbre) 

njanbere  (n^anbre) 

\i\x  manberft 

itjmtbereft  (manbreft) 

cr  njanbert 

tnanbere  (manbve) 

xcixx  hjanbern 

iranberen  (tDonbreit) 

\\)x,  ttjanbert 

iranberet  (tuanbret) 

fie  ttjanbcm 

Preterit, 

itjanberen  (wanbren) 

id)  tuanberte 

hjanbe^te 

bu  njanberteft 

n)anberteft 

er  iDanberte 

njanbertc 

n)ir  manbertctt 

njanberten 

i^r  nianbertet 

hjanbertet 

fte  tDanbertcrt 

njanberten 

48  NEW  CONJUGATION.  fl29 

Perfect 

\i)  Vm  geiuaiibert,  k.  fei  gettjanbcx't,  k» 

riuperfect. 

id)  \oax  geujaubert,  ac.  irate  getoanbert,  2C. 

Future. 

\6)  toerbe  ttjanbern,  2c.  Juerbe  lt)anbern,  k. 

Future  Ferfect. 

\^  itjerbe  gemanbert  fein,  2C.        Jt)erbc  gemanbert  fctit,  2C. 

CONDITIONAL.  CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 

xi)  iDurbe  tranbern,  2C.  itjurbe  geti^anbevt  fein,  :c. 

IMPERATIVES. 

njanberc  (njanbrc) 

INFINITIVE. 
Presentf  Perfect 

iuanbent  genjanbert  fein 

PARTICIPLES. 
Presenty  Past 

h)anbernb  geujanbert 

130.  (243)  Verbs  of  the  New  conjugation  ending  in  the  in- 
fin.  in  iren  or  ieren  do  not  take  the  prefix  ge  in  the  participle  : 
thus,  flubiren,  ftubirt ;  reateren,  regiert. 

131.  (249)  A  few  verbs  of  this  conjugation  ending  in  ertnen 
or  enben  change  the  radical  vowel  e  to  a  in  the  pret.  ind.  and 
the  past  pple.:  thus,  !ennen,  fannte  (subj.  fcnntc),  ge!annt ;  fcnben, 
fanbte  (subj.  fenbetc),  gefanbt,  etc. 

132.  (250)  S3ringen,  'bring,*  and  benfen,  *  think,'  have  the 
princ.  parts  Bringcn,  brac^te  (subj.  Brdc^tc),  geBxad)t;  ben!en,  bad)tc 
(subj.  bad)te),  gebad)t. 

For  the  modal  auxiliaries,  of  mixed  conjugation,  see  below, 
142. 

133.  Arrangement,  a.  In  forming  a  sentence  that  contains  a 
compound  tense,  the  impersonal  part  of  the  verb,  the  participle 
or  infinitive  (or  both  :  and,  in  this  case,  with  the  participle 


133] 


KEW  CONJUGATION. 


49 


before  the  infinitive),  is  put  at  the  end  of  the  whole  sentence, 
after  the  other  qualifiers  of  the  predicate  -  as  object,  adverb, 
predicate  noun  or  adjective,  etc.:  thus,  id)  ^abe  i()n  gcIieBt,  'I 
have  loved  him,'  fie  mxhtn  un^  nie  xc^t  lieben,  *  they  will  never 
really  love  us,'  ttjir  ivurben  n'xdjt  jo  iueit  i^on  ^ier  gcttjanbert  feirt, 
*  we  should  not  have  wandered  so  far  from  here.' 

6.  But  after  a  relative,  or  a  subordinating  conjunction  (180) — 
as  'if,'  'because,'  '  when,'  'while,'  'that'— the  personal  part  of 
the  verb,  or  the  auxiliary,  is  transposed  to  the  very  end  of  the 
clause,  and  put  after  participle  and  infinitive  :  thus,  Jijcnn  ic^ 
ir)n  gelieBt  ijahe,  '  if  I  have  loved  him,'  n)eit  ftc  un^  nie  red^t  UeBen 
tucrbett,  'because  they  will  never  really  love  us,'  ba§  ttixx  nic^t  fo 
toett  toon  I)ter  gettoanbert  fein  njurben,  *  that  we  should  not  have 
wandered  so  far  from  here.' 


VOCABULARY. 


atBciten,  v.  work. 

Bet,  prep,  by,  with, 

ber  93rief,  =fe§,  fc*  letter. 

Bringen,  v.  bring,  carry. 

bort,  adv.  there,  yonder. 

fortan,  adv.  henceforth. 

iebermann,    every   man,    every 

one. 
faufen,  v.  buy. 
fenncn,  v.  know,  be  acquainted 

with, 
lang,  adj.  long. 
leBcn,  V.  live. 


lieBen,  v.  love. 
loBen,  V.  praise, 
me^r,  adv.  more, 
nad),  prep,  after,  to. 
xzM,  adv.  really,  very. 
reifen,  v.  travel,  journey, 
fd^itsad),  adj.  weak,  feeble, 
forgen,  v.  care,  take  care. 
ftutiren,  v,  study. 
!t)iel,  adj.  much,  many, 
iueil,  conj.  because,  since, 
njenn,  conj.  when,  if. 
ttJO^nen,  v.  dwell. 


EXERCISE   17. 

VERBS  OF  THE  NEW  CONJUGATION. 

1.  SB  en  liebft  bu?  2.  3rf)  Uebe  jcberttiann,  ber  tnic^  lieBt. 
3.  aSo  ^[tbem33ruber  genjefen?  4.  @r  Ift  nad) 'ipari^  gereift, 
unb  ^t  mtr  etn  nene^  Sleib  gefauft.  5.  3rf)  ^jdhc  meinem 
J^reunbe  einen  langen  33rief  gefd)tcft.  6.  5)er  3«ann  Ijat  in 
jenem  ^an^t  Qmo^ni,  aber  er  irirb  fortan  bei  feinen  Sinbevn 


60  NEW  CONJUGATION.  [133 

Icben.  7.  gr  hJtrb  nidf)t  nte^r  arbeiten,  ireil  er  fo  alt  unb 
\iftoai)  gcnjorben  ift  8»  ©eiuc  flinber  Iteben  ibn,  unb  ton^ 
ben  fiir  Ujn  forgen.  9.  Soben  toix  t^n  unb  fie.  10.  SKeinc 
Sinber  hjurben  fiir  nti^  geforgt  ^aben,  iuenn  xi)  alt  gen)efen 
marc.  11.  !Da^  aKabc^en,  ha^  cr  red)t  gut  fannte,  l^atte  U)m 
Uieic  fd^one  iBlumen  gebrad)t.  12.  gr  ift  nad^  33ertin  gereift, 
unb  UJtrb  bort  ftubiren. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

because,  n^etL  now,  adv,  {efet* 

bring,  v,  Brtngett.  often,  adv.  oft. 

buy,  V,  faufcn.  Paris,  ^ari^. 

dress,  ba§  ^tcib,  =be§,  =ber.  praise,  v.  (oBcn. 

enough,  atZv.  gcnug.  say,  v.  fagen. 

follow,  V.  foI(5cn.  that,  conj.  bag. 

henceforth,  adv.  fortan.  there,  adu.  ba,  bort. 

journey,  v.  reifen.  travel,  v.  reifen. 

live,  V.  leben.  Tuesday,  ber  ©ienftag,  =Qg,  =ge. 

love,  V.  lieBen.  very,  adv.  fe^r. 

money,  ha^  ©clb,  sbe^,  ?bcr.  wandem,  v.  ioanbern. 

new,  adj.  neu.  work,  v.  arBeiten. 

EXERCISE   18. 

1.  I  love ;  we  have  loved  ;  he  will  love  ;  you  would 
have  loved.  2.  Had  he  lived?  should  you  live?  do 
they  live?  3.  K  he  has  praised;  because  we  had 
praised  ;  that  thou  wouldest  have  praised.  4  She  has 
traveled  ;  would  you  have  wandered?  that  they  will 
have  followed.  5.  We  have  loved  our  friends,  because 
they  have  loved  us.  6.  Let  us  always  love  the  good, 
the  beautiful,  and  the  true.  7.  She  has  been  very 
rich,  but  she  is  now  poor.  8.  I  shall  work  for  her, 
and  she  will  become  happy.  9.  We  have  lived  in 
Berlin,  but  we  shall  live  henceforth  in  Paris.  10.  She 
journeyed  on  Tuesday  to  the  city,  and  is  bringing  me 


136]  OLD   CONJUGATION.  51 

a  new  dress,  which  she  has  bought  there.  11 »  She 
would  have  bought  two  dresses,  if  she  had  had  money 
enough.  12.  She  has  offcen  said  to  me  that  she  loves 
me. 

OLD  COTsTJUaATIOW. 

134.  (262)  In  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  the 
radical  vowel  always  differs  in  the  preterit  from 
the  present  (and  infinitive) ;  in  the  participle  it 
sometimes  agrees  with  the  present,  and  sometimes 
with  the  preterit,  but  it  sometimes  differs  from 
both. 

135.  (264-7)  Of  those  having  a  different -vowel  in  each  of  the 
prin.  parts,  the  most  important  classes  are  those  having 

a.  i-a-u  (oro):  thus,  fingen,  fcing,  gefungen,  'sing';  (f^innen, 
f^cinn,  gef^onnen,  'spin.') 

6.  e-a-o  :  thus,  Brccl)en,  Brac^,  geBrodBen,  *  break.* 

Of  those  having  the  same  vowel  in  infin.  and  participle,  the 
most  important  have 

c.  e-a-e:  thus,  gcBen,  gaB,  gegeBen,  'give.' 

d  a-u-a :  thus,  jd)lagen,  fd)Utg,  gejc[)Iagen,  *slay.* 

€.  a-ie,  i-a  :  thus,  faUen,  ftel,  gefaEen,  *  fall.' 

Of  those  having  the  same  vowel  in  pret.  and  participle,  the 
most  important  have 

/.  el-t,  ie-i,  ie :  thus,  Bcigen,  Big,  geBtffen,  'bite';  trciBen,  trieB, 
getrieBen,  'drive.* 

g,  ie  (or  au,  u)-o-o  :  thus,  fliegen,  flog,  gtflogen,  '  fly.* 

Besides  these,  there  are  a  number  of  minor  classes  and  ir- 
regular cases.  All  the  verbs  of  this  conjugation  have  their 
forms  given  in  the  list  of  Irregular  Verbs  at  the  end  of  the  book 
(p.  120  C) 

136.  (268)  a.  In  the  present  indie,  2d  and  3d 
singular,  a  radical  e  is  usually  changed  to  i  if 
short,  and  to  ie  if  long,  and  a  radical  a  is  modified 
(to  a) :  thus,  fpre^c,  fpri^ft,  [priest;  fe^e,  ftef)ft,  fte^t; 
trage,  tragft,  tragt. 


52  OLD   CONJUGATION.  [136 

6.  The  same  change  of  e  (not  of  a)  is  made  in  the  2d  sing, 
imperative,  and  the  ending  e  is  in  such  cases  almost  always 
omitted :  thus,  ^px'id),  fiel)  (but  trage). 

c.  Some  verbs  omit  or  take  these  changes  irregularly :  e.g. 
Qc^t,  fle^t,  etc. ;  nimmt  (from  nd}imn),  tx'xtt  (from  treten),  gieBt  or 
gibt  (from  geten), 

d.  After  these  altered  vowels,  the  2d  pers.  ending  is  fl  (not  ejl\ 
except  after  a  sibilant  (and  sometimes  even  there),  and  the  3d 
pers.  ending  is  t  (not  ct) ;  and,  after  final  t  or  tf)  of  a  root,  this  t, 
not  being  heard,  is  also  not  written :  thus,  gelte,  gtlt(l,  gilt ; 
xat^e,  xaif)^f  xai^, 

e.  For  other  irregularities,  see  the  List  of  Irregular  Verbs. 

137.  (269)  a.  In  the  preterit,  the  final  consonant  not  in- 
frequently shows  irregularities  :  e.g.  \d)xat  from  fd)re(fen,  fiel  from 
faEen,  tarn  from  fommen ;  xitt  from  reiten,  litt  from  leiben  ;  3og  from 
gie^en  ;  ging  from  ge^en,  ftanb  from  ftcl)cn,  tf)at  from  t^un.  ' 

h.  Some  verbs  have  a  double  form  in  the  preterit,  one  form 
being  in  most  cases  the  usual  one,  the  other  archaic  or  pro- 
vincial. Ordinarily,  then,  a  subj  unctive  is  made  from  each  one 
of  these  two  forms. 

c.  The  pret.  subj.  is  regularly  formed  from  the 
indie,  by  adding  e  (in  1st  pers.)  and  modifying  the 
vowel  if  possible:  thus,  fang,  [ange;   fam,  famt; 

138.  (271)  The  ending  of  the  participle  is  ett 
(rarely  n  only). 

As  regards  the  final  consonaut  of  the  root,  the  participle 
shares  in  part  in  the  irregularities  of  the  preterit.  (Iff en,  '  eat,* 
has  gegeffen. 

139.  (236)  a.  As  example  of  the  complete  in- 
flection of  a  verb  of  the  Old  conjugation  having 
][)abeu  as  auxiliary  may  be  taken  geben,  *give.' 

Only  the  simple  forms  will  be  given  in  full  ;  the  compound 
tenses  are  inflected  precisely  like  the  corresponding  ones  of 
lieBen  (129). 


139j 

OLD   CON 

JUGA 

TION. 

b\ 

Principal  parts  :— 

-geben,  j^ab,  gegebem 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Preterit 

Present. 

Preterit. 

id)  gebe 

gab 

gebe 

gdbe 

bu  giebft  (gtbft) 

gabft 

gebeft 

gdbeft 

er  giebt  (gibt) 

gab 

gebc  , 

gdbe 

njtr  gebert 

gaben 

geben 

gdben 

i^r  gebt 

gabt 

gebet 

gdbet 

fie  geben 

gabert 

geben 

gdJben 

Perfect. 

tc^  ijaht  gcgeben 

etc. 

f}ah^  gegeben  etc 

1. 

Pluperfeci 

( 

id)  ^atte  gegeben 

etc. 

iydtk  gegeben  etc. 

Future. 

ic^  inerbe  geben  < 

3tc. 

hjerbe  geben  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 
id)  merbe  gegeben  ^aUn  etc.  merbe  gegeben  ^aben  etc. 

CONDITIONAL.  CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 

id)  njiirbe  geben  etc.  njiirbe  gegeben  l^aben  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

gib  or  gieb  (bu)  gebt  (i^r) 

INFINITIVE. 
Present.  Perfect. 

(3u)  geben  gegeben  (^u)  (jaben 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present.  Past  or  Passive. 

gebenb  gegeben 

h.  An  example  of  verbs  having  fetn  as  auxiliary 
is  fommen,  *  come.'     Only  the  synopsis  is  given. 

fommen,  fam,  gefommen. 
fommc  !ommc 

!am  !dme 

bin  gelommen  fei  gefommen 


54  OLD  CONJUGATION.  [139 

ttjar  (jefommeit  .      hjdre  gefommeit 

iDerbe  !ommen  tDerbe  !ommen 

tuerbe  gefommen  fern  tuerbe  gefommen  fein 

njurbc  fommen 
^mx\>^  gefommen  fein 
fomme  (!omm) 
lommen  gefommcu  fein 

fommenb  gefommen 

140.  Arrangement,  a.  In  the  regnlar  order  cf  the  sentence, 
only  the  general  connectives  meaning  *  and '  *  but '  *  for '  '  or ' 
(178)  are  allowed  to  stand  along  with  the  subject  before  the  verb. 

6.  But  a  member  of  the  predicate  of  any  kind  may  be  put,  foi 
emphasis  or  euphony,  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  with  the 
further  effect  to  invert  the  order  of  the  sentence,  putting  the 
subject  next  after  instead  of  next  before  the  personal  verb  ; 
thus,  instead  of  icf)  l^aBe  i^n  oft  in  SBerlin  flefe^en,  *  I  have  seen 
him  often  in  Berlin,*  one  may  say,  i^n  ^aBe  i(^  oft  in  35erUn  (je: 
fe^cn,  oft  ^aBe  icb  iBn  in  93erlin  9efet)en,  in  Berlin  ^aBe  id)  i^n  oft  Qe= 
fel)en,  and  even  0efet)en  ^aBe  ic^  i^n  oft  in  S3erlin. 

VOCABULARY. 

anbet/  adj.  other,  else.  m\t,  prep.  with. 

BleiBen,  v.  0.  remain.  nie,  adv.  never. 

buftig,  adj.  fragrant.  rufen,  v.  0.  call. 

fatten,  v.  0.  fall.  fc^Iagen,  v.  0.  strike, 

finben,  v.  0.  find.  fcfereiBen,  v. .  0.  write. 

flicQen,  V.  0,  fly.  fe^cn,  v.  0.  look. 

ficBen,  V.  0.  give.  ftngen,  v.  0.  sing. 

ba§  ©efc^cnf,  =fe^,  -h.  gift.  fuc^en,  v.  N.  seek. 

Ijeute,  adv,  to-day.  iiBer,  prep,  over,  above,  higher 

^od),  adj.  high.  than. 

fommen,  v.  0.  come.  bet  SSogel,  -IB,  =6p,eL    bird. 

laufen,  v.  0.  run.  njcurum,  odu.  or  cow/,  why,  where- 

i)a^  Cieb,  =bc^,  -bet.    song.  fore. 

ba^  2iebd)en,  -n^,  =n.  little  song,    bal  dimmer,  ^r^,  -x*    room. 


140]  OLD   CONJUGATION.  55 

EXERCISE  19. 
VERBS   OF   THE   OLD    CONJUGATION. 

1.  5Dtehte  ©d^mefter  tft  gefommen,  unb  ^at  mir  ein  fcf)one3 
®efd)en!  gegeben.  2.  ®er  fd)(ed)te  Snabc  frf)(uc|  feinen  fleinen 
Sruber  tnit  etnem  nrogett  ®tocf.  3.  2)ie  SSoqet  fUegen  ^orf) 
itbcr  ber  Srbc  itnb  fallen  md)t.  4.  S)ie  SKenfd^cn  miirbeit 
fatten,  luenn  fie  pgen.  5.  aBarnnt  (cinft  biefer  aWann? 
6.  gr  fn^t  etma^,  aber  ev  tuirb  e^  nt^t  finben.  7.  §ente 
^abe  ic^  3()re  ©c^tDeftern  ni^t  gefe^en  ;  tx)o  finb  fie?  8. ®ie 
flnb  in  i^rem  ^itttmer  geblieben  ;  bie  eine  frf)reibt  eincn  Srief, 
unb  bie  anbere  fiugt  cin  Sieb.  9.  ©ingen  ©ie  ntir  ein  fd^one^ 
Siebd)en.  10.  Qdj  toxmm,  lueil  bu  mic^  gerufen  ^aft.  11.  ®icf) 
f)aU  id}  nid)t  gerufen.  12.  S)em  artigen  9Jfabc^en  gab  er 
bnftige  aSIumen.  13.  Unartigen  Sinbern  werben  toxv  nie 
etma^  geben.  14.  SBdreft  hn  artiger,  fo  gdbe  ii)  bir  etn)a^ 
®^one^. 

VOCABULARY. 

apple,  ber  5f^fel,  -W,  5(e^feL  present,  ®cfd)enf. 

another,  ein  anber.  see,  v,  fel^en. 

bite,  V.  Beigen,  0.  sing,  v.  fingen. 

break,  v.  hxcdjerif  0.  song,  8teb* 

cliurch,  bie  £ird)e,  -en.  speak,  v.  f^recr)cn,  0. 

come,  V.  fommen.  strike,  v,  fc^lagen. 

dog,  ber  §unb,  =be§,  -be.  take,  v.  nel)men,  0. 

fall,  V.  fallen.  then,  adu.  tann. 

give,  v.  (jcBen.  to-day,  adv.  ()eute. 

hear,  v.  :^oren,  K  write,  v.  fd)retben* 

louder,  adv.  ^o^er.  yesterday,  odu.  geftern. 
never,  ado.  nie* 

EXERCISE  20. 
1.  I  give  ;    givest  thou  ?   he  has  given ;   we  would 
give,     2.  He  falls ;   they  fell ;  that  he  may  fall ;  you 


56  MIXED   CONJUGATION.  [141 

"had  faUen.  3.  Break ;  hast  thou  broken  ?  we  shall 
break  ;  they  broke  ;  that  they  might  break.  4  Speak 
louder,  and  we  shall  hear  better.  5.  See !  what  is  he 
doing  there  ?  6.  The  dog  bit  the  boy,  because  the  boy 
had  struck  him.  7.  If  the  boy  strikes  the  dog,  then 
(fo)  he  will  bite  him.  8.  The  man  had  come  and  had 
given  me  the  letter  which  my  friend  wrote  to  me. 
9.  Let  us  sing  this  little  song.  10.  Now  we  shall  sing 
another  song,  which  you  have  never  seen.  11.  To  thee 
I  give  this  apple  ;  come  and  take  it.  12.  If  fche  child 
were  better,  (then,  fo)  I  should  give  it  a  more  beauti- 
ful present.  13.  Yesterday  we  saw  him  in  the  church, 
but  to-day  he  was  not  there.  14.  There  I  have  often 
seen  him. 

V  y:-— ^...IVCIXED  CONJUGATIOlSr. 

141.  (272)  Some  verbs  make  a  part  of  their  forms  according 
to  the  New  and  a  part  according  to  the  Old  conjugation,  or  have 
alternative  forms  of  either.  For  these,  see  the  list  of  Irregular 
Verbs  (p.  133). 

142.  (251)  Modal  Auxiliaries,  These  are  biirfen, 
'be  allowed,'  fonnen,  *can,  be  able,'  mogen,  'like, 
choose'  (rarely  'may'),  mitffen,  'must,  be  obliged, 
have  to,'  foHen,  'shall,  be  to,'  nJoUcu,  'will,  be  willing, 
wish.'  They  have  a  mixed  inflection,  their  present 
being  like  a  preterit  of  the  Old  conjugation,  but 
the  rest  being  of  the  New.  They  are  conjugated 
in  full,  only  lacking  (except  ttJoUen)  an  imperative. 

a.  These  verbs  are  used  along  with  the  infinitives  of  other 
verbs,  impressing  upon  them  modifications  of  meaning  analo- 
gous with  those  expressed  by  the  forms  of  conjugation  of  some 
languages. 

K  Their  simple  foivms  are  as  follows  : 


143] 


MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


57 


Indicative  Present 


mag  mug  foH  hjill 

ntagft  ntu^t  foHft  tt)iU\t 

mag  mug  foil  tt)iU 

mogen  muffen  foKcn  tooUm 

mogt  miigt  foUt  troUt 

mogen  muffen  foEen  iDoUen 

module  mugte  foUtc  ttJoHtc 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

mogc  miiffe  foUe  iDoHe 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

module  miigtc  foKte  tooUte 

etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

iDoDe 
woUt 


s.  I  barf  faun 

2  barfft  fanuft 

3  barf  faun 
p.  I  bixrfen  fouuen 

2  bitrft  fount 

3  biivfeu  fouuen 

Indicative  Preterit, 

s.  I  burfte   fouute 

etc.         etc. 

Subjunctive  Present. 

s.  I  biirfe    fouue 

etc.         etc. 
Subjunctive  Preterit. 

s.  I  biivfte   fouute 

etc.         etc. 
Tmperalive. 

S.  2 

p.  2 
Participles. 

bitrfeub  fouueub    mogeub    miiffenb    folleub  twottcub 
geburft  gefonut    gemod^t    gemugt    gefottt  geiooUt 

Iri/inUive. 

biirfen  fouuen     mogen     muffen     foUen    tooHen 

143.  a.  The  compound  tenses  are  made  like 
tliose  of  otlier  verbs,  with  the  important  exception 
that  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses,  when 
used  along  with  the  infinitive  of  another  verb  (as 
is  usually  the  case),  the  infinitive  is  put  in  place 
of  the  participle :  thus,  er  l^at  e^  ni^t  gefonut,  but 
er  f)at  e^  ni^t  t^un  fonnen,  *he  has  not  been  able  to 
do  it';  i^r  ^atttt  mi^  fpred^en  woUen,  'you  had 
wanted  to  speak  to  me ' ;  mv  ^atttn  xoaxttn  mutJeU; 
'we  should  have  been  obliged  to  wait.' 


68  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  [143 

6.  (24:0.1c.)  Some  other  verbs,  especially  laffcn,  *let,  canse* 
(also  ^ei§en,  ^elfen,  l^orcn,  fc^en,  and  sometimes  k^xzn  and  lernen), 
when  governing  another  infinitive  directly,  make  the  same  sub- 
stitution :  thus,  er  ^at  un^  n)arten  laffen,  *  he  has  made  us  wait.' 

144.  The  absence  of  a  full  conjugation  to  these  auxiliaries 
in  English  makes  the  English  and  German  equivalent  expres- 
sions often  very  unlike  one  another.  Thus,  *  he  could  not  have 
done  it '  is  not  er  fonnte  c^  md)t  get^an  ^ahen,  but  er  i)atk  ee  nid)!: 
ti)\xn  fonnen.  Usually,  to  turn  the  auxiliary  into  a 'phrase, 
like  '  be  able,  be  willing,  be  obliged,'  etc.,  will  give  the  key  to 
the  German  expression  :  thus,  he  would  not  have  (er  ^aik  nidjt) 
been  able  (fonnen)  to  do  it  (e^  t^un)* 

145.  (253-8)  Thepret.  subj.  burfte  sometimes  signifies  a  prob- 
able contingency  :  thus,  ba^  burfte  toa^r  fein,  *  that  is  likely  to 
be  true.'  SKoflen  expresses  concession  and  choice ;  its  pret. 
subj.  mod)te  is  very  common  in  the  sense  *  should  (would)  like 
to ' :  thus,  ic^  mod)te  ge^en,  *I  should  like  to  go,'  902uf)cn  signi- 
fies necessity  of  any  kind  ;  often  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  '  can- 
not but'  or  the  like:  thus,  man  mu§te  Iacf)en,  *one  could  not 
help  laughing.'  ©otlen  implies  the  exercise  of  authority 
upon  the  actor;  very  often  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  *is  to,'  *is 
intended  to,'  and  the  like:  thus,  tt)a^  foil  gefd)el)cn,  'what  is  to 
happen?'  Sometimes  it  reports  something  resting  on  the 
authority  of  others  :  thus,  er  foil  f(^on  f)m  fein,  *  he  is  said  to  be 
already  here.'  SSotten,  besides  the  ordinary  meanings  given 
above,  sometimes  signifies  a  claim  or  assertion  :  thus,  er  n)i(l  @ic 
fiefel)en  ^aben,  *  he  claims  to  have  seen  you  ' ;  and  rarely  some- 
thing impending  :  thus,  er  iuoUtc  JlerBen,  *  he  was  on  the  point 
of  dying.' 

146.  (259)  The  modal  auxiliaries  not  seldom  occur  without 
any  infinitive  dependent  upon  them  ;  such  an  infinitive  being 
supplied  in  sense  from  the  connection  :  as,  xd)  t^ue,  nja§  id)  tantif 
*  I  do  what  I  can  [do]' ;  or  implied  in  an  adverb  of  motion  :  as, 
iuo^in  foUen  bie,  *  whither  are  they  to  [go]  ?  ';  or  otherwise  under- 
stood :  as,  ttja^  foil  biefe  9iebe,  *  what  is  this  talk  intended  to 
[signify]  ? '  Sometimes  its  place  is  taken  by  e5,  ba^,  or  the  like, 
as  by  sOfdo  so,  etc.,  in  English.  SSottcn  is  sometimes  a  real  tran- 
sitive, in  the  sense  of  *  desire ' ;  mogen  in  that  of  *  like '  ;  and 
fonnen  in  that  of  *know,'  with  the  name  of  a  language. 


148]  MIXED   CONJUGATION.  59 

147.  (260)  SSiffen,  *know,  know  how,'  has  a  conjugation  likei 
that  of  the  modal  auxiliaries:  thus,  pres.  indie.  tx)ei§,  t»ci§t,  irei§, 
ttjiffen,  im^tf  iDiffen;  pres.  subj.  itjiffe,  etc.;  pret.  indie,  and  subj. 
iijuJ3tc,  etc.,  \m^k,  etc.;  past  pple.  (;ei:?u§t. 

148.  (439. 2)  Arrangement.  The  transposed  personal  verb 
(after  a  relative  or  a  subordinating  conjunction:  see  1336.)  may 
not  be  put  at  the  end  of  a  clause  after  two  (or  more)  infinitives 
of  which  the  last  has  the  value  of  a  participle,  but  must  stand 
instead  next  before  them  :  thus,  n^eil  id)  nid)t  ^aU  gc^cn  fonnctt, 
'because  I  have  not  been  able  to  go,'  ber  micb  nculi(^  ^at  ermorben 
laffen  ivoUen,  *  who  has  recently  wanted  to  have  me  murdered.' 

VOCABUIiABY. 

aHein,  adv.  alone.  nod)  ni(^t,  not  yet. 

fort,  adv.  forth,  onward,  away,  fagen,  v.  N.  say. 

fiel)en,  v.  0.  walk.  bie  ©i^ute,  =Ien.    school. 

!^ln,  adv.  hence,  that  way.  fc^on,  adv.  already. 

lange,  adv.  for  a  long  time.  foftlei(^,  adv,  immediately,  d>> 

laffen,  v.  0.  cause,  make.  rectly. 

le^ren,  v.  N.  teach.  tf)nn,  v.  0.  do,  perform. 

Icrnen,  v.  N.  learn.  U)artcn,  v,  N.  wait. 

m^t§,  pron,  nothing.  toiffen,  v.  K  know. 

EXERCISE  21. 

MODAL    AUXILIARIES. 

1.  SBtUft  bu  tttd^t  in  bie  ©d)ute  ge^en?  2.  -3c^  moc^te  ^tn, 
tiber  id^  barf  ntd^t.  3.  SBir  fonnteit  nicfit  fommen,  ttjeit  mx 
nacf)  Serlin  fiaben  gei^en  miiffen.  4.  @ie  burften  i^m  ntd^t^ 
fagen.  5.  SSarum  fAlugft  bu  ben  $unb?  ba^  ^dtteft  hn 
md)i  t^un  foHen.  6.  Qd)  n^oUte  ba§  9}Jcibc^en  fingen  Ic^ren, 
aber  fie  mag  nic^t^  lernen.  7.  (Sie  ^aben  un^  lange  tuarten 
laffen.  8,  3)ie  fleinen  Sinber  biirfen  nidjt  fommen,  aber  bie 
grogeren  ntiiffen  ea.  9.  -3^  mag  nid^t  allein  reifen,  jel^t  aber 
merbe  ic^  e§  t^un  mixffen.  10.  9rf)  iDugte  nidji,  n)a^  id)  i^m 
fagett  foUte.  11.  gr  foil  fd^on  ^ier  fein ;  man  tt)i(I  i^n  ge^* 
fe^en  ^aben ;  aber  er  mug  fogteid^  fort. 


60  PASSIVE  VOICE.  [149 

VOCABULARY. 

ask,  V.  fragen,  K,  learn,  v.  Uxnen* 

do,  V.  tl)un»  make,!;,  laffen. 

find,  V.  ftnben,  0.  many,  adj.  mU 

German,  adj.  beutfd^.  stay,  v.  bleiBcn,  0. 

go,  V.  0ef)en»  teacher,  bcr  Center,  -r^,  ^r* 

help,  V.  t)e(fen,  0.  tell,  v.  fagen. 

here,  adv.  I)ier*  to-morrow,  adv.  morgett. 

industrious,  adj.  f(ei§tg.  with,  prep.  mit. 

know,  V.  iDiffen.  yet,  no(^» 

language,  bie  ©))ra(^e,  =(^en.  not  yet,  noc^  nid&t* 

EXERCISE  22. 
1.  Can  you  go  with  us?    2.  I  can  go  to-day,  but  to- 
morrow I  shall  not  be  allowed  [to  do]  so.     3.  I  wished 
to  write  a  letter,  but  I  could  not,  for  I  had  to  work. 

4.  May  I  ask  what  language  you  now  desire  to  learn  ? 

5.  I  should  like  to  learn  German,  for  I  do  not  yet  know 
it.     6.  We  do  not  always  like  to  do  what  we  ought. 

7.  Do  you  know  what  she  has  wanted  to  say  to  him  ? 

8.  I  know  it,  but  I  may  not  tell  it  to  you.  9.  Children ! 
you  must  be  very  industrious.  10.  The  teacher  has 
made  (laffen)  us  sing  many  songs.  11.  He  could  not 
have  found  his  book,  if  his  sister  had.  not  helped  him 
(dot.),     12.  He  is  to  stay  here,  if  he  comes. 

PASSIVE  VOICE. 
149.  (275-6)  The  passive  conjugation  is  made 
with  the  auxiliary  njerbCH,  'become.'  To  make  any 
given  mode,  tense,  and  person  of  the  passive  of  a 
verb,  add  its  past  participle  to  the  corresponding 
form  of  mxitn. 


ISl]  PASSIYE  VOICE.  61 

a.  The  participle  of  hjerbctt  as  passive  auxiliary  is  VDorbcn,  in- 
stead of  (^etvorben.  Tbe  participle  of  the  main  verb  is  put  after 
the  personal  verb-forms  of  the  auxiliary,  bat  before  its  infinitive 
and  participle. 

150.  (277)  The  synopsis  of  the  passive  of  IteBen, 

*love,'  is  as  follows  : 
The  simple  forms  of  the  auxiliary  were  given  above  (122  d). 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present f  *I  am  loved,'  etc. 
id)  tt)crbe  geliebt  t^erbe  c^eliebt 

Preterit,  *  I  was  loved, '  etc. 
ic^  tt)arb  or  njurbe  geliebt  tuiirbe  geliebt 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVB. 

Perfect,  *I  have  been  loved,'  etc. 
x6)  bin  geliebt  iuorben  fei  geliebt  ttjorbett 

Pluperfect^  *I  had  been  loved,'  etc. 
id)  itjar  geliebt  raovbeu  njdre  geliebt  tuorbett 

Fidure,  *I  shall  be  loved,*  etc. 

ii)  tt)erbe  geliebt  tt)erben  ttjerbe  getiebt  loerben 

Future  Perfect^  *I  shall  have  been  loved,'  etc. 

\6)  Ujerbe  geliebt  movben  fein  iuerbe  geliebt  tDorben  fein 

Conditional,  *I  should  be  loved,*  etc.         Conditional  Perfect. 

id)  ix)iirbe  geliebt  iuerben  iniirbe  geliebt  njorben  fein 

IMPERATIVE,  'beloved.* 

merbe  (bu)  geliebt 

INFINITIVE,  <  to  be  loved,'  etc. 

Present,  Perfect. 

geliebt  (^u)  inerben  geliebt  morbert  (ju)  fein 

PARTICIPLES,  *  being  loved,'  etc. 
Present,  Past. 

geliebt  njerbenb  geliebt  it)orbett 

151.  (278)  From  the  pres.  pple.  active,  with  gu  before  it,  is 
made  a  future  pass,  pple.,  implying  possibility  or  necessity  ;  it 


62  REFLEXIVE  VERBS.  [152 

is  used  only  attributively  :  thus,  ein  3U  UeBenbc^  ^inb,  *  a  cMld 
to  be  loved.' 

152.  (279)  Passives  are  made  sometimes  from  intransitive 
verbs  ;  especially  an  impersonal  passive  :  thus,  e^  t^nxhe  gelac^t, 
*  there  was  laughing  '  (literally,  *  it  was  laughed  *). 

153.  (281)  The  passive  is  much  less  common  in  German 
than  in  English  ;  for  it  is  often  substituted  a  reflexive,  or  an 
active  with  the  indefinite  subject  man  :  thus,  e^  fraflt  ft(^,  'it  is 
questioned'  (literally,  *it  questions  itself ');  man  fagt,  'one 
says  '  (for  *  it  is  said  '). 

154.  (282)  The  verb  fein  is  also  often  used  with  the  past 
participle  of  a  verb,  but  indicates  the  result  of  the  action,  not 
its  endurance.  Thus,  passive,  er  itJirb  gefd)lagcn,  *he  is  under- 
going a  beating,  he  is  being  beaten,  some  one  is  beating  him ' ; 
but  er  Ift  gefc^lagen,  'he  is  a  beaten  man,  some  one  has  beaten 
him.' 

155.  (283)  Beflpxive  Conjugation,  A  verb  is 
made  reflexive  simply  by  adding  the  proper  re- 
flexive pronoun  (84).  A  reflexive  verb  is  often 
used  for  an  English  intransitive,  sometimes  for  a 
passive :  thus,  t^  fiir^te  mi^,  '  I  am  afraid,'  ic^  freue 
ttlid^,  *I  rejoice.' 

156.  (285)  a.  An  example  of  a  tense  inflected  re- 
flexively  is : 

1.  x6)  freue  mx6)  irir  freuett  un§ 

2.  bu  freuft  \Ad)  x\)x  freut  eucfj 

3.  er  freut  ft^  fie  freueu  fid) 

b.  The  compound  tenses  are  t(^  ^aBe  mid)  flefreut,  ic^  irerbc  mic5 
frenen,  id)  iijerbe  mid)  gefreut  t)aBen,  and  so  on  ;  the  imperativa, 
freue  bic^,  freut  cu(^. 

c.  A  very  few  verbs  take  their  reflexive  object  in  the  dative  : 
for  example,  id)  f(^mei$le  mir,  *  I  flatter  myself.' 

157.  (291-2)  a.  Impersonal  Verbs,  A  verb  is  used 
impersonally  in  the  3d  person  singular,  with  the 


158]  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  63 

indefinite  subject  e^,  *it' :  thus,  e^  regnet,  *it  rains,' 
e^  flopft,  'it  knocks'  (i.e.  'there  is  a  knocking'), 
e^  l^ungert  mid),  'I am  hungry'  (literally,  'it  hungers 
me'), C^  S^'ingt  mix,  'I  succeed^  (literally,  'it  proves 
successful  for  me '). 

b.  Impersonal  phrases  are  made  with  fein  and  iuerben,  to  ex- 
press states  of  feeling,  with  a  dative  of  the  person  affected  : 
thus,  e^  ift  mir  ttJoM,  *  I  feel  well '  (literally,  *it  is  well  to  me'), 
e^  njarb  i^m  Bange,  'he  began  to  feel  anxious'  (literally,  *it  be- 
came anxious  to  him  '). 

c.  (B^  QteBt,  etc.,  with  following  accusative,  is  equivalent  to 
English  *  there  is,  there  are ' :  thus,  e^  Qxcht  toiele  ba,  *  there  are 
many  there  * ;  e^  gaB  felnen  SSein/  *  there  was  no  wine.' 

158.  (293)  But  the  impersonal  subject  e^  is  very 
often  omitted,  especially  when  the  object  of  the 
verb,  or  an  adjunct  qualifying  it,  comes  to  stand 
before  it :  thus,  mid)  ^ixntt,  'me  thinks,'  i^n  ^ungerte, 
'he  was  hungry,'  voit  tt>o))l  ift  mir,  'how  well  I  feel.' 

VOCABULARY. 
aUgemcin,  adj.  general.  ^ungcrn  v,  K  impers.  hunger, 

^Imerifa,  America.  be  hungry, 

bie  S^olera,  cholera,      [fore  it.      na(i)ft,  adj.  next,  nearest, 
batoor,  adv.  because  of,  pr  be-    rauc^en,  v.  N.  smoke, 
benn,  conj.  or  adv.  for,  then.  regnen,  v.  N.  impers.  rain. 

eBen,  adv.  even,  just,  exactly.        ber  ©d)uler,  -r^,  =r.  scholar. 
el)ren,  v.  N*  hoiur.  fc^iden,  v.  N.  send, 

faul,  adj.  lazy.  fe^nen,  v.  N.  reflex,  long  for. 

frelgeBig,  adj.  IxhcxaL  [of.       ftarf,  adj.  strong. 

furd)ten,  v.  N.  reflex,   be  afraid    tabetn,  v.  N.  blame. 
QcBdxen,  v.  0.  bear,  bring  forth,     bon,  prep,  of,  from,  by. 
glauBen,  v.  K  believe.  \i)ol)l,  adv.  well. 

EXERCISE  23. 

PASSIVE,   IMPERSONAL,     AND    REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

1.  !Die  fleigtgen  ©d^iiler  it)erben  ^elobt ;  bie  faulen  tabett 
man  immer*    2.  3)er  33rief,  bert  t^  i^m  f^irfen  tt)erbe,  ift 


64  IMPERSONAL  YERBS.  [158 

no^  ntd^t  gefdf)rieben ;  er  ioirb  ebeu  je^t  t)on  Tneinem  SSruber 
gefd^riebem  3,  ©c^iUer  n?urbe  im  3al}re  1759  geboreu. 
4.  gr  wixh  aKgemein  geel}rt,  bcnn  er  ift  reid^  unb  freigebig. 
6.  ^dj  fiirc^tetc  mid),  al^  i^  ben  grogen  §unb  fa(}.  6.  aBir 
fe^nen  un^  na^  unfcrn  alten  Q^reunben*  7.  g^  l^ungert 
midj ;  gieb  mir  33rob.  8,  §ler  gab  e^  !etn  93rob  unb  !em 
2Baffer»  9.  aBtr  fonnten  ntc^t  fort,  iueit  e^  fo  ftar!  regnete. 
10.  Wlan  glaubt,  bte  S^olera  mtrb  im  ncicfiften  3a^re  mi) 
^merifa  gebrad)t  n)erben.  11.  6^  gtebt  t)ie(e  arme  ?eute,  bic 
fidf)  fe^r  batjor  furd)ten.  12,  §ier  barf  nxdjt  geraud^t  tt)erbeiu 
13.  3l)m  ttjar  m6)t  red&t  njo^L 

VOCABULARY. 

be  afraid,  v.  [x^  furdbten.  long  for,  v.  ficT)  fe^nen. 

all,  adj.  atte.  make,  v.  madden,  X. 

American,       ber      ^merifancr,  much,  adv.  ijieL 

=r^/  -r.  naughty,  adj.  unarttg. 

be  ashamed,  v,  fid^  f(^amen,  JV.  read,  v,  lefen,  0. 

away,  adv.  fort.  rejoice,  v.  fid&  freuen,  K. 

blame,  v.  tabeln.  remain,  v.  BteiBen,  0. 

cholera,  S^olera.  soon,  adv.  Balb. 

country,  ba^    SSaterlanb,   ::be§,  snow,  u.  fc^neten,  N.  impers. 

=cinber.  there  are,  e^  giBt. 

dance,  v.  tan^en,  K  to-night,  adv.  t)e\ite  3(benb« 

exile,  ber  3ScrBannte.  well,  adv.  i^jo^I. 

fire,  bag  gcuer,  -x^,  -r.  when,  adv.  aU,  toann. 
hate,  V.  t)af]cn,  iV. 

EXERCISE  24. 
1.  The  letter  is  written,  and  now  it  will  be  read. 
2.  The  fire  is  being  made,  and  the  room  will  soon  be 
warm.  3.  My  cousin  has  been  praised  by  (uon)  his 
teacher.  4.  The  naughty  boy  was  blamed,  and  was 
much  ashamed  (refl.).     5.  There  are  bad  men,  who  are 


160]  COMPOUND   YERBS.  65 

hated  by  all.  6.  I  sliall  rejoice  when  I  see  my  mother. 
7.  The  exile  longs  for  (nad^)  his  country.  8.  It  is  snow- 
ing, and  I  must  [go]  away.  9.  I  do  not  feel  well. 
10.  There  are  many  Americans  in  Paris,  but  they  will 
not  remain  there,  for  they  are  afraid  irefl.)  of  (tior)  the 

^cholera.     11.  There  will  be  dancing  to-night. 

\  ' 

\  COMPOUND  VERBS. 

w 

159.  (297)  a.  Verbs  are  compounded  with  pre- 
fixes of  two  classes,  separable  and  inseparable. 

6.  The  SEPARABLE  PREFIXES  are  used  also  as  in- 
dependent words,  namely  adverbs  and  preposi- 
tions, and  are  but  loosely  combined  with  the  verb, 
being  separated  from  it  in  many  of  its  forms  (as 
usually  in  English):  thus,  tc^  ge^e  ayx^,  'I  go  out,' 
er  bra^  ab,  *he  broke  off.'  With  these  the  verb  is 
said  to  be  separably  compounded. 

c.  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  never  found  in 
separate  use,  and  always  stand  before  the  verb 
and  are  written  as  one  word  with  it :  thus,  id)  be^ 
benfe,  'I  bethink,'  er  ^ergiebt,  'he  forgives.'  With 
these  the  verb  is  said  to  be  inseparably  com- 
pounded. 

160.  (298)  The  separable  prefixes  are : 
ab,  '  off,  down '  l^iu,  '  from  one ' 
an,  '  on,  at '                            l^inter,  '  behind ' 
auf ,  '  up,  upon '                     tnit^  '  with ' 
avi^,  '  out,  from '                    nad^,  '  after ' 
bei,  '  by,  beside,  with '          nieber,  *  down ' 

^^''''1' there  at'  ob, 'over,  on' 

bar,    )  '  ixhcv,  '  over ' 

burd^,  '  through '  um,  '  around ' 


'^^       OF   THE 

UMIVPRSJTY 


66  COMPOUND  YERBS,  [160 

cin,  *  in,  into '  xmter,  '  under ' 

cmpor,  '  up,  aloft '  t)or,  '  before ' 

cnt^mei,  '  in  two,  apart '  tt^iber  or  | '  against '  or 

fort,  '  forth,  away '  tt)ieber,    )  *  again ' 

gegen,  '  against '  meg,  '  away ' 

in,  *in'  gu, 'to' 

l^eim,  'home'  gurM,  'back' 

l^er,  'toward  one'  gufammen,  *  together' 

There  are  also  combinations  of  some  of  the  above  with  one 
another,  especially  with  :^in,  ^er,  ba  or  bar :  as,  ^inafc,  ^erauf, 
barein,  tocran* 

161.  (299)  a.  In  the  conjugation  of  a  separably 
compounded  verb,  the  prefix  stands  before  the 
verb  in  the  infinitive  and  both  participles,  but 
after  it  in  all  the  other  simple  forms.  It  always 
has  the  accent. 

b.  In  the  former  case,  the  prefix  is  written  with 
the  verb  as  a  single  word ;  in  the  latter  case,  it  is 
separated  from  it ;  and,  if  the  verb  be  followed  by 
other  adjuncts,  the  prefix  stands  at  the  end  of  the 
whole  clause :  thus,  from  anfangen,  '  begin,'  id^ 
fange  an,  'I  begin';  ic^  ftng  ttefen  SWorgen  frit^  ju 
ftut)iren  a  n,  'I  began  early  this  morning  to  study.' 
But  if,  by  the  rules  for  the  arrangement  of  the  sen- 
tence, the  verb  is  removed  to  the  end,  it  comes, 
even  in  the  simple  forms,  to  stand  after  its  prefix, 
and  is  then  written  as  one  word  with  it :  thus,  a\^ 
ic^  Hefen  SWorgen  friif)  ju  jlubiren  anfing,  'as  I 
began  to  study  early  this  morning.'    - 

c.  The  sign  of  the  past  participle,  ge,  stands 


162]  COMPOUND  VERBS.  67 

between  tlie  prefix  and  the  root ;  also  the  sign  of 
the  infinitive,  JU,  when  used :  thus,  angefangen, 
'begun';  aujufangctt,  *to  begin'  (written  as  one 
word). 

162.  (300)  Examples:  anfangen,  'begin';  |eratt^ 
naf)en,  'draw  nigh.' 

Principal  Parts  : 
anfangen,  fing  an,  angefangen.    ^eranna^en^  nafjte  l]txan, 

i^erangena^t. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present,  *I  begin,'  etc.  *I  draw  nigh,'  etc. 

s.  I  fange  an  na^e  l)erau 

Preterit,  'I  began,'  etc.  *  I  drew  nigh,'  etc. 

s.  I  fing  an  na^te  t)eran 

Perfect,  *I  have  begun,'  etc.        *I  have  drawn  nigh,'  etc. 
s.  I  l^abe  angefangen  bin  l^erangena^t 

Pluperfect,  *  I  had  begun,'  etc.     *  I  had  drawn  nigh,'  etc. 

s.  I  l)atte  angefangen  iDar  I)erangenal)t 

Future,  *  I  shall  begin,'  etc.        *I  shaU  draw  nigh,'  etc. 

s.  I  iDerbe  anfangen  iDerbe  ^erannaften 

Fut,  Perf.y  *I  shall  have  be-        *I  shall  have  drawn  nigh,* 
gun,'  etc.  etc. 

s.  I  njerbe  angefangen  ^aben  Xotxht  ^erangena^t  fein. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present,  *I  may  begin,'  etc.         *  I  may  draw  nigh,'  etc. 
s.  I  fange  an  na^e  l^eran 

etc.,  etc.  etc.,  etCa 

CONDITIONAL. 
Conditional,  *!  should  begin,'  etc.      ♦  I  should  draw  nigh,  etc, 
s.  I   njiirbe  anfangen  iDiirbe  ^eranna^en 


68  COMPOUND  VERBS.  [^63 

IMPEKATIVE. 

*  begin,'  etc.  ♦  draw  nigh,'  etc. 

s.  2  fauge  an,  fange  bu  an      na^e  ^evan,  na^e  bu  ^eratt 

INFINITIVES. 
Present,  *  to  begin  *  *  to  draw  nigh  * 

anfangen,  attgufangen      l^eranna^en,  l^eran^itnaljen 

Perfect,  *  to  have  begun '  •  to  have  drawn  nigh  * 

angefangen  ^dbett  r)erangena^t  fern 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present y  *  beginning '  *  drawing  nigh ' 

anfangenb  l^eranna^enb 

P(tst,  *  begun  '  '  drawn  nigh ' 

angefangen  l^erangenal)t 

y  163.  (302)  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  be,  ent 
(or  emp),  er,  ge,  i)er,  and  jer. 

164.  (303)  They  remain  in  close  combination 
with  the  verb  through  its  whole  conjugation,  form- 
ing with  it  an  inseparable  combination,  of  which 
the  radical  syllable  receives  the  accent.  The  sign 
of  the  infinitive,  JU,  is  put  before  the  combination, 
as  if  it  were  a  simple  verb.  The  sign  of  the  par- 
ticiple, ge,  is  omitted  altogether.   . 

165.  (304)  Examples :  beginnen,  'begin,'  ^crreifen, 
*  journey  away.' 

Principal  Parts  : 

Beginnen,  begann,  begonnen.  tjerrelfen,  tjerreifle,  t^erreifl. 

indicative. 
beginne  t)erreife 

begann  t)erretfte 

l^abe  begonnen  bin  tjerreift 

Iiatte  begonnen  iuar  tierretft 


167]  CX)MPOUND   VEKBS.  69 

ttjerbc  begmnett  n^erbe  t)erveifen 

itjerbe  begonnen  Ijaben  toerbe  tjerreift  jem 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

beginne  Derreife 

begdnne  or  begonnc  Derretfete 

etc.,  etc.  etc.,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

ttjiirbe  beginnen  itJiirbe  t)erreifen 

etc.,  etc.  etc.,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

beginne  t)erretfe 

INFINITIVES. 

beginnen,  ^n  beginnen  Derretfen,  jn  tjerreifen 

begonnen  fjahn  Derreift  fein 

PARTICIPLES. 

beginnenb  Derreifenb 

begonnen  t)erreift 

166.  (305-6)  A  few  verbs  inseparably  compounded  take  in 
addition  a  separable  prefix  :  e.  g.,  anerfeitnen  (an^uerfennen),  er= 
fannte  an,  anerfannt.  But  no  verb  separably  compounded  has 
further  an  insex)arable  prefix  ;  nor  does  any  verb  take  two  in- 
separable prefixes. 

167.  (307,  405.iii.)  The  prefix  Be  makes  transitive  verbs — 
either  from  intransitives  or  other  transitives  with  changed  con- 
struction, as  Beflagen,  'bemoan,'  Befingen,  'sing  about,  besing'; 
or  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  as  Bcfeelen,  *  endow  with  a  soul,' 
Befreien,  'make  free.'  @nt  (em^,  before  f,  in  three  verbs)  makes 
especially  verbs  signifying  removal  or  deprivation  :  thus,  ent= 
fie^en,  entbmmen,  *  get  away,  escape,'  entMften,  *  deprive  of 
power,'  ent^eiUgen,  *  desecrate.'  @r  prefixed  to  verbs  forms 
usually  compounds  signifying  a  gaining  by  means  of  the  action 
expressed  by  the  simple  verb  :  thus,  eriagen,  '  get  by  hunting,' 
crtangen,  'bring  on  by  dancing'  ;  to  adjectives,  oftenest  verbs 
signifying  passing  into  a  condition  :  thus,  crBlaffen,  *  grow  pale.' 
®e  (with  other  verbs  only)  has  quite  various  and  indefinite 
meanings.     $Cer  with  verbs  means  most  usually  removal  or  de* 


70  COMPOUND   VERBS.  [167 

triment :  thus,  i)crfu[)ren,  *lead  astray'  ;  -with  Douns  and  ad- 
jectives it  makes  simple  denominative  verbs,  usually  transitive : 
thus,  toeranbern,  'alter,'  toerglafen,  *  glaze,'  tocralten,  *grow  old.' 
^er  signifies  *  asunder,  in  pieces ' :  thus,  3erBre(^en,  *  break  in 
pieces,'  getQliebern,  'dismember.' 

168.  (308)  Prefixes  separable  or  inseparable,  a,  A 
few  properly  separable  prefixes  sometimes  form 
inseparable  compounds:  they  are  burd^,  *  through/ 
l;inter,  'behind,'  iiber,  *over/  urn,  'about,'  unter, 
*  under,'  tt)ietcr  (or  mtcr)  'again'  (or  'against'). 

h.  The  separable  compounds  have  the  meanings  of  both  parts 
nearly  unchanged  ;  the  inseparable  usually  take  an  altered  or 
figurative  meaning :  thus,  burc^'brinc^en,  'crowd  through,' burd)^ 
bring'en,  'penetrate'  ;  um'ge^en,  'go  about,'  umge^'en,  'evade.' 

c.  The  compounds,  of  either  class,  are  accented 
and  conjugated  according  to  the  rules  already 
given. 

VOCABULARY. 

aBfd)reiBen,  v.  0.  copy.  bringett,  v.  0.  press,  throng. 

al)reifen,  v.  N.  journey  away.  buret),  prep,  through, 

anfangen,  v.  0.  begin.  burc^tring'en,  v.  0.  penetrate, 
anfleiben;  v.  N.  put  clothes  up-        pervade. 

on,  clothe,  dress.  etn^olen,  v.  U.  overtake, 

angie^cn,  v.  0.  draw  on,  put  on.  ©ngtanb,  England, 

auferfte^en,  v.  0,  rise  from  the  entflie^en/i;.  0.  fly,  escape. 

dead.  fruiter,  adv.  earlier,  betore. 

aufge^en,  v.  0.  go  up,  rise.  gan^,  adj,  whole,  entire. 

aufftel)en,  v.  0.  get  up,  rise.  bie  ©affe,  sfen.    lane,  street. 

au§^re(^cn,  v.  0.  pronounce.  gelinften,  v.  0.  impers.  prove 
au§3ic^en,  v.  0.  take  off.  successful. 

Balb,  adv.  soon.  fietlern,  adv.  yesterday. 

Be^anbeln,  v.  N.  handle,  treat.  QeU)i§,  adv.  sure,  certain. . 

bie  S3itte,  =tten.  request.  ]&erannal)cn,  v.  N.  draw  near, 
BUnb,  adj.  blind.  approach, 

beutfd),  adj.  German.  ^inau^fic()cn,  v.  0.  go  out. 


168]  COMPOUND  VERBS.  tl 

:^infler)en,  v.  0,  go  forth.  ijcrgeffen,  v.  0.  forget. 

bie  9)2enge,  =Qen»   mass,  multi-  toerreijen,  v.  2^.  go  on  a  journey, 

tude.  travel  away. 

mttnel)men,  v.  0.  take  along.  ijexf^recBen,  u.  0.  promise. 

nad)eilen,  v.  N,  hurry  after.  »orfm(^en,  v*  0.  sing  before  or 
nun,  adv.  now,  at  present.  for. 

bie  (Sonne,  -nen*  sun.  njegtrac^en,  v.  0.  carry  away, 

ftreng,  adj,  strict,  severe.  iuieber^olen,  u.  iV.  repeat, 

ber  Stob,  =beg,  =be,  death.  toteber^olen,  v.  iV".  fetch  back, 

bex  Ueterfc^ut),  4eg,  4)e»   over-  bie  2But^,  fury,  rage. 

shoe.  Sexreigen,  v.  0.  tear  in  pieces, 

iibexfefe'en,  v,  U.  translate.  5UXU(fbmmen,  v.  0.  come  back. 


EXERCISE  25. 

COMPOUND   VERBS,    SEPARABLE   AND   INSEPARABLE. 

1.  ®ie  (2d)u(c  fing  geftcrn  an,  unb  id^  bin  ^eute  l^ittge* 
gangen.  2.  -Sei^t  ttierbe  ti^  t^m  bie  Jieber  borfingen,  bie  id^ 
abgefd^riebeu  ^be.  3.  ISDer  Jag  nat)t  l)eran  ;  bie  (Sonne  n^irb 
batb  anfge^en ;  ftel)en  \mx  auf,  nnb  lleiben  mx  nn^  an.  4.  ©ie 
gog  t()re  Ueberfd)n()e  an,  al^  fie  ^inan^ging.  5.  aSenn  fie 
guritdfomntt,  iDerbe  id)  fd^on  abgereift  fein.  6.  Sd\  iuerbe  bie 
^inber  mitne^men.  7.  6i(en  ©ie  i^ncn  nad^  ;  (2ie  l^olen  fie 
geiijig  ein.  8.  ffia§  l^at  man  -3()nen  Dcrfpiod^en  ?  9.  QcS) 
fpred^e  ba^  S)entfc^  nidjt  gnt  an5,  aber  i^  !ann  e^  gang  gnt 
iiberfe^en.  10.  3)a^  ®leib  toaxh  gerriffen,  nnb  fie  mn^te  e^ 
an^gie^en.  11.  S3(inbe  SBnt^  bnrdjbringt  bie  SJ^enge,  bie  nnn 
bnrd)  bie  ©affen  bringt.  12.  Q^  t)erfprrd^e  3^nen,  ha^  id^ 
©ie  ni^t  tergeffen  li^erbe,  njenn  ©ie  berreift  finb.  13.  gr 
tunrbe  tion  feinem  3?ater  fo  ftreng  befianbeU,  \>a^  er  nad^  gng* 
lanb  entflie^en  n^oUte ;  aber  e^  gelang  i^nt  nidjt.  14.  9^ad^ 
bem  Sobe  iuerben  trir  aEe  auferfte^cn.  15.  gr  inieber^olte 
feine  23itte.  16.  §ote  hen  SBein  inieber,  hen  hn  friiljer  tneg* 
getragcn  l)aft. 


72 


COMPOUND   VERBS. 


[168 


VOCABULARY. 


America,  Imerlfa. 
answer,  v.  antmoxkn,  -^. 
approach,  v.  ^eranwa^ett* 
begin,  v,  anfangen* 
behead,  v,  ent^au))ten^  K 
break  in  pieces,  v.  3erBre(i)en,  0. 
close,  V.  3uma(^en,  iV. 
come  back,  v.  guructfommen. 
dethrone,  v.  entt^ronen,  iV. 
discover,  v.  cntbeden,  ^. 
door,  bie  %\)vix,  =Ten» 
Englishman,  ber  ©nglanber,  -r^, 

=r. 
evade,  v.  au^ttjeid^en,  0. 
evening,  bcrSCBenb,  =b§,  -be. 
fetch  back,  v.  iDieb'er^olctt. 
forget,  V.  ijergcffen,  0. 
go  out,  V.  au^ge^eu/  0. 
hasten  after,  u.  nai^etlen,  iV. 
how,  a(iu.  iuie. 
journey  off,  aBreifen,  -^. 
lesson,  bie  ^ufgaBe,  =Ben. 
little,  adi\  U)entg* 
open,  r.  aufmac^en,  N. 


overshoes,  UeBerf(J)u5* 
plainly,  adv,  beutlid). 
plate,  ber  5^eIIer,  -x§,  ^r. 
promise,  v.  i?er)>red)en. 
pronounce,  v.  auef^redjen. 
put  on,  V.  angie^en. 
receive,  v,  em^fangen« 
recognize,  v.  anerfenrten,  K 
repeat,  v.  ii)iebert)o'len,  N.  insep. 
rest,  V.  ficT)  au^ru^en,  K 
school,  bie  ©d)ute,  4en. 
sell,  t;.  berfaufen,  iV. 
set,  V.  itnterge^en,  0. 
slowly,  adv.  lattgfam. 
story,  ba§  Wlaxd^en,  =n^,  =n» 
successor,  ber  S^tac^folQer,  =r^,  =r* 
sun,  bie  ©ontie* 
throw  down,  v.  um'it)erfett. 
translate,  v.  uBerfefe'ett* 
understand,  v.  toerfte^en,  0. 
window,  bttig  S^nfter,  -x^,  -x* 
word,  ba^  2Bort,    =te^,   -te   or 
sorter. 


EXERCISE  26. 
1.  The  school  begins  at  (um)  nine  o'clock.  2.  The 
children  put  on  their  overshoes,  and  went  out.  3.  The 
sun  is  setting,  and  evening  is  approaching  ;  come  back 
and  rest  here.  4.  I  have  not  received  the  letter  ;  how 
can  I  answer  it  ?  6.  He  did  not  understand  you  ;  for 
you  did  not  pronounce  the  words  plainly.  6.  "We  shall 
journey  off,  but  we  shall  not  take  thee  along.  7.  You 
have  forgotten  that  you  promised  it  to  me.  8.  She 
evaded  me  (dot.),  when  I  hastened  after  her  (daL). 


17lJ  ADVERBS.  73 

9.  The  plate  was  thrown  down  and  broken  in  pieces. 

10.  Open  the  window,  and  close  the  door.  11.  Columbus 
discovered  America  in  the  year  1492.  12.  She  trans- 
lated the  story  very  well.  13.  Fetch  me  back  the  book, 
and  repeat  the  lesson  slowly.  14.  The  EngHsh  de- 
throned and  beheaded  their  king.  15.  Cromwell  was 
recognized  as  his  successor.  16.  We  have  sold  little 
and  bought  much. 

ADVERBS. 

169.  (363-5)  a.  Most  adjectives  are  used  in  their 
uninflected  form  as  adverbs — ^but  only  rarely  in 
the  superlative  (see  above,  79,  82):  thus,  blinb, 
'blindly,'  bliuber,  'more  blindly'  (but  am  bliutcften, 
'most  blindly'). 

6.  Other  adverbs  are  such  originally :  thus,  oft, 
'often,'  fd^on,  'already,'  gem,  'willingly';  or  they 
are  formed  by  adverbial  endings,  as  \\^,  en^ :  thus, 
fretltd^,  'certainly,'  erften^,  'firstly';  or  they  are 
cases  used  adverbially :  thus,  t^eil^;  '  in  part,'  linf^, 
'to  the  left';  or  they  are  compounds,  as  cinmal, 
'  once,'  juerft;  '  first,'  furtt)a]{)r,  '  verily.' 

c.  The  principal  simple  adverbs  of  place  and  direction,  being 
also  separable  prefixes  of  verbs,  have  been  given  above  (160\ 

170.  (368)  Adverbs,  as  such,  are  not  generally 
compared;  exceptions  are  oft  and  e^e.  SWe^r, 
'more,'  and  <im  meiften,  'most,'  are  sometimes  pre- 
fixed to  an  adverb,  as  to  an  adjective. 

/  PREPOSITIONS. 

171.  (372)  Prepositions  may  be  classified  accord- 
ing to  the  case  they  govern :  as  the  genitive,  the 
dative,  the  accusative,  and  the  dative  or  accusative. 


74 


PREPOSITIONS. 

2.  (373)  Those  governing  the  genitive  are 

—  anftatt,  ftatt, 

'instead  of 

-^Ijolhtx  or  (}atben, 

'for  the  sake  of 

-*^au6er^at6, 

'  outside ' 

**nnner^alb, 

'within' 

— oberl^alb, 

'  above ' 

^unterl^atb, 

'below' 

fraft, 

'in  virtue  of! 

Icings, 

'along'           "^ 

—  laut, 

*  according  to ' 

trolj, 

'  in  spite  of '  • 

— '  itm . . . .  tt)illen, 

*  on  account  of ' 

ungead^tet, 

'notwithstanding' 

unfern,  untreit, 

'  not  far  from ' 

ntittel^,  or  tjermittelft, 

,  '  by  means  of ' 

tjenuoge, 

'by  dint  of 

«^n)(i^renb, 

'during' 

-^  n)egen, 

*  on  account  oV  y 

s^foige. 

'  in  consequence  of  * 

*— bteffeit  (or  4eit§), 

'  on  this  side ' 

— -ienfeit  (or  ^eit^), 

'  beyond ' 

[172 


Thus,  \iM  ber  goltnen  ?icfcer,  'instead  of  the 
golden  songs';  jenfett  be^  gorfte^,  'beyond  the 
forest.' 

Some  of  these  (especially  lattg^,  tro^,  jwfolge) 
sometimes  take  a  dative  case,  ^alben  or  |)alber  fol- 
lows the  noun;  ungead^tet  and  njcflen  sometimes  do 

so ;  urn tt)illen  takes  the  noun  between  its  two 

parts :  thus,  um  xtnfrer  greunbfd^aft  tt^illen, '  for  the 
sake  of  our  friendship.'  ^alben,  ttjegen,  tt)itlen  form 
compounds  with  possessives  :  thus,  mcinet^albcn* 


PREPOSITIONS. 


76 


173.  (374)  Tte  prepositions  governing  the  da- 
tive are : 

'out'         --glet^  'like' 

*  by '  fammt,  mi%  '  along  with ' 


bei, 
tttit, 

feit, 


'  next  to ' 
'  within ' 

*  outside,  except' 

*  against ' 

'  opposite ' 

*  in  accordance  with ' 


'with'       ^na^ft, 
'above,  forLbinnen, 
'pf  auger, 

*to'  ^entgegen, 

'after'       ...  gegeniiber, 
'since'        ^gemdg, 

^3un)iber,  'contrary  to' 

9^ad),  gleid^,  and  gemaf  either  precede  or  follow 
the  noun;  entgegen,  gegeniiber,  and  iunjiber  follow  it. 

174,  (375)  The  prepositions  governing  the  ac- 
cusative only  are  : 

bi^,  '  unto,  till ' 

burrf),  'through' 

fiir,  'for' 

Juiber,  'against' 

S3i^  is  generally  followed  by  another  preposi- 
tion. Urn  and  ci^ne  (also  ftatt  or  anftatt)  govern  also 
an  infinitive  preceded  by  JU^ 

175.  (376)  Nine  prepositions  govern  sometimes 
the  dative  and  sometimes  the  accusative — ^the 
dative  when  they  indicate  locality  merely,  or  an- 
swer the  question 'where'?  the  accusative  when 
they  imply  motion  toward,  or  answer  the  question 
'  whither.'     They  are 

an,  '  on,  at '  ncbeit,  '  beside ' 


gegen, 

gen, 

'  against ' 

o^ne, 

*  without ' 

urn, 

'about' 

fonber^ 

'  without ' 

76 


PREPOSITIONS. 


[175 


auf,         *  upon  *  iiber,  *  above,  across ' 

l^inter,     *  behind '  unter,  '  under,  among  ' 

in,  *  in,  into'  t)or,  'before' 

gmifdjeit,  *  between.' 

Thus,  cr  lag  auf  tcr  Srte  unb  fyattt  ba^  Dl)r  auf  ben 
SRafeu  gclegt,  '  he  lay  on  the  ground  and  had  laid 
his  ear  on  the  turf;  er  ging  in^  ^au^  unb  blieb 
lange  in  bemfclben,  *he  went  into  the  house  and 
stayed  a  long  time  in  it.' 

It  is  only  by  the  use  of  in  and  into  that  the  English  makes  a 
corresponding  distinction.  Hence  the  ground  of  the  difference 
of  case  is  less  obvious  to  us,  and  needs  to  be  carefully  noted 
wherever  it  occurs. 

176.  (379)  A  noun  governed  by  a  preposition  is  often  also 
followed  by  an  adverb  of  place  or  direction,  for  emphasis  or 
further  definition  :  thus,  um  t^n  !^er,  'round  about  him,'  a  unbent 
2Balb  l^inau^,  'out  of  the  wood,'  na^  ber  Witte  3U,  'toward  the 
middle,'  Winter  33dumcn  l^croor,  'forth  from  behind  trees,'  unter 
bent  ^if(^  :^eri>or,  '  forth  from  under  the  table,'  3um  genfter  §inau^, 
*  out  of  the  window,'  an  eincm  tootuBer,  '  past  ojie.* 


VOCABUIiARY. 


onfc^cn,  V,  0.  look  at. 

ber  33obGn,  -n^.    floor,  ground. 

bann,  adv,  then,  at  that  time. 

enbUc^/  adv.  at  last. 

crbUcteH/  v,  JV.  catch  sight  of, 

descry, 
fasten,  v.  0.  go,  move,  drive. 
ba^  genfter,  ^x^,  -r.    window. 
pd)ten,  V.  K  reflex,  run  away, 

take  flight. 
5al6,  adj.  half. 
J^einric^,  Henry, 
l^inviu^fel^en,  v.  0.  look  out,  look 

forth. 


ber  Wlaxtt,  =tc§,  =arfte^    market. 
fcfeen,  V.  K.   reflex,  seat  one's 

self, 
ft^en,  V.  0.  sit. 

ber  Solbat,  =ten,  =tcn.   soldier, 
btc  ©trage,  ^gen.    street, 
ber  (Stu^l,  4e^,  =u5lc.    chair, 
bic  Z^xix,  =ren.    door, 
ber  Zxi^f  4<^e^f  'M^*   table. 
iiberaU,  adv.  everywhere, 
torukrflc^en,  v.  0.  go  past,  pass 

^Dieber,  adv.  again. 
berSBunjc^,  4*;^^^  ^unfc^e.  wish- 


176]  PREPOSITIONS.  77 

EXERCISE  27. 

ADYERBS  AND   PREPOSITIONS. 

1.  SCdljrenb  einer  gan^en  ©tunbe  fud^te  fie  t^n  iiberaff,  tm 
$aufe,  auf  ber  Strage,  unb  auger^atb  ber  ©tabt ;  bann  gtng 
fie  mieber  in^  §au^,  unb  faub  tl)n  ertblic^  in  feinem  ^i^tmer 
auf  bent  33oben.  2.  Qi)  njodte  unt  feinetmtHen  nad)  ber  ®tabt 
ge^en  ;  aber  al^  x6)  gum  g^enfter  lf)tnau^fal^,  erbtirfte  xd)  t^n 
nttr  gegeniiber.  3.  ®te  gtng  an  mir  Doriiber  unb  fa^  mid^ 
ntd^t  an ;  bann  trat  fie  an  bie  S^iir.  4.  §etnrtd^  ffitd^tetc 
fic^  l^tnter  \ia^  §au^,  n^ett  ev  fid)  t)or  bent  ©otbaten  fitrrf)tete. 
5.  (£r  fa^  t)or  nttr  auf  etnent  ®tu^(e  am  Xi\ij.  6»  ©ie  fe^ten 
fid^  an  ben  Sttfc^,  unb  fingen  an  gu  fd^reiben.  7,  ©ie  arme 
gran  ge^t  burd)  bie  ©tabt,  t)on  einem  §au§  gum  anbern,  unb 
fud}t  Srob  fur  i()re  ^inber.  8.  SSinnen  einer  ^Iben  ©tunbe 
bin  id^  bet  bir.  9»  S^rent  SBunfd^e  gemd^  bin  i^  feit  bem 
Sage  tti^t  auf  bem  ©ebirge  gen:)efen.  10.  (Sr  ift  itber  ben 
Wlaxtt  gefa^ren. 

VOCABUIiARY. 

also,  adv.  aud^.  mountain,  ber  S3erg,  'Qe^,^  gc* 

distant,  entferut  river,  ber  glug,  -\\c§,  =uffc. 

floor,  S3oben,  seat  one's  self,  v.  \i^  fefecn. 

Germany,  ^cutfc^Ianb;  =^.  sink,  v.  l)inunterflc§en,  0, 

go  along,  V.  mitge^ew,  0.  sit,  v.  fi^en. 

home,  at  home,  ^u  §aufe»  stand,  v.  jle^en,  0. 

lay,  V.  legen,  i\r.  swim,  -u.  fd)tt)immen,  0. 

lie,  V.  UegeU;  0,  talk,  u.  fprec^en,  0. 

look  upon,  V.  betrad^ten,  N".  week,  bie  SBoc^e,  =(^en* 
morning,  ber  2)2orgen,  -n^,  -n. 

EXEHCISE  28. 
1.  I  laid  the  book  on  the  table.     2.  Now  it  lies  on 
the  floor,  behind  the  chair.     3.  When  did  you  go  into 
the  city  ?   4.  During  the  morning  I  shall  also  be  in  the 


78  CONJUNCTIONS.  [I77 

city.  5.  I  went  along  the  river  outside  the  city,  and 
talked  with  my  friend.  6.  The  boy  swam  over  the  river, 
and  his  dog  swam  beside  him.  7. 1  sat  on  a  chair  under 
the  trees,  and  looked  upon  the  sun,  which  was  sinking 
behind  the  distant  mountains.  8.  Seat  thyself  beside 
me,  and  let  us  talk  of  our  friends.  9.  He  stayed  at 
home  instead  of  going  {inf.)  to  school.  10.  Within  a 
week  I  shall  be  outside  of  Germany.  11.  In  spite  of 
their  warm  clothes,  the  children  are  very  cold.  12.  He 
stands  between  the  house  and  the  tree. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

177.  (383)  Conjunctions  may  be  divided  into 
three  classes,  with  reference  to  their  effect  on  the 
arrangement  of  the  clauses  they  introduce. 

178.  (384)  General  connectives,  which  do  not 
change  the  order.  These  are:  unb,  'and,'  aber^ 
alletn,  fonbern,  'but,'  benn,  'for,'  enttt^eber,  'either,' 
ober,  '  or.'  These  stand  at  the  head  of  the  clause 
(except  Oi^itx,  which  has  great  freedom  of  position). 

179.  (385)  Adverbial  conjunctions,  which  are 
strictly  adverbs,  qualifying  the  verb  of  the  clause, 
and  which,  like  any  other  adverb  at  the  head  of 
the  clause,  give  it  the  inverted  order — that  is, 
cause  the  subject  to  follow  its  verb.  Such  are : 
(^w^,  'also,'boc^,  'though,  yet,'  au^erbem,  'besides,' 
bagegen,  'on  the  contrary,'  be^wegen,  'therefore,' 
folglic^,  'consequently,'  barauf,  'thereupon,'  etc., 
etc.:  thus,  barauf  ging  er  fort,  '  thereupon  he  went 
off,'  bod^  ift  er  H,  'yet  he  is  there.' 


180] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


79 


180,  (386)  Subordinating  conjunctions,  which 
give  the  clause  they  introduce  a  dependent  rela- 
tion to  some  other  clause.  Such  a  dependent 
clause  assumes  the  transposed  order — that  is,  the 
personal  yerb  is  removed  to  the  end.  The  most 
important  of  these  are : 


at^, 

'  when,  as ' 

feitbem, 

'  since ' 

beDor, 

*  before ' 

tndl^reub, 

'while' 

Bi^, 

'until' 

irann, 

'  when ' 

ha. 

'  as,  since ' 

tdtii, 

'  because ' 

bmttit, 

*  in  order  that ' 

ttjenn, 

'if,  when' 

ba§, 

Hhat' 

iDtC^ 

•how,  as' 

el}e, 

'before' 

luo, 

'  where ' 

tubem, 

'while' 

iDO^in, 

'  whither ' 

nad)bettt, 

'after' 

n)ofitr, 

' in  case ' 

oh, 

'whether,  if' 

etc. 

Thus,  ob  cr  njieberfommt,  'whether  he  comes 
back';  bag  er  red^t  balb  fommeti  mirb,  'that  he  will 
come  quite  soon';  bamit  x6)  ii)n  tt^ieberfel^e,  'that  I 
may  see  him  again ' ;  mil  i^  i^n  wi^t  gcfc^en  l^abe, 
'because  I  have  not  seen  him' ;  He  Slrt,  mte  man 
ben  ^rieg  fuf)rt,  'the  way  in  which  they  conduct 
the  war';  ber  Ort,  \vo\)xn  jte  t^n  gefii^rt  Ijabcn,  'the 
place  to  which  they  have  conducted  him.' 
VOCABULRAY. 


au§erbem,  adv.  besides. 
Beibe,  adj.  both, 
einlaben,  v.  0.  invite. 
cntVDcber. .  .ober,  either. .  .or 
gefatten,  v.  0.  please,  suit. 
0lei(^,  adj.  like,  similar, 
ttac^fotgen,  v.  N.  follow  after. 


nirgenb^,  adv.  nowhere,  in  no 

place, 
fonbern,  conj.  but. 
\m'hcxh^xm,  v.  K  come  back, 

return. 
iuirJlid),  adj.  actual,  real. 


80  CONJUNCTIONS.  [180 

EXERCISE  29. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

fThe  use  of  the  classes  of  conjunctions  has  been  explained  and  illustrat- 
ed in  the  exercises  already  given.  A  few  additional  sentences  are  given 
here.] 

1.  Sntitjeber  n)lr  merben  njarten,  bi6  ©ic  fonttiien,  ober 
®te  folqert  mt^  gteid^  nadj,  2.  gr  n^trb  tticl}t  aHein,  fonbern 
nth  feiner  (Sc^njefter  fommen,  benn  itiir  ^aben  fie  beibe  ein* 
gelaben,  3.  ^u^erbem  ^abeit  mx  nod)  t^icle  etngelabeiu 
4»  9[Bd()renb  tc^  tnit  t^m  fprad),  gtngen  bie  ^inber,-  n)o^in  fie 
iDoHten ;  unb  ba  er  je^t  fort  ift,  !ann  16)  fie  mrgenbs  finbcn. 

5.  ^U  fie  abretfte,  ^at  fie  mtr  ijerfprod^en  red)t  balb  itjieber* 
3u!ef)ren ;   Jeljt  aber  iueig  id)  nid)t,   ob  fie  iuivfUd^  !ommt 

6,  3d)  t[)ue  e§,  iueit  e§  mir  gefdUt, 

VOCABULARY. 

although,  conj.  oSgleic^*  play  together,  v.  antfammenf^ie:: 

eat,  V.  effcn,  0.                       .  Icn,  iV. 

either. .  .or,  eut^eber. .  .ober.  so,  adv.  fo, 

from,  ijon,  tired,  adj.  ermubet. 

hungry,  adj.  l^ungrig.  wait,  v.  eritjarten,  iV. 

industriously,  adv.  fteigi^^.  weak,  ad;.  f(^mad). 

journey  away,  v.  abreifen,  iV. 

EXERCISE  30. 
1.  Wait  until  she  comes  back.  2.  If  you  are  not 
hungry,  you  must  not  eat.  3.  He  works  industriously, 
although  he  is  so  old  and  weak.  4.  After  he  had  been 
long  in  Berlin,  he  went  to  Paris.  5.  Either  the  child  is 
tired,  or  it  is  sick.  6.  The  evening  is  so  beautiful  that 
I  cannot  stay  at  home.  7.  The  mother  wrote  a  letter 
while  the  children  played  together.  8.  Before  you 
journey  away  from  here,  tell  me  whither  you  are  going. 


184]  SrECIAL  USES   OF  DECLENSION.  81 

SPECIAL    USES    OF    THE    FOEMS   OF 
DECLENSION. 

181.  In  addition  to  their  uses  which  correspond 
so  nearly  with  those  of  the  same  cases  (or  phrases 
with  of  and  to)  in  English  that  they  do  not  need  to 
be  explained  here  : — 

182.  (!219.5j  a.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  used 
with  a  verb  in  the  manner  of  a  direct  object :  thus, 
ter  n^armen  ©onne  ac^ten,  '  to  heed  the  warm  sun,' 
ic^  mrte  feiner,  *I  wait  for  him,'  i^r  fpcttet  mein,  *ye 
mock  at  me.' 

K  Much  more  often,  the  genitive  is  second  ob- 
ject of  a  verb,  especially  of  a  reflexive :  thus,  ix^ 
barme  bi^  meincr,  'have  pity  on  me!' 

183.  (220)  a,  A  genitive  is  often  used  adverb- 
ially, especially  to  denote  time :  thus,  eine^  2^age^, 
'  one  day,'  SJ^orgen^,  *in  the  morning,'  alle^  Srnftc6, 
*in  all  seriousness.'  And  such  a  genitive  has 
occasionally  the  value  of  a  predicate  adjective: 
thus,  x^  bin  SBillen^,  'I  am  inclined'  ('of  a  mind'). 

6.  A  genitive  with  an  interjection  indicates  the  cause  of  the 
exclamation  :  thus,  (x6:f  be§  Uitgluct^^  *  alas  for  the  mishap  ! ' 
c.  For  the  genitive  with  prepositions,  see  172. 

184.  (222-3)  a.  Besides  the  verbs  that  take  a  da- 
tive as  second  or  remoter  object,  a  great  many  are 
followed  by  a  dative  used  like  a  direct  object : 
thus,  l)elft  njtir,  'help  me,'  jte  folgte  i^m/she  followed 
him,'  feib  \\)X  i^nen  nic^t  begegnet,  *did  you  not  meet 
them?'  einem  au^n)et(i^en,  'to  avoid  one.* 

5.  SSetben  is  used  with  a  dative  to  signify  coming  into  posses- 
sion :  thus,  fca^  njixb  vm,  *  that  becomes  mine.' 


82  SPECIAL   USES   OF  DECLENSION.  [184 

c.  For  the  dative  with  fetn  and  itjerben  used  impersonally,  see 
157  6.  ;  other  impersonals  sometimes  take  a  dative  object : 
thus,  mtr  fcl)iDtnbeIt,  *I  am  giddy.' 

d.  For  a  dative  pronoun  in  the  possessive  sense,  see  "90  ;  less 
often,  a  noun  is  used  in  the  same  way  :  thus,  feinem  SBater  um 
ben  §al^  faflenb,  'falling  upon  his  father's  neck.' 

c.  For  the  dative  with  prepositions,  see  173,  175. 

185.  (227)  A  few  verbs  govern  two  accusatives : 
thusjid^  le^re  i^n  tie  Wlu\if,  -Iteacli  him  music';  but 
often,  where  we  use  a  second  accusative,  the  Ger- 
man uses  a  preposition  with  the  noun :  thus,  fie 
tra^Iten  i^n  jum  ^Bnig,  *  they  chose  him  king,'  i^ 
^alte  t^n  fiir  mcinen  ^reunb,  *  I  deem  him  my  friend.' 

186.  (229)  An  accusative  sometimes  depends  on 
a  phrase  composed  of  a  predicate  adjective  with 
fein  or  werben:  thus,  id)  fann  i^n  nid^t  lo^  n^erben,  *I 
cannot  get  rid  of  him/  id)  bin  e^  fatt,  '  I  am  tired 
of  it.' 

187.  (230)  a.  The  accusative  is  used  to  express 
measure,  of  time,  space,  etc. :  thus,  einen  3lugenblicf 
l)Orc^cn,  '  to  listen  a  moment,'  a^t  Wldkn  tief,  'eight 
miles  deep,'  ta^  f oftet  jwei  Scaler,  '  that  costs  two 
dollars.' 

J.^\  h.  Time  when  is  expressed  by  the  accusative: 
thus,  ba^  gefc^a^  jebe^  '^Oi^x,  'that  happened  every 
year,'  fomm  biefen  2lbenb,  '  come  this  evening.' 

c.  An  accusative  is  used  absolutely,  with  an  ad- 
jective (especially  a  participle)  or  a  prepositional 
adjunct,  to  express  an  accompanying  circumstance, 
where  in  English  we  should  generally  use  with  or 
Imving :  thus,  bie  SWutter  erfd^eint,  ba^  ^inb  tm  Slrme, 
'  the  mother  appears,  with  {or  having)  her  child  on 


187]  SPECIAL  USES  OF  DECLENSION.  83 

her  arm,'  ttJtttft  un^,  bte  gadfel  umgemanbt/ beckons 
to  us  with  inverted  torch.' 
d.  For  the  accusative  with  prepositions,  see  174,  175,  ' 

VOCABUIiARY. 

be  a  Slbent),  =b^,  =be.  evening.  l^er^Iic^,  adj.  hearty,  cordial, 

ac^ten,  u*  iV.  prize,  notice.  ber  3anuar,  =r^.    January. 

anfan^§,  adv,  in  the  beginning,  ber  ^aifer,  -x^,  -r.  emperor. 

—  au^tt)ei(f)en,  v.  0.  avoid.  ba^  SeBen,  =n§,  =n.  life, 

bte  93anf,  =dn!e.  bench.  lo^,  «(?/.  loose,  rid  of,  free. 

Begegnen,  v.  iV.  meet.  bag  ^reujen,  =ng.    Prussia. 

Bitten,  v.  0.  beg,  implore.  retten,  v.  N.  save, 

baburd),  adv.  therethrough,  by  ber  9iMen,  =eng,  =en.    back. 

that  means  ftufeen,  v.  N.  prop  up,  support, 

banfen,  v.  N.  thank.  unglucflic^,  adj.   unhappy,   un- 

SDeutfi^lanb,  Germany.  fortunate, 

erinnern,  v.  N,  reflex,  remember.  biettetc[)t,  adv.  perhaps, 

ernennen,  v.  N,  appoint,  name,  ber  SSalb,  rbe^,  =alber»    wood, 

bag  ®elb,  =beg,  ^ber.  money.  forest, 

gegen,  prep,  against,  toward.  SBil^elm,  William. 
f)elfen,  v.  0.  help. 

EXERCISE  31.  * 

SPECIAL  USES   OP  THE   FORMS   OF  DECLENSION. 

1.  Si)  erinnerc  mid)  etne^  armen^  ung(iic!(td^en  9Jtannc^,  ^ 
\J-  bem  id^  _eine^2:age^  im  SBalbe  bec;egnet  bin.  2.  3lnfangg 
/ad)tete  id)  feiner  nid^t;  abev  er  folate  -mir,  unb  bat  tnic^ 
i^m  ^u  l)elfen.  3.  3^  njottte  i^m  au^meic^en,  aber  e^  ge(au,q 
tnir  nii^t ;  unb  x6)  \mvh  x^n  nid^t  lo^,  bi^  id)  i^m  etraa^ 
@e(b  gegeben  ^tte.  4.  gu  banfte  mir  fjer^Iid^,  unb  id) 
g(aube,  ic^  l^aht  xijm  baburc^  ba^  2th^n  tiielleic^t  gerettet 
5.  Sthtn  ^benb  fetje  id^  mid)  auf  biefe  San!,  ben  3fuden 
gegen  ben  Saum  geftii^t.  6.  5lm  18.  -Sanuar  1871  tuurbc 
ber  Sonig  aSitfjetm  t)on  ^reu^en  3um  ^aifev  t)on  ®eutfd^* 
lanb  ernannt. 


84  SPECIAL  USES   OF   CONJUGATION.  [188 

VOCABTJIiARY. 

avoid,  V.  au§njei(i)en.  moment,  bie  Wmuk,  =ten» 

comrade,  ber^'amerab,  =b^,  =ben»  no,  adv.  nein*  [men,  J^. 

field,  ba^  gelb,  =be^,  ^ber.  pity,  take  pity,  v.  ficB  erBar= 

give  back,  v.  gurutfgeBen,  0.  rid,  be  rid  of,  v.  lo§  iwerbcn,  0. 

gun,  bie  gUnte,  :=en*  ring,  ber  ^ing,  =g^,  =0e. 

life,  SeBen.  save,  u.  retten* 

meet,  v.  Bv'geQiten,  -^.  till,  conj.  Bi^, 

go  to  meet,  v.  cntfiegenge^cn/  0.  whole,  adj.  gans- 

EXERC;iSE  32. 
1.  Have  you  met  my  brother  this  morning  ?  2.  No, 
but  I  am  waiting  for  him  here,  3.  If  he  wants  to 
avoid  me,  I  shall  follow  him  ;  and  he  will  not  be  rid 
of  me  till  he  has  given  me  back  the  ring.  4.  Did 
the  man  help  the  boy  ?  5.  Yes,  he  took  pity  on  him, 
and  saved  his  life.  6.  He  always  works  the  whole  day 
in  (auf)  the  field,  but  in  the  evening  he  goes  to  school. 
7.  He  cannot  wait  a  moment.  8.  His  gun  in  his  hand, 
he  went  to  meet  his  comrades.  9.  The  count  has  made 
this  young  man  the  teacher  of  his  son. 

/ 

SPECIAL   USES    OF    THE    FOBMS   OF 
CONJUGATION. 

188.  (321-2)  a.  For  the  use  of  a  verb  in  the  third  person 
after  a  relative  pronoun,  see  105.  For  the  use  of  a  plural  verb 
after  the  indefinite  subjects  c§,  ba§,  and  the  like,  see  87,  946. 

h.  With  the  name,  or  title,  or  pronoun  representing  a  great 
personage,  a  plural  verb  is  often  used  :  thus,  feine  3)?aieftdt  finb 
l^ier,  *  his  Majesty  is  here.' 

189.  (324)  a.  The  present  tense  is  used  for  the 
past  in  lively  narration,  and  not  seldom  for  the 
future  :  thus,  i^  ftc^e  [till  unb  fe^'  mi^  um^  '  I  stood 


191]  SPECIAL  USES   OF  CONJUGATION.  85 

still  and  looked  about ' ;  toit  fang'  x6)'^  an,  'how 
shall  1  set  about  it  ?  ' 

6.  To  signify  what  lias  been  and  still  is,  or  wliat 
bad  been  and  still  was,  the  present  and  preterit 
are  used  respectively  (not  the  perfect  and  pluper- 
fect, as  in  English) :  thus,  [tub  ®ie  f^Ott  laitge  l)m, 
'have  you  been  here  already  long ? '  er  n)ar  fd^on 
lange  t>a,  '  he  had  been  there  already  a  long  time.' 

190.  (328.2)  The  future  is  sometimes  used  to  express  a  con- 
jecture :  thus,  bag  hjirb  iuo^l  3§r  SBtiiber  fein,  'that  is  your 
brother,  is  it  not  ?  ' 

191.  (329-32)  a.  The  subjunctive  corresponds  in 
part  to  the  English  subjunctive,  in  part  to  our 
compound  tenses  formed  with  may,  might,  would, 
and  should. 

K  It  is  often  used  to  express  a  wish  or  direc- 
tion: thus,  er  fet  gefegnet,  'may  he  be  blest,'  lang 
lebe  ber  ^bmg,  'long  live  the  king!'  ware  er  nur  l^ier, 
'were  he  only  here! ' 

Hence  it  is  used  to  supply  the  lacking  persons  of  the  imper- 
ative :  see  124. 

c.  In  a  conditional  sentence,  expressing  that  if  a 
certain  condition  were  true  (but  it  is  not)  some- 
thing else  would  be  the  case  (but  it  is  not),  the 
past  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  (pret.  and  plup.)  are 
used  in  both  clauses:  thus,  iii^  mxt  gliidfltd^er,  mnn 
id)  5U  ^aufe  gebliebeu  mxt,  '  I  should  be  happier,  if 
I  had  stayed  at  home.'  In  the  clause  expressing 
the  conclusion,  the  conditional  also  may  be  used : 
thus,  i^  wiirbe  glitcfli^er  fein,  wenn,  etc. 

d.  Either  of  the  clauses  may  stand  first ;  and  the 
sense  of  'if  in  the  condition  may  be  expressed 


86  SPECIAL  USES  OF   CONJUGATION.  [191 

either  by  tt)enn,  or  by  the  inverted  arrangement 
(204),  by  putting  the  verb  first  and  the  subject 
after  it ;  and  if  the  condition  precedes,  the  con- 
clusion is  generally  introduced  by  fo,  'then,  in 
that  case' :  thus,  mxt  i6)  ju  ^aufe  geblieben,  fo  mxt 
ic^  glitcfli^er  (or  fo  murt)e  ic^  gliicf liefer  fein),  'if  I  had 
stayed  at  home,  (then)  I  should  be  happier' :  l^atte 
er  gerufen,  fo  \)aUm  fte  i^n  gefunten  (or  fte  fatten  il)n  ge^ 
fimten,  mnn  er  gerufen  Y^ttt),  *if  he  had  cried  out, 
they  would  have  found  him ; '  wcnn  er  fame,  fo  ginge 
i^  fort  (or  fo  tDiirte  ic^  fortge^en),  *  if  he  came,  I 
should  go  away.' 

192.  (333)  a.  The  subjunctive  is  also  much  used 
as  the  form  of  indirect  discourse — that  is,  as  ex- 
pressing something  reported  or  contemplated  by 
another,  and  not  stated  on  the  authority  of  the 
speaker  or  writer :  thus,  er  fagt,  er  ad^te  mid^  unb 
IDUnfd^e  meine  greunbfd^aft,  'he  says  [that]  he  re- 
spects me  and  desires  my  friendship ' ;  tt)ir  tt)iffen 
faum,  toa^  JU  t^un  fet,  '  we  hardly  know  what  is  to 
be  done';  benft  man,  er  ge^e  toeg,  'if  one  thinks  he 
is  going  away.' 

6.  Such  a  subjunctive,  even  after  a  verb  in  a  past 
tense,  is  regularly  and  usually  the  present,  if  the 
present  would  have  been  used  in  stating  the  same 
thing  directly:  thus,  fte  glaubten,  bag  e^  m^r  fet, 
^they  believed  that  it  was  true'  (because  they 
would  have  said  „e^  ift  tt)a^r/'  'His  true');  man 
fragte,  mx  mitge^e,  'they  asked  who  was  going 
along'  {„mx  ge^t  mit/'  'who  is  going  along?').  But 
not  seldom  the  subjunctive  is  made  past  (as  in 


192]  SPECIAL  USES  OP  CONJUGATION.  87 

Englisli),  especially  in  more  colloquial  style :  thus, 
fte  fragten,  ob  fte  xt^tm^tt.mx  xl)v  ^anu  mare,  *tliey 
asked  if  she  really  knew  who  her  husband  was.' 

c.  Sometimes  the  verb  on  wliich  the  subjunctive  should  de- 
pend is  not  expressed,  or  is  replaced  by  a  noun  of  kindred 
meaning  :  thus,  er  tourbe  f^cfdjla^en,  iiJcU  er  unartic\  getuefen  fci,  *  he 
was  beaten  because  [it  was  claimed  that]  he  had  been  naughty ' ; 
au§  33eforgm§,  baj  erUnvur)cn  erregen  njcrbe,  *  out  of  apprehension 
that  he  would  stir  up  disorders ' ;  bu  l)dtteft  e^  Qcfagt,  *  [do  you 
assert  that]  you  have  said  so  ? ' 

VOCABULARY. 

M)  I  al) !  alas  !  bcr  Stxk(^,  ^fl§,  =(^e.   war. 

angenc^m,  adj.  pleasant.  bie  Sanbreifc,  =fc^»  journey  in 
anfommen,  v.  0.  arrive.  the  country, 

antocrtrauen,  v.  N.  confide.  moQlid),  adj.  possible. 
auf^eBen,  v.  0.  lift  up,  put  an    bie  9^a(f)^c^)t,  ?ten.   news. 

end  to.  oBne,  prep,  without,  but  for. 

Befd)dftlgt,  adj.  busy.  fi^rectUc^,  adj.  terrible,  fright- 
ba§,  that,  so  that.  ful. 

ba^  @nbe,  =be§,  =bett.  end.  felbfl,  pron.  self, 

cnt^atten,  v.  0.  contain.  bie  ©i^unc^,  ^qen.   sessions. 

fxh^f  adj.  early.  \\iat,  adj.  late, 

bet  %\i^xcXf  'X§>f  =r.  guide.  tuicbtt^^,  adj.  weighty, 

p  §aufe,  at  home.  bie  2Sod)e,  =d)en.  week, 

^eutig,  adj,  today's.  bie  ^^Itun^^,  -geu.  newspaper, 

faum,  adv,  hardly,  scarcely.  gu,  ado.  too. 

EXERCISE  33. 

SPECIAL   USES   OF   THE  FORMS   OF   CONJUGATION. 

1.  aSdre  i^  frii^er  eingelaben  tt^orben,  fo  \mxt  i^  DieHeid^t 
l^iugegangen ;  aber  \t\^i  ift  c^  3U  fpcit.  2,  §abeu  ®ie  bie 
Ijeutige  3^iti^^9  f^efe^en?  mart  fagt,  fie  ent()a(te  tui^tigc 
Stad^ric^ten.  3.  g^  ift  !aum  ntogltd],  \^(x'^  W  ©i^ung  fc^on 
aufge()o6en  fei.  4.  %6) !  ha%  biefer  fc^recflid)e  ^rieg  fd}on  ^u 
(Snbe  tDcive.    5,  33(eibt  er  tuo^t  lange  bei  S^ueu?  6.  gv  ift 


88  SPECIAL  USES   OF   CONJUGATION.  [192 

fd^Ott  fett  SBo^en  ^ter.  7.  gr  fagte,  er  n)urbe  mdjt  gelommen 
fein,  ttjenn  er  nid^t  geglaubt  ^dtte,  ba§  t^  gu  §aufe  fei. 
8,  (gg  tDcire  t)ieUeicf]t  angenei)mev  geiuefen,  lt)emt  mir  bie  Sanb- 
reife  ol^ne  g^u^rer  gentad)t  fatten.  9,  aj^etn  Sruber  ^at  mir 
gefd^rieben,  er  fei  gliicflic^  angefommen,  unb  merbe  mir  iaih 
etn  33ud^  fd^idfen,  ha^  i^m  mein  Onfel  fiir  tnidf)  ant)ertraut 
l^abe ;  er  !omte  nid^t  fetbft  gu  mir  !ommen,  njeil  er  gu  be^ 
f^ciftigt  fei* 

VOCABUIiARY. 
already,  adv.  fcljott*  maintain,  v.  M^awpkrif  U, 

believe,  v.  glauben,  U.  news,  9^ad)ricf)t* 

cool,  adj.  fii^L  -Oh!    ^^Ic^  ! 

die,  V.  ^kxben,  0.  -return,  v.  gurudfommett,  0. 

end,  @nbe*  ^  sorry  I  am,  e§  t^ut  mir  leib. 

go  away,  v.  fortgc^cn,  0.  spend,  v.  ^uBringen,  U. 

grieved  I  am,  e§  t^ut  mirletb*        truth,  bie  SBabr^eit,  -kn. 
hardly,  adv.  faum*  weather,  bag  2Setter,  =rg» 

headache,  bag  ^opfm^,  4^*  whether,  cow/,  ob. 

lose,  V.  toerUeren,  0.  visit,  v.  Befuc^en,  U. 

EXERCISE  34. 

1. 1  should  have  come,  had  I  not  been  so  ill.  2.  If 
the  weather  were  cooler,  we  should  be  able  to  work 
better.  3.  The  boy  said  he  had  lost  the  money,  but 
we  hardly  believe  he  has  told  us  the  truth.  4.  They 
maintain  that  the  war  is  already  at  an  end,  and  that 
the  emperor  will  soon  return  to  Berlin.  5.  Oh,  that 
it  were  true !  6.  I  asked  him  whether  he  was  tired  ; 
he  answered  that  he  had  a  headache,  and  could  work 
no  longer.  7.  I  was  grieved,  for  he  had  said  that  he 
was  going  away.  8.  She  wrote  me  she  should  spend 
the  winter  in  Paris  ;  she  was  sorry  that  she  could  not 
visit  me.  9.  I  believe  he  would  have  died,  if  the  news 
had  not  been  good. 


V 


195}  SPECIAL   USES   OF   CONJUGATION.  89 

193.  (340)  Any  infinitive  may  be  used  directly 
as  a  noun,  with  or  without  the  article ;  it  is  always 
neuter,  and  of  the  first  declension,  first  class  (55) : 
thus,  ba^  ®tel;eu  mx^  mir  faucr,  *  standing  is  grow- 
ing hard  for  me.' 

194.  (341-3)  a.  The  infinitive  generally  (as  in 
English)  takes  for  its  sign  the  preposition  JU,  *to.' 

b.  But  it  is  used  without  JU  after  the  auxiliary 
tDerten  and  the  modal  auxiliaries ;  also  after  laffeil, 
'let,  cause,  make,'  fei)en,  'see,'  t;oren,  'hear,'  fii^len, 
'feel,'  l)ei&en,  'bid,'  le^ren,  'teach,'  lernen,  'learn,' 
l)elfen,  'help,'  and  a  few  others  of  less  common 
occurrence. 

c.  Of  all  these  verbs  (as  in  the  case  of  the  modal 
auxiliaries :  see  143)  the  infinitive  also  is  generally 
used  instead  of  the  participle  in  compound  tenses 
when  used  with  another  infinitive  :  thus,  er  ^dt  uno 
marten  laffen,  'he  has  made  us  wait' ;  i^  ^attc  i^rt 
laufen  fe^en,  'I  had  seen  him  run.' 

^  195.  (343)  The  active  infinitive  is  sometimes 
used  where  we  put  a  passive.  This  is  especially 
common  with  laffcu:  thus,  er  Hep  brei  Slinge  ma6)tn, 
'he  caused  three  rings  to  be  made'  (lit'ly,  'he 
caused  to  make  three  rings ') ;  er  lt)olIte  ftc^  nic^t  ab^ 
hcilUn  laffen,  'he  would  not  let  himself  be  re- 
strained' (lit'ly,  'let  [any  one]  restrain  him');  but 
also,  ic^  ^ore  tvai)  preifen,  'I  hear  you  praised' 
(lit'ly,  'I  hear  [people]  praise  you');  tt>a^  ift  ju 
ii)nn,  'what  is  to  be  done?' 

196.  (343)   An  infinitive  is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  present 


90  SPECIAL   USES   OF   CONJUGATION.  [196 

participle  with  BleiSen  (and  sometimes  with  finben):  thus,  fie 
BUeBcn  ftctfen,  *  they  remained  sticking.'  ©^jagicren,  'go  pleasur- 
ing,' is  used  with  a  verb  of  motion  in  such  phrases  as  er  fa^xt 
f^a3teren,  *he  takes  a  drive,'  id)  reite  fpagteren,  *I  ride  out  (for 
pleasure).'    Similar  is  Bettein  ge^en,  *  go  a-begging.' 

197.  (346)  a.  The  infinitive  with  JU  is  governed 
by  three  prepositions,  um,  4n  order  to/  o|)ne, 
'  without,' ftatt  or  anftatt/ instead  of.'  If  the  infin.  has 
an  object  or  other  adjuncts,  they  stand  between 
it  and  the  preposition:  thus,  anftatt  ju  fpred^en, 

*  instead  of  speaking,'  ol^ne  mix  tin  SSort  ju  fagen, 

*  without  saying  a  word  to  me,'  um  in  Slllem  i^rcm 
diatl)  5U  folgen,  4n  order  to  follow  their  advice  in 
everything.' 

b.  With  other  prepositions,  when  a  similar  ex- 
pression is  required,  a  ba  is  used  in  composition 
with  the  preposition,  and  the  infinitive  follows 
after:  thus,  fte  warett  nal)e  baran,  auf  i^n  ju  treten, 
*they  were  near  to  treading  on  him'  (lit'ly,  'near 
to  this — [namely,]  to  tread  on  him').  Sometimes, 
and  necessarily  when  the  action  of  the  infinitive 
has  a  difierent  actor  (expressed  in  English  by  a 
possessive)  from  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb, 
a  substantive  clause,  with  bap,  takes  the  place  of 
the  infinitive :  thus,  jte  brangen  barauf,  ba§  er  ftc^ 
rec^t^  wenben  foCite,  *  they  insisted  on  his  turning  to 
the  right.' 

198.  (348)  Whatever  depends  on  an  infinitivq 
regularly  and  usually  comes  before  it,  the  infini- 
tive standing  at  the  end  of  its  clause.  And  if  one 
infinitive  depends  on  another,  the  dependent  one 


200]  SPECIAL  USES  OF  CONJUGATION.  91 

comes  before  tlie  other.  Thus,  nad^  ^aufe  Qt^tn, 
'to  go  home,'  na^  ^aufe  gel^en  laffen,  'to  cause  to 
go  home.' 

199.  (349-56)  a.  The  participles,  or  verbal  ad- 
jectives, have  in  general  the  inflection  and  con- 
structions of  adjectives.  Some  words  which  are 
participles  in  form  have  assumed  wholly  the  char- 
acter of  ordinary  adjectives:  e.g.  rcijenb,  *  charm- 
ing,' bebeutenb,  *  important';  gele^rt,  'learned,'  be^ 
forgt,  'anxious.' 

6.  But,  except  in  the  case  of  words  like  those 
last  mentioned,  the  present  participle  is  not  used 
as  predicate,  and  neither  the  present  nor  the  past 
participle  is  compared,  or  (save  in  rare  instances) 
used  as  adverb. 

200.  (357)  Participial  clauses  (with  present  or 
perfect  participle)  are  much  less  used  in  German 
than  in  English ;  ordinarily  they  are  to  be  re- 
presented by  full  adverbial  clauses,  introduced  by 
ta,  tnbem,  aU,  tDCnn,  etc.  Thus,  "  not  finding  him, 
I  went  away"  is  ta  idb  i^n  nic^t  fanb,  gittg  t^  fort; 
"having  undressed,  I  went  to  bed"  is  al^  i^  tttid^ 
au^gqogen  I)atie,  ging  ic^  ju  S3ett;  "walking  up- 
rightly, we  walk  surely;"  is  mxin  mv  aufrid^tig  tt>an^ 
beln,  ttjanbeln  n)ir  jtd^er* 

201.  (359)  a.  After  a  verb  of  motion  (gef)cn,  fommen),  a  past 
participle  is  used  instead  of  a  present,  to  express  the  mode  of 
motion  :  thus,  er  tarn  attgef^rutigen,  *he  came  jumping  along.' 

h.  A  past  participle  is  occasionally  used  in  an  imperative 
sense :  thus,  ben  happen  ^Q^amnt,  '  [have]  the  steed  bridled ' ; 
nur  n\d)t  (ang  Qefragt,  '  only  don't  be  long  asking.' 


92  SPECIAL   USES   OF   CONJUGATION.  [200 

VOCABULARY. 

bte  5(ufQaBc,  =Ben»    task.  nad)Iaufen,  v,  0.  run  after. 

Befe^len,  v.  0,  command,  order,  neulid),  adv,  newly,  lately. 

Begleiten,  v.  K  accompany.  xuIm,  adj.  quiet,  restful. 

Begrugen,  v.  K  greet.  fc6aumen,  v.  K.  foam, 

befte^en,  v,  0.  persist,  consist.  fc^roer,  adj.  heavy,  difficult. 

Bettjunbern,  u.  iV.  admire.  fraateren  fa^rett/U.iV.  take  a  drive, 

barauf,  adv.  thereupon,  upon  it.  jiiUen,  v.  U.  still,  assuage, 

ber  ®om,  ::meg,  =me.   cathedral,  ba^  SC^eater,  -r^,  ::r*    theatre, 

ber^urft,  ^teg.    thirst.  toerjlorBcn,  deceased.       [plish. 

ba^  ©etrdnf,  4eg,   -Je*    drink,  it>oflenben,u.iV^.  complete,  accom- 

beverage.  toorbtige^en,  v.  0.  go  by,  pass  by. 

Rhlxi,  Cologne  (city).  ijorfa^ren,  v,   0.   drive  before, 
ber  ^utfd&et/  =er^,  =r«  coachman.        drive  up. 

ber  Se^rer,  -x^,  =r.    teacher.  ber  SBagen,  =n^,  =n.  wagon,  car- 
lefen,  v.  0.  read.  riage. 

malen,  u.  N,  paint.  gurucfaiel^en,  v.  0.  draw  back. 

EXERCISE  35. 

INFINITIVES  AND   PARTICIPLES. 

1.  !J)a§  Sefen  l^at  fte  fd^on  gelcrnt,  aber  "na^  ®^rei6en  ift 
i^r  nod^  fd^mer.  2.  -3(^  ^etfe  i^r  tmtner  t^re  Hufgaben 
madden.  3.  2)er  ?el^rer  Ue^  mic^  3u  i(}m  fommen,  unb  befall 
mir  ba^  .?ieb  ab3ufd[)reiben.  4.  ^ar(,  la^  ben  ^utf^er  rufen 
unb  ben  SBagen  tiorfa^ren  ;  id)  mod^te  fpa3ieren  fasten. 
5.  !j)a^  n)irb  tuo^t  frfjnjet  gu  finben  fern!  6.  3c^  btieb 
fte^en  unb  fa^  fie  betDunbernb  an  ;  aber  fie  ging  t)orbei,  o^ne 
tni^  gu  begriiJ3en.  7.  5lnftatt  in^  Sweater  ^u  ge^en,  ()at  er 
fid^  guriidfgegogen,  urn  in  feinent  ^^^^^^^^  ^^^^%  arbeiten  gu 
fonnen.  8.  (Sr  beftanb  barauf,  un§  nad^  §aufe  gu  begletten. 
9.  S)a^  fd[)aumenbe  ©etrau!  l^at  un^  ben  3)urft  geftidt.  10. 
!J)er  tm  Sa^ve  1248  angefangene  3)om  gu  ^o(n  ift  neulid) 
toUenbet.  11.  3n  invent  3^^^^^  P^^)t  wan  nodf)  ba^  fd^on 
gematte  S3ilb  be^  5Serf^orbenen.  12.  Er  !am  niir  uad)=' 
gelaufen. 


200]  SPECIAL  USES   OF  CONJUGATION.  93 

VOCABULARY. 

absent,  adj.  aBiuefcnb*  invite,  v.  eintaben,  0, 

admire,  v.  Bevvunbern*  leave,  v.  toerlaffett,  0. 

beloved,  gelieBt*  -"^  madman,  ber  2Ba^n[innigc* 

born,  getoren*  next,  adj,  nd(^ft. 

bystanders,  bie  Umfle^^enbcn*  present,  adj.  anU)cfcnb. 

cause,  V.  laffen*  raise,  v.  auf^ebeit,  0. 

Charles,  ^arl.  spring  along,  v.  ^eranf^ringen,  0. 

charming,  adj.  retgenb*  study,  v.  ftubieren,  iV". 

coachman,  ^utfd)er*  take  a  walk,  v.  fpa^icren  Qe§en,  0. 

copy,  V.  a"6f(i)tei&en,  0.  teach,  v.  le^ren,  iV. 

departed,  ijerftoxBen.  threaten,  v.  broken,  N'. 

drive,  u.  fasten*  up  and  down,  auf  unb  (iB* 
forest,  ber  2Balb,  ?t)e§,  =dlber.        why,  ac?i;.  iuarum, 

girl,  bag  9)?ab(^en,  ^n^,  =n.  without,  prep.  o^nc. 

hateful,  od/.  fle:^a|t.  wood,  bet  2Balb,  ?beg,  ^atber. 

EXERCISE  36. 

1.  He  wanted  to  teach  me  to  write,  but  I  could  not 
learn.  2.  I  caused  the  coachman  to  drive  up  and 
down,  while  I  took  a  walk  in  the  wood.  3.  Studying 
is  hateful  to  me.  4.  It  is  hardly  to  be  believed  that 
she  is  already  gone.  5.  Charles  helped  me  copy  these 
letters.  6.  She  remained  sitting  while  I  spoke  with 
her.  yi.  I  invited  her  to  go  along,  but  she  would  (it) 
not.  8.  Why  did  you  leave  me  without  saying  any-  j 
thing  ?  -S^  I  had  to  go  into  the  next  room,  in  order 
to  speak  with  my  friend.  10.  She  is  a  charming  girl, 
and  admired  by  all  present.  11.  The  madman  came 
springing  along^threatening  the  bystanders  with  his 
raised  knife.  12.  Goethe,  born  in  Frankfort  in  the 
year  1749,  died  at  Weimar  in  1832.  13.  The  departed 
was  my  beloved  friend.  14.  Following  after  him,  I 
too  went  through  the  forest.  15.  He  being  absent,  I 
would  not  go  into  the  house.  // 


94  OBDEE  OF  THE  SENTENCE.  [202 

OEDER  OF  THE  SENTENCE. 

[Many  of  the  rules  of  arrangement  have  been  given  above,  in 
connection  with  the  Exercises ;  but  the  whole  subject  is  pre- 
sented here,  for  reference,  in  a  more  systematic  way.  It  is  an 
important  part  of  thorough  instruction  in  German  to  analyze 
the  sentence  correctly,  pointing  out  the  character  and  relation 
of  the  clauses.  ] 

202.  (441)  There  are  three  modes  of  arranging 
the  German  sentence:  1.  the  normal,  or  regular; 
2.  the  inverted ;  3.  the  transposed.  In  the  first, 
the  personal  verb  immediately  follows  the  subject ; 
in  the  second,  it  immediately  precedes  the  sub- 
ject ;  in  the  third,  it  is  removed  to  the  very  end  of 
the  clause.  The  first  and  second  belong  to  inde- 
pendent clauses,  the  third  to  dependent  clauses, 
whether  these  be  substantive,  adjective,  or  ad- 
verbial. 

203.  (430,  442)  a.  The  normal  order  is :  1.  the 
subject  (the  simple  subject  and  its  modifiers); 
. .  the  simple  predicate  or  personal  verb ;  3.  the 
various  modifiers  of  the  predicate;  and  (among 
these),  last,  4.  the  non-personal  part  or  parts  of 
the  verb  (if  there  be  such) — namely,  separable 
prefix,  participle,  infinitive. 

6.  If  more  non-personal  parts  of  the  verb  than  one  are  pres- 
ent, they  follow  one  another  in  their  order  as  here  mentioned  : 
namely,  prefix  before  participle  or  infinitive,  and  participle 
before  infinitive. 

c.  Among  the  various  modifiers  of  the  predicate  (3,  above),  a 
personal  pronoun  usually  comes  first,  an  accusative  object  pre- 
cedes a  genitive,  but  follows  a  dative  ;  an  adverb  of  time  comes 
before  one  of  place  or  manner  ;  a  predicate  noun  or  adjective 
comes  last. 


201]  OEDER  OF  THE  SENTENCE.  95 

Examples  are:  cr  fd^idft,  'he  sends';  er  fc^icft  mix 
cin  S3uci^  iuriicf,  *he  sends  me  back  a  book';  mdn 
greunb  ^at  mix  einSuc^  gcfd^trft,  'my  friend  has  sent 
me  a  book';  er  mxt)  mir  dn  Sdn6)  [Aicfen,  'he  will 
send  me  a  book';  mein  lieber  alter  greuub  SBil^elm 
n)irb  mir  mein  i))m  gelie^ene^  33ud^  rec^t  balb  nad^  |)aufe 
juriicfgefdbicft  1;)aitn,  'my  dear  old  friend  William 
will  very  soon  have  sent  back  home  to  me  my 
book,  lent  to  him.' 

c.  Nothing  is  allowed  to  come  between  the  personal  verb  and 
its  subject  except  sometimes  aBer,  'but'  or  'however,'  and, 
quite  rarely,  a  parenthetically  used  word  or  phrase. 

204.  (431-3,  443)  a.  The  inverted  order  is  the 
same  with  the  normal,  except  that  the  subject 
comes  next  after  the  personal  verb,  instead  of  next 
before. 

b.  The  inverted  order  is  used  in  the  following 
cases  (arranged  in  nearly  the  order  of  their  fre^ 
quency) :  1.  when  any  part  of  the  predicate  is  put, 
instead  of  the  subject,  at  the  head  of  the  sentence ; 
2.  in  an  interrogative  sentence,  or  when  a  question 
is  asked ;  3.  in  a  conditional  sentence,  or  to  give 
the  meaning  of  '  if ' ;  4.  in  an  ©ptative  or  imperative 
sentence,  or  when  a  command  or  desire  is  ex- 
pressed; 5.  for  impressiveness,  with  the  personal 
verb  first,  and  usually  with  boc^  or  j[a,  'surely,' 
somewhere  after  it. 

Examples  are  :  1.  mir  ^at  er  eitt  33uc^  gef^icft,  ein 
Sdvi6)  ^at  er  mir  gefc^irft,  gefd)icft  ^at  er  mir  ein  S3ud^, 
*he  has  sent  me  a  book'  (with  varying  emphasis, 
the  word  placed  first  having  a  stress  laid  upon  it) ; 


96  OEDER   OF   THE   SENTENCE.  [204 

2.  ^at  er  mix  ba^  Sdu6)  gefd^icft,  'has  lie  sent  me  the 
book?'  mxt)  er  c^  mix  juriidff^trfen,  'will  lie  send  it 
back  to  me?'  3.  f^icft  er  mir  ta^  53uc^,  fo  t^ut  er 
n)0][)l,  4f  he  sends  me  the  book,  he  does  well'; 
4  f^idfe  er  mix  ba^  93ud^,  'let  him  send  me  the 
book!'  5.  ^at  er  mix  bod^  ba$  S3u^  fl^f^icft,  'surely 
he  has  sent  me  the  book.' 

c.  Only  the  general  connectives,  meaning  *and'  *biit*  *for* 
*or '  (178),  are  allowed  to  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence 
without  giving  it  the  inverted  order. 

d.  In  an  inverted  sentence,  a  personal  pronoun  as  object 
often  comes  between  the  personal  verb  and  the  subject,  when 
the  latter  is  a  noun  :  thus,  ^at  mir  mein  greunb  ba§  33ud)  gefi^idt, 
*  has  my  friend  sent  me  the  book  ? ' 

e.  An  adverbial  dependent  clause,  if  preceding  the  main 
clause,  causes  the  inversion  of  the  latter,  just  as  a  simple  adverb 
would  do  :  thus,  al^  id)  ba^  S3u(^  ijexlangtc,  fc^icJte  er  c^  mir  ^uxudf 
•when  I  desired  the  book,  he  sent  it  back  to  me.' 

/.  If  an  interrogative  word  is  itself  the  subject, 
or  belongs  to  the  subject,  it  of  course  stands  be- 
fore the  verb :  thus,  mx  ^ai  mix  ba^  Siud^  3^fcl)icft, 
'who  has  sent  me  the  book?'  n^effen  S3ud^  ift  mir  ge^ 
fd^icft  ttJOrben,  'whose  book  has  been  sent  to  me?' 
^/205.  (434-9,  444)  a.  The  transposed  order  is  the 
same  with  the  normal,  except  that  the  personal 
verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the  whole  clause. 

K  This  order  is  usual  in  dependent  clauses — 
that  it  is  to  say,  in  such  as,  being  introduced  by 
a  subordinating  word  (relative  pronoun  or  con- 
junction), are  made  to  enter  into  the  structure  of 
the  sentence  in  which  they  occur  with  the  value 
of  a  part  of  speech:  namely,  of  a  noun,  an  ad- 
jective, or  an  adverb. 


205]  ORDER  OF  THE   SENTENCE.  97 

c.  A  substantive  clause,  or  one  having  the  value 
of  a  noun,  is  introduced  by  bap,  'that,'  ob,  'whether,' 
or  a  compound  relative  pronoun  or  particle ;  it  is 
oftenest  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb :  thus,  ob  er 
mix  ba^  93uc^  \i}idt  ober  nid^t,  ift  mix  einerlet,  'whether 
he  sends  me  the  book  or  not  is  indifferent  to  me ' ; 
id^  n?eif,  bag  er  e^  mix  gefc^idt  ^at,  'I  know  that  he 
has  sent  it  to  me.' 

d.  An  adjective  clause  is  introduced  by  a  rela- 
tive pronoun  or  particle ;  it  belongs  to  and  qualifies 
a  noun:  thus,  ba^  33u^,  ml^t^  er  mir  gef(^icft  })at, 
ift  l^ier,  'the  book  that  he  has  sent  me  is  here'; 
ber  Drt,  m^n  er  e^  f^idfte,  'the  place  whither  he 
sent  it.' 

e.  An  adverbial  clause  is  introduced  by  a  sub- 
ordinating conjunction  (180),  of  place,  time,  man- 
ner, cause,  purpose,  condition,  etc.;  it  qualifies 
usually  a  verb,  sometimes  an  adjective  or  an  ad- 
verb: thus,  aU  er  mix  ba^  33ud^  fd^tcfte,  'when  he 
sent  me  the  book';  mil  er  e^  mir  gefd^idft  ))Cit,  'be- 
cause he  has  sent  it  to  me ' ;  mnn  er  e^  mir  juriicfi* 
fd^idfen  n^ill,  'if  he  will  send  it  back  to  me.' 

/.  In  a  transposed  sentence  (as  in  an  inverted  one  :  204  c?.)  a 
personal  pronoun  as  object  is  sometimes  put  before  the  subject 
if  the  latter  is  a  noun  :  thus,  oB  mir  mein  greunb  bag  33 ud)  gefc^icft 
j)atf  *  whether  my  friend  has  sent  me  the  book?  * 

g.  When  the  clause  ends  with  more  than  one  infinitive,  the 
transposed  verb  is  usually  (and  always,  if  the  second  infinitive 
is  one  used  in  place  of  a  participle:  148)  put  next  before  in- 
stead of  after  them  :  thus,  n)ci(  er  c^  mir  nid)t  ^at  fc^icten  \t)oUcn, 
*  because  he  has  not  wanted  to  send  it  to  me.' 

h.  In  a  dependent  clause,  the  transposed  auxiliary  of  a  perfect 
or  pluperfect  tense  is  often  omitted,  and  sometimes  the  trans- 


98  DEEIVATION.  [205 

posed  copula  or  form  of  the  verb  fein,  '  be ' :  thus,  oB  cr  mir  ba^ 
23ud)  gcfd)i(ft,  'whether  he  has  sent  me  the  book  ' ;  iuenn  ba^  25u(^ 
3U  l)aljen,  *  if  the  book  is  to  be  had.' 

i,  A  clause  does  not  take  the  transposed  order 
unless  it  is  formally  dependent — that  is,  intro- 
duced by  a  word  (relative  or  conjunction)  that 
shows  its  dependent  character.  A  clause  logically 
dependent  is  not  seldom  met  with  in  the  other 
forms  of  arrangement:  thus,  especially,  a  clause 
in  indirect  discourse  (192),  and  one  in  which  the 
inverted  arrangement  is  used  to  give  the  sense  of 
'if:  thus,  er  fagt,  er  ])abt  mix  toa^  33ud^  fc^on  gef^icft, 
*he  says  he  has  sent  me  the  book  already'  (but 
ba§  er  mir  ia^  33ud^  fd^on  gefd^tdft  l^abe);  er  t^ut,  aU 
Yattt  er  e^  mir  fd^on  gef^idft,  'he  acts  as  if  he  had 
sent  it  to  me  already'  (but  alS  ob  er  e^  mir  fi^Ott  ge^ 
f*icft  i)atk). 

208.  (445)  The  rules  of  arrangement  are  not 
always  strictly  observed,  even  in  prose,  and  their 
violation  is  especially  frequent  in  antiquated  and 
in  low  style  ;  while  in  poetry  they  are  still  more 
often  neglected. 

DEEIVATION. 

207.  (398-9)  a.  In  German,  as  elsewhere,  words 
are  derived  from  other  words  especially  by  the 
help  of  suffixes,  also  by  prefixes,  and  by,  or  along 
with,  changes  in  the  form  of  the  primitive  word. 

(400)  b.  Changes  in  the  primitive  oftenest  affect 
the  vowel,  and  are  mainly  of  two  kinds :  1.  modifi- 
cation (Umlaut :  10-13),  or  the  change  of  a,  0,  U, 


209]  DERIVATION.  99 

-  an,  to  a,  o,  it,  an  respectively ;  2.  variation  (Slblaut), 
or  a  change  like  those  seen  in  the  principal  parts 
of  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation  (135). 

208.  (404-6)  a.  Verbs  are  derived  from  other 
verbs  especially  by  means  of  the  inseparable  pre- 
fixes (see  167) ;  but  also  sometimes  by  internal 
changes:  as  fiidcn, 'fell,'  legen, 'lay/  fe^en, 'set/ 
from  fallen,  'fall/  licgcn,  'lie/  ft^en,  'sit/  respect- 
ively; and  in  a  few  cases  by  suffixes,  as  lac^eln, 
'smile,'  from  lad^en,  'laugh,'  folgcrn,  'infer,'  from 
folgeu,  'follow.' 

K  Verbs  from  other  languages  (chiefly  French) 
are  apt  to  take  the  ending  iren  or  iercn:  thus, 
marfd^iren,  'march,'  regieren,'rule';  and  this  ending 
is  even  found  on  a  few  words  of  native  origin,  as 
fd^attiren,  'shade.' 

c.  Verbs  are  very  commonly  derived  from  nouns 
and  adjectives  (rarely  from  other  parts  of  speech), 
either  with  the  help  of  inseparable  prefixes  (see 
167),  or  without  any  additions :  thus,  l^aufen, 
'dweir  (^au^,  'house'),  altern,  'age'  (3lltcr, 
'age'),  anbern,  'change'  (anber,  'other'),  ftarfen, 
'strengthen'  (ftarf,  'strong'),  emporeU;  'arouse' 
(empor,  '  aloft '). 

209.  (408)  a.  Nouns  are  derived  from  verb- 
roots,  often  with  variation  of  the  radical  vowel, 
often  with  brief  obscure  endings,  as  e,  te,  t :  thus, 
93ant),  'volume/  S3unb,  'bond'  (binten,  'bind'); 
®abe,  'gift'  (geben,  'give'),  gaf)rt,  'passage'  (falfjren, 

\     '  go ') ;  often  with  more  distinct  endings,  of  defin- 
\   able  meaning. 


100  DERIVATION.  [209 

(409-10)  K  Nouns  are  also  derived  from  other 
nouns  and  from  adjectives,  chiefly  by  added  suf- 
fixes, with  or  without  modification  of  the  vowel  of 
the  primitive. 

c.  The  principal  suffixes  by  which  nouns  are 
formed  are  as  follows  : 

Cr  makes  nouns  denoting  an  agent,  chiefly  from  verbs  :  thus, 
<SeBer,   'giver,'  33d(fer,  *  baker'  ;  also  from  nouns,  as  ©drtner, 

*  gardener ' ;  and  from  names  of  places,  as  Conboner, '  a  Londoner.' 

el  makes  nouns  denoting  an  instrument :  thus,  ^^dtl,  '  cover,' 
glugel,  'wing.' 

Ung  makes  feminine  abstract  nouns  from  verbs  :  thus,  gu^r^ 
ung,.  'leading,' S'ieigung,  'inclination.' 

ni§  makes  neuter  (sometimes  feminine)  abstracts  from  verbs 
and  a  few  adjectives:   thus,  3citfl^i6f    'testimony,*  gin[terni^, 

*  darkness. ' 

fol^  fcl  have  nearly  the  same  office  with  nt§  :  thus,  <Bd}id]a\f 
•fate,'^at^fet,  'riddle.' 

t,  with  modification  of  vowel,  forms  feminine  abstracts  from 
adjectives:  thus,  @utc,  *  goodness,'  ^iefe,  'depth.' 

jcit,  Uit  do  the  same:  thus,  grei^eit,  'freedom,'  ^oflic^feit, 
'courtesy';  and  before  fett/  ig  is  often  added  to  the  adjective  : 
thus,  Sujigfeit,  *  sweetness.' 

f^dft  forms  feminine  nouns,  usually  from  other  nouns:  thus, 
greunbfc^aft,  'friendship,'  Sanbf(^aft;  'landscape.' 

t|um  makes  nouns,  mostly  neuter,  from  other  nouns  and 
from  a  few  adjectives  :  thus,  £6nigtr)um,  *  kingdom,'  dtddjt^nm, 

*  wealth.  * 

d^ttl,  Icitt  make  neuter  diminutives  from  nouns :  thus,  S^an^c 
d)en,  'little  house,' S3 drf)lein,  'brooklet.' 

in  makes  feminine  from  masculine  appellations  of  persons  : 
thus,  ,girttn,  'shepherdess,'  ^onigin,  'queen,'  33erUnerin,  'wo- 
man of  Berlin.* 

ti  (sometimes  tttx)  makes  feminine  abstracts  from  nouns  and 
verbs,  sometimes  with  disparaging  implication  :  thus,  3dgerei, 

*  sportsmanship,' ©d)mcic{)clei,  'flattery,'  £inbetei,  'childishness,' 
Bd)xdUxi\,  'scribblings.' 


21t]  DERIVATION.  101 

210,  (411)  Nouns  are  sometimes  made  by  pre- 
fixes, of  whicli  the  principal  are  as  follows  : 

ge  makes  iiSTially  neuter  nouns  (a  few  masculines  and  femi- 
jiines),  mostly  collectiYes  or  frequentatives,  from  nouns  and 
verbs:  thus,  @eBir(^,  'mountain-range,'  @eI)or,  'hearing,'  @c= 
f^rd(^,  *  conversation.' 

mij  is  like  our  mis  or  dis^:  thus,  2Ki§griff,  'mistake,'  2)?i§= 
gunft,  'disfavor.' 

Utt  is,  as  in  English,  the  negative  prefix:  thus,  Unbanf,  'in- 
gratitude,'Unfinn,  *  nonsense.' 

ur  adds  the  meaning  of  originality  or  primitiveness,  or  is 
sometimes  intensive:  thus,  Uritjelt,  'primitive  world,'  UrBilb, 
'archetype.* 

crj  (our  arch)  is  intensive:  thus,  ©r^jBifi^of,  'archbishop,' 
©r^bieb,  'archthief.' 

211.  (413-6)  a.  A  few  adjectives  come  from 
verb-roots,  with,  internal  change  only :  thus,  brad^, 
'fallow'  (brec^en,  'break  up'),  pcf,  'fledged'  (fliegen, 
'  fly ').  But  most  derivative  adjectives  are  made 
from  verbs  and  nouns  (much  less  often  from  other 
adjectives)  by  means  of  suffixes. 

b.  The  most  important  adjective  suffixes  are : 

Bat  is  nearly  like  our  able:  thus,  c^hax,  'eatable,'  bienftBat/ 
'serviceable.' 

en,  ern  denote  material:  thus,  golben,  'golden,'  etd)cn, 
'oaken,' Bleiern,  'leaden.' 

er.  Nouns  made  with  this  suffix  from  names  of  places  are 
often  used  as  indeclinable  adjectives  :  thus,  bie  Sonboner  ©tra^en^ 
'the  streets  of  London,'  Berliner  SBaaren,  'Berlin  wares.' 

IJaft  has  a  value  like  that  of  our  suffixes  ous,  ful,  ly,  etc.:  thus, 
tugenb^aft,  'virtuous,'  jimbf)aft,  'sinful,' leiBl)a ft,  *bodily.' 

ig  is  usually  like  the  corresponding  English  y:  thus,  mad)ti^, 
'mighty,'  Hutig,  'bloody.'  It  makes  adjectives  from  words  of 
very  various  kind,  often  from  particles  :  thus,  uBrig,  'remain- 
ing' (uBcr,  'over'^,  aBermalig,  *  repeated'  (aBermal^,  'again'). 

ifd)  is  like  our  ish :  thus,  f^anifc^,  'Spanish,'  finbifd),  'childish.' 


102  COMPOUND  WORDS.  [211 

lei,  with  er  before  it,  forms  indeclinable  adjectives  signifying 

*  of  such  kind '  :   thus,  einerlei,   *  of  one  sort, '  aEcrlei,  *  of  all 
sorts.' 

lid)  corresponds  in  the  main  with  our  like,  ly :  thus,  mdnnlicf), 

*  manly,'  iaI)rUd),   *  yearly';    also  rotl)li(f),    'reddish,'  unfaglic^,* 

*  unspeakable.' 

fain  is  our  some,  in  such  words  as  ^eilfam,  'wholesome.' 

IO0,  tJOtt,  rcic^,  faft,  fait  or  \Vi\ix^,  ortig,  etc,  form  classes  of 

compounds  rather  than  of  derivatives  :    thus,  enbto^,  *  endless, ' 

letbijcH; '  sorrowful,'  Uebreic^,  *  rich  in  charm,'  breifad)  or  breifaltig, 

'threefold,'  frembartijj,  *  of  strange  fashion.' 
c.  Adjectives  are  made  with  the  same  prefixes  as  nouns  (210): 

thus,  geimg,  'certain,'  mi§^unfti^,  'grudging,'  un!lar,  'unclear,' 

uralt,  'very  old,'  cr^bumm,  'extremely  stupid.' 


COMPOUND  WOEDS. 

212.  (419)  a.  Compounds  are  mucli  more  nu- 
merous and  more  freely  formed  m  German  than  in 
English,  and  are  sometimes  of  considerable  length 
and  complexity. 

l>.  If  two  compounds  having  the  same  final  member  are  used 
coordinately,  the  final  of  the  first  is  often  omitted :  thus,  alle 
(Sonn=  unb  gcfttage,  '  all  the  Sundays  and  holidays,'  bie  ^aVLm-  unb 
queEenteere  ©inobc,  'the  treeless  and  waterless  desert.' 

213.  (420)  Verbs  compounded  with  separable 
and  inseparable  prefixes  have  already  been  treated 
(159-68).  A  noun  or  adjective  or  adverb  is  also 
sometimes  joined  to  a  verb,  and  treated  usually 
like  a  separable  prefix  (rarely,  like  an  inseparable) : 
thus,  ^ant)l)aben,  *  handle,'  tt^a^rfagcn,  *  prophesy,' 
n)obIt^un,  *  benefit'  (tt?o^l5Utt)un,  \\)^i  n)0^[,  tt)o^lgetl;an, 
etc.). 

214.  (421-2)  a.  Compound  nouns  are  generally 
composed  of  a  noun  and  a  preceding  qualifying 


215]  COMPOUND  WORDS.  103 

word — oftenest  another  noun,  but  sometimes  an 
adjective  or  verbal  root  or  particle :  thus,  ©d^ul^ 
bud^,  'schoolbook,'  93aumtt)olIe,  'cotton'  ('tree- 
wool'),  ©i^baum,  'oak-tree';  SSolImont),  'full  moon,' 
©tng^ogel,  'singing  bird,'  SWitmenfc^^  'fellow-creat- 
ure.' 

h,  A  noun  as  former  member  of  a  compound  not 
infrequently  takes  a  plural  or  a  genitive  form,  or 
even  sometimes  assumes  a  genitive  ^  that  does 
not  belong  to  it:  thus,  S3ilberbud^,  'picture-book,' 
SanbSmann,  'countryman,'  ©eburt^tag,  'birthday.' 

c.  The  gender  and  declension  are  (with  a  few  exceptions) 
those  of  the  final  member.    The  former  member  has  the  accent. 

d.  More  irregular  and  unusual  are  such  as  add  the  implication 
of  having  or  possessing,  as  fa^lfo^f,  'bald-head*  ('one  having 
a  bald  head'),  3Siere(J;  'square'  ('four-cornered');  or  a  verb-root 
with  limiting  word,  as  ^laugenii^t^,  *  good-for-nothing,'  ^e^rau^, 
' closing  dance  '  ('turn  out '). 

215.  (423-4)  a.  Compound  adjectives  are  always 
made  up  of  an  adjective  with  a  preceding  quali- 
fying word.  They  are  inflected  like  simple  adjec- 
tives. The  accent  is  on  the  former  member  of 
the  compound.  Thus,  lf)eUblau,  'bright  blue,'  ei^^ 
fait,  'ice-cold,'  riefengrop,  'gigantic,'  finberlo^; 
'  childless.' 

K  Many  adjectives  are  made  by  adding  the  end- 
ing ig  to  a  noun-compound  not  used  alone  as  such : 
thus,  ^ierfiiptg,  'four-footed,'  firop^erjtg,  'great- 
hearted.' 


104  ENGLISH  AND   GERMAN.  [216 

ENGLISH  AND  GEEMAN. 

216.  (447-52)  a.  Tlie  English  and  German  are 
related  languages — that  is,  they  have  descended 
from  the  same  original  language,  by  processes  of 
gradual  change  and  divarication  such  as  are  seen 
going  on  in  all  languages  even  at  the  present  time. 

6.  Both  are  members  (dialects)  of  the  Germanic 
or  Teutonic  branch  of  the  great  Indo-European  or 
Aryan  family  (embracing  also  Slavonic,  Celtic, 
Latin,  Greek,  Persian,  Sanskrit) ;  the  English  be- 
longs to  the  Low-German,  the  German  to  the 
High-German,  division  of  the  branch. 

217.  (453-60)  Hence  the  very  numerous  and 
striking  correspondences  that  are  seen  between 
German  and  English  words.  The  differences  in 
form  between  these  corresponding  words  are  in 
part  too  various  and  irregular  to  be  briefly  set 
forth ;  but  in  part  they  depend  upon  a  certain  law 
of  change  widely  known  as  "Grimm's  Law,"  by 
which, 

to  English    th,  d,  t,     /,   6,    p,    h,  g,  h  correspond 
in  German    b,  i,  \,\,    h,  f,b,  f,p,   I;,  g,  h 

Examples  are:  ta^  that,  ©ruber  brother,  Xag 
day,  tief  deep,  ju  to,  au^  out,  2Beib  wife,  fteben 
seven,  auf  up,  ^  elf  en  help — and  so  on. 

THE  GEEMAN  LANGUAGE. 

218.  (462-9)  The  German,  in  nearly  its  present 
form,  goes  back  to  about  the  time  of  Martin  Luther 
(after  1500  A.  D.),  by  whose  writings,  and  espe- 


218]  THE   GEKMAN  LANGUAGE.  105 

cially  by  whose  Bible-version,  the  main  impulse 
was  given  toward  making  it  the  general  literary 
language  of  the  German  poeple.  It  is  called  the 
New  High-German  (neu^o^teutfc^)  language,  to 
distinguish  it  from  the  earlier  dialects  by  which 
it  was  preceded — the  Middle  High-German  (12th 
to  15th  centuries),  and  the  Old  High-German  (8th 
to  11th  centuries). 


SELECTED  SENTENCES, 

FOR  PBACTICE  IN  APPIiYING  THE  RUIiES   OF  THE   GRAMMAE. 


1.    DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

.  1.  S)a6  Stugc  tfl  be§  ?eibe§  Bcf)t  %  3)te  gilic  ift  bie 
3terbe  be^  ©arten^.  3.  ®o(b  unb  <SU6er  finb  ba^  33lut  be^ 
(Staate^.  4.  Uebung  mad)t  ben  5!Keifter.  5.  S)ie  (Sd^ti)at== 
kn  (jangcn  i^re  3Jefter  an^  bie  SKcinbe  ber^cinfer.  6.  SBir 
finb  eine^  ^er^en^,  eine^  SSlut^.  7.  aKeine^  35ater^  §au§ 
ftet)t  am^  Ufer  be§  ^luffe^,  untueit  t)on  ber  ©trape*  8,  S)er 
Son)e  ift  ^onig  ber  %\)\txt.  9.  -3n  ber  ^unft  ift  bie  gorm 
Mea,  ber  ©toff  gilt'  nid)t§.  10.  ®ie  9?ot6  ift  bie.3Kutter 
ber  ifiinfte,  aber  aurf)  bie  ©rogmutter  ber  Safter.  11.  5)ie 
!?itft  crf^at  t)on'  bem  ®efang  ber  SSogel  12.  S)ie  33Iatter 
ber  Sdume  fallen  ab.*  13.  ®thti  bem  Saifer  wa^  be^  Sai^ 
fer^  ift.  14.  S)e§  ?eben^  5Kat  btitfit  einntal  nnb  nid^t  trieber. 
15.  !J)ie  ?}atnr  t)erUe^  bem  2JJenfd)en  S5ernnnft.  16.  ®ic 
SBiege,  \i^%  33ett  nnb  ber  (Sarg  finb  atn^eftJFten.  17.  ®er> 
felbe*  t)ermd^(te  fid^  mit  3o^anna,  ber  Sod)ter  gerbinanb^  be^ 
^at^oUfc^en  t)on  ^ragonien.  18.  !j)er  {iingere  ©o^n  g^erbi* 
nonb^  njarb®  mit  ^nna,  ber  2^oc^ter  be§  ^'onig^  2B(abt^(am 
t)on  Ungarn  nnb  8o()men,  t)ernifi()(t.  19.  ^lbrerf)t  be^  IV. 
©o^n,  3l(bred)t  V.,  marb  Saifer  ©igmnnb^  ©d)miegerfo()n 
nnb  grbe.  20.  3)te  frommen  Sieber  $PanI  @er()arbt^  nnb 
-So^ann  §eermann^  er!(angen  nod),  nnb  trofteten  ba^  25oH 
in  feiner  Seiben^jeit. 

» 175.    2  @eiten,  136a.    3  with.    -» siBfanen,  161 .    ^  95,   e  gs^rb 
i)crmdl)tt,  149.  * 


DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


1^  ©riin  ift  be§  ?eben§  golbener  33ann{.    2.  (Sin  gnte^ 
SBort  pnbet  eine  gnte  ^it^tf  3.  §nnbe  finb  trene  grennbe 
i^rer  §erren.     4.    gin  gnte^  23nd)  ift  ein  tt)af)rer  ©d)a(5.''^ 
6.  ®a^  gan3e  ganS  ift  ein  tna^rer  Oarten.    6.  -3n  Doder 


SELECTED   SENTENCES.  107 

m\il)t  ftel)t  ber  ^pjetbaum,  nur  njeig  imb  rot^.      7.  SIu^ 

lauter  Heinen  ^Dul^en  befte^t  ba^  ^ebetuS.  ®e§  2Konbe^ 

©tra^l  malt  ben  ^ert;  mit  mattem  ®latf^  ^.  S)a§  neuc 

*3a^r  ftef)t  i)or  ber'  3:i)ur.    10,  gin  erfter  SSerInd]  ift  felten 

ein  aKeifterftiidf.    11,  2Bo  retd)en  Lenten'  bag  ^er^  fi^t,  ^aben 

annTSeutc  feinen  ©tein.     12,  5Wan  ftrent  meigen,  fcinen 

©ono  auf'  htn  g^upoben  Dor  einem  gejlttage.     13.   S)cr 

2Rann  ift  Mojt,  bod)  l)at  er  falfdjen  (SinE-  14.  ®ieb  bem 

armen  ^uxmxdln^\  grtebe  biefem  miiben  ^er^.     15.  SBelc^ 

.  einen  gngel  t)attet  %  qebilbet!     16.  SEenige  biirre  grud)tev*^ 

\gebte^en.    17.  S)u  im  ^immet !  l^Kf  ^  mir *  armen,  fditoar^en' 

wcinn. 

^  V 


1175.    2l84d.    3  §clfcn,  136a.    U84. 


3.    ADJECTIVES  AS  NOUNS  AND  ADVERBS  AND 
COMPAEED. 

1..  3)er  bnnte  SRegcnBogen  ift  ha^  fd]onftc  ^inb  ber  ©onne. 

2.  3)ie  5)?a(^tigaII  fingt  am  fd)onften  ton  aOien  SSogeIn,  unb 
fie  fingt  urn  3JJitterna^t  fd^oner  ate  gn  alien  anberen  ^eiten. 

3.  ^er  Idngfte  Jag  ift  ^ier  etn^a  nm  8  ©tnnben  (anger  ate 
berlnr^efte.  4.  ©rug' Htr,  fdjonfte^,  liebfte^  ?anb  !  6.  3?om' 
^immel  forbert  man  bie  fd)onften  (Stunben  unb  t)on  ber  grbc 
jebe  ^od^fte  guft.  6.  S)ie  (Sonne  itjenbet  aJX"  jebeg  !(einftc 
23(umd^en  i^re  ganje  ^raft.  7.  S)er  frud^tbarfte  ^o^3f  fd)reibt 
fid)  leer.  8.  ®ie  fc^onften  Silber  finb  njeiter  nid)t§  ate  ein 
geifttgeg  Stc^t  in^  bie  ©eele.  9.  2)er  9ieid^e  fauft  bergeben^ 
feine  greuben ;  ber  ^o'^e  fie^t  fo  l^o()t  trie  oft  ber  3lrme. 
®er  ®ute  ^t  aUein  ben  ?eben§quen  in  fid^.  10.  2Ran  freut 
fid)  iiber'  ha§  ®efd)el)ene,  an  bem  ®egentt)Srtigen,  auf  ha^ 
^iinftige.  11.  S)te  ?erd)e,  ate  SKorgenbotc,  fd^iDingt  fid^  in 
ha^  Slauc  ber  ?uft.  12.  gr  bleibt  ^u  §aufe,  SBiditige^  gu 
tl^un.*  13.  SBeife  erbenfen  bie  neuen  ©ebanifen  unb  D^arren 
t)erbreiten  fie*  14.  -3a^  bann  fommt  nod^  tttoa^  Seffere^,  nod^ 
n)eit  ©d^onereS! 

J  Greetings,  hail.     249.     n75.    ^Idia. 


108  SELECTED   SENTENCES. 

4.     PKONOUNS. 

1.  Si)  ^aU  t^m  Meg  eqal)!!,  tt)a3  totr  entbedft  f^ahm. 
%  Ser  i^n  fa^^  ber  fdicitjte  t^n  itad)  fetnem  uja^ren  9[Bert()e» 
zt-(^^^^^^  3,  grgie^unf]  giebt  bem  9Kenfd^en  tiidjtg,  n)ag  er  ntd^t  aug 
fid)  felber  ^aben  fonnte.^  4.  grgti^le  ntir  benn  9IGc§  imb  i^ 
njerbe  \ax^  ^elfen,  fo  Ujeit  tc^  e^^  mtt  meinen  fc^n^a^en  ^rdften 
t)ermag.  5»  @eben  Sie  mir  -Slire  §anb.  6.  SBer  bei|  , 
SiUen  t^ut  mcine^  33ater§  im*  .g)immel,  berfelbe  tft  mein"^ 
Sruben  7.  S^  njar  einmal  etr.c  grau,  bte  cin  etn^tge^ 
Jiiditer^ett  ^atte.  8.  „2Ber  ift  ba?''  frogte  er.  „3d)  bin 
c^/'  anttnortete  ble  ^oiiigtn.  9.  (Sein  Sti^terftu^I  tft  ttic^t 
ber  meine.  10.  2)er  g^roft  bringt  mir  burd^  ade  ^no^en* 
11.  ®er  ift  eg  ;  \i^^  ift  er  ;  ber  rettete  bie  ^onigin.  12,  J)ag 
hjar  cine  crfd}rcdUc^c  ^a^rt.  13.  SSelc^er  ift  eg,  ben  \iyx  om 
nteiften  liebft?  14.  ^u  mem  ttjollen^  ®ie?  15.  aSag  ^abe 
idft  ^ier  ?  16.  9Bag  fiir  93erge,  fiir  SBiiften,  itiag  fitr  ©tronie 
trennen  ung?  17.  (Sie  fa^  fid)  nun  mit  bem  aSanne  Der^^ 
bunben,  beffen  Siebe  nnb  Sreuc  fte  fannte,  bem  fte  torn 
v^er^en  guget^an  tt)ar.  18.  S^ofier  n)ir  fommen  nnb  n)ol)in 
WAX  gel^en,  iuiffen  xm  nid)t.  19.  SBer  51  fagt,  mu^  and) 
93  fagen.      20.   gg   ift  nnr  ging,  'xq^^  nng  retten  fann. 

21.  ^ti::^^    tragen    bie    Sa^re,    Ujorauf    ber  (garg    fte^t. 

22.  SBenn  man  anf  bem  g^nfterbrette  fa^,  fa]&  man  nnr 
ein  ©tiidc^en  blanen^  §immelg.  23.  9Kan  ift  nie,  tno  man 
fein  foU.  24.  2J?an(^  bnnte  Slnmen  finb  an  bem  ©tranb. 
25.  3d)  !onnte  ibm  rcd)t  uiel  «ofeg  bafiir  t^nn.  26.  (Sg 
foftete  mi^  gar  nid^tg. 

» might.    2184.    3146.    <^^.    m56. 


5.     NUMEEALS. 

1.  gjnr  ber  erjlc  ©d)ritt  ift  eg,  ber  ba'  foftet.  2.  gin  ?eib, 
ein  §erg  nnb  eine  ©eele!  3.  !Dag  "Qwi]  \)^i  eine  gtneite, 
bann  eine  britte,  —  je^t  fogar  fd)on  eine  gtnolfte  9lnf(age 
crlebt.  4.  S)iefe  ®ame  I}at  einen  Ol^rring  tjon  nngcfdt}r 
3,400  Scaler  SSert^  t)erloren.  5.  !J)er  dltere  ber  beibcn 
Scanner  ()atte  67  2:^aler  in  ber  %o!\^tf  ber  jiingere  njar  nur 

J  Omit  ba  in  translating. 


\ 


SELECTED   SENTENCES.  109 

mit  10  t)erfe^en.  6,  3lm  20tett  ^ebruar  1870,  gegeit  11  U^r 
be^  MtnH,  ftarb  ber  groge  §elb»  7.  2)ie  (egte  3lu^gat:e 
ber  2Ber!e  t)on  ©driller  ift  in  ^\vol\  Sdnben  erfd^ienen  nnb 
jeber  Sanb  ^at  ungefd^r  400  m  500  Setten.  8.  ^eitet 
fieben  Sag  unb  fieben  9^arf)t-  9,  -3(^  gebe  iebem  breigig 
3l(fer  Janbe^,  10,  J)ie  eine  itjiU  fi^  J)on  ber  anberen 
trennett.  11.  21m  6ten  3fuU  1630  lanbete  ©uftat)  Slbolp^ 
mit  13,000  Wlam. 

6.  VEEBS  OF  OLD  AND  NEW  CONJUGATION. 

1.  Sr  ge^t,  !ommt,  entfernt  [id),  uttb  Commt  njteber. 
2.  ©aul  ging  au^,  felne^  SSater^  (SfeUitncn  311  fud^en/  unb 
fanb  ein  ^onigreic^.  3.  ©ud)e  immer  ben  l^o^ern  ©tanb^ 
))un!t,  unter  iwelcfiem  alle  !(eine  ?etben  unb  greuben  t)n^ 
fdj^inben.  4.  2HIe  2lengftUc^!eit  fommt  t)om  Seufet,  ber 
9Kut§  unb  bte  greubigfeit  fommt  Don  ®ott.  5.  S6)  ^be 
genoffen  ^a^  trbifdje  ©(iicf;  idi  ^be  gelebt  unb  geliebet. 
6.  JJSa^  bu  gelernt,''  begleitet  hid)  geitleben^,  n)oI)in  bu  ge^ft, 
unb  gibt  bir  neue  ©inne  flir  hit  2!Bc(t.  7.  %Ue^  ift  fo 
gefommen,  mie  i^  t)orau^  gefagt  tjobt.  8,  9Wan  preift  ben 
bramatifdE)en  S)irf)ter,  ber  e^  tjerfte^t,  S^rdnen  gu  ent:= 
loden.  ©ie^  Salent  fjat  auc^  bie  fummerlid^fte  ^^i^bel; 
mit  biefer  t^eilt  er  feinen  9tu^m.  9.  2lu^  lauter  fleinen 
Singen  befte^t  ha^  ?eben.  3)arum  njarte  nid^t  mit  beiner 
.  aiBei^^eit  bi^  groge  2)inge  mit  "^ofaunen  fommen ;  an  jebe^ 


ndia,    2  205ft. 


7.    MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

1.  2Ba^  man  twttt,  ha^  tann  man.  Sei  bem  9Kenfd^en  ifl 
lein  ^ing  unmoglirf).  2.  SBa^  foil  au^  mir  n)erben,  tuenn 
bu  ni^t  me^r  ba  bift?  3.  ©ie  foH  eine  it^unberlic^e  *iPerfon 
fein ;  ba^  fiel^t^  man  il^r  gleid^  an.^  4.  ®ut,  ha^  id)  @ie 
treffe.  Sd)  tooUk  eben  gu  3^nen,  um  ®ie  um  eine  !(eine 
©efdtKigfeit  ju  bitten.^    5.  ®ie  9)ienf^en  lieben  temen/  ba^ 


110  SELECTED   SENTENCES. 

ift  ha^  ein^tgc  ma^re  ©liirf.  6»  9Kein  Ungliid  foKf  eud^ 
I)eiU9  fein,  n^enn  e^^  tnetn  !onic|Iid)e^  §aupt  ntc^t  x\t  1.  SBer 
recf)t  xot\%,  \m^  t)or  uufercr  ^^it  gefdje^en  ift,  tt)trb  aud)  fiir 
unferc  2>^iX  ben  beften  9tat^  gebeu  lounen.  8.  3^d)  !anu  unb 
Ujlil  e§  Icinger  nid)t  bulben,  9.  ©an^  geiut^  it)irb  fie  ben 
5Waior  ntd)t  l^aben  begaljlen  fonnen.  10.  ^etg'  mi^  nid)t 
rcben,  ^^tf^'  mt^  fditneigen.  11.  ^erad)tung  \jCiV  \6)  me 
ertragen  fonnen.  12.  3^  mod)te  gern  arm  fein.  13.  ^Da^ 
ntoc^te  ber  Saunt  gar  nld}t  l^oren.  14  -3c^  barf  faum 
l^offen,  ba^  ©ie  mir^  tergeben  fonnen. 

1875.    2  184. 


8.    PASSIVE,  IMPERSONAL,  AND  REFLEXIVE 
VERBS. 

1.  aSBi^t  t^r  m6)\.f  iDO^^tn  fte  gefu^rt  njurben  ?  ©eib  il)r 
f^nen^  ni^t  begegnet?  2.  gr  iDurbe  auf  \iCi^.  fd)dnbnd)fte 
tnipanbelt.  3.  ®urd)  ^oxw  nnb  !Oeibenfc^aft  mirb  nod)  gar 
nic^tg  get^an ;  nnr  burd)  feften,  ^eUen  gntfd)(ug.  4.  5)ann 
iDar  feine  @nabe ;  fie  mngten  nieberfnieen  nnb  hoi^  ^aupt 
njarb  i^nen^  abgefc^Iagen.  5.  aRot)amnteb  ttjnrbe  nm§  3a()r 
570  3n  9}Je!!a  geboren.  6.  2)e^l}alb  mnnberten  nnb  frenten 
fie  fid)  fe^r  iiber  bie  fd)onen  ^epfel.  7.  ®er  fed)fte  Sag 
ber  (Sc^opfnng  neigte  fi^  gn  feinem  gnbe.  8.  2)a  offnet  fi^ 
be^enb  ein  gnjeite^  Slior.  9.  g^  (}age(te  fd)mer.  10.  g§ 
gtbt  !etn  fo  ^art^er^ige^  ®efd}opf,  n)ie  ein  Cramer.  11.  6^ 
n^ar  nttr,  a(§  lebten  njir  aHe  no(^.  12.  grge^f  ^  end)  n)0]^(, 
fo  benft  an  mid).  13.  SSie  me^  n)irb  mir;  irie  brennt  meine 
alte  SSnnbe !  14.  g^  ging  adeS  gang  t)ortrefffid^.  15.  Sief 
banert  mid)  ener.    16.  ®egen  ^benb  marb  nad)  t^m  gefragt. 

17.  @g  lo^nt  fid)  nid)t  gn  dnbern,  mo  man  nid)t  beffern  !ann. 

18.  9tOe  9Kenfd)en  merben  in  il)ren  §offnnngen  getdnfd^t,  in 
i^ren  grn)artnngen  betrogen. 

1184.    2  826.    3  90, 


SELECTED   SENTENCES.  Ill 

9.    COMPOUND  \rEEBS,  SEPARABLE  AND 
INSEPAEABLE. 

1,  Sin  g^rember  !e()rte  trt  ha§  2Birt^§f)au^  eitt,  um  ha  ^u 
ubernad]ten.^  2.  !Die  (2d)ulb  ift  Don  bem  3Serbred]er  ehi^ 
geftanben  unb  befannt  n)orben»  3.  gr  ftimmte  btefer  Senier* 
fung  frdftig  beu  4,  SSon  btejen  9?ofeu  loin  tc^  bir  hk  aUcx^ 
fdjonften^  au^fuc^en*  5,  S)ie  *ipoft  ift  t)or  etner  ©tunbe 
angebmmen  unh  ber  23rteftrdger  ^t  bie  33riefe  fd]on  au5^ 
getragen,  6,  Wan  !ann  ein  ©ebid^t  au§  einer  ®)3rad^e  hi^ 
cine  anbere  iiberfci^en,  aber  e^  ift  unmoglic^  ben  ®eift  be^ 
©ebic^te^  gci«3ti<^  ^w  iibertragen.  7.  aSBenn  einer  mitten  im 
®d)reiben*  auf{)ort,  fo  ift  e^  il^m  fd)mer^  ben  %ahen  be^ 
©ebanfen^  tnieber  anf^ngreifen»  8.  -Stage  nid)t  nm  ba^  \va^ 
bir  @ott  ent^ie^t*  9.  !Der  9Konb  ging  anf  unb  \>a^  ^eer  ber 
©terne  trat  ^ert)or  in  t)eiterem  ©(an^e. 


I 


1197a.     2  82d    3  175^    4193^ 


10.     SPECL^L   USES   OF   THE   FORMS   OF 
DECLENSION. 


1.  gernanbo  ernjartete  bc§  frol^en  Slugenblide^.  2.  ®ott 
crbarme^  fic^  be^  Sanbc^  I  3.  gr  ad^tete  nic^t  ber  lx)armen 
©onne  unb  ber  frtfc^en  Suft.  4.  3d^  fc^dnte  nti^  ber  Uner=^ 
fat)ren]^ett  unb  meiner  -Sugenb  nid^t.  5.  Dttilie  erinnertc 
fid)  iebe^  3Sorte^,  \va^  gefprodjen  ioarb.  6.  gr  fe^te  trau== 
rig  en  ^ergen^  feinen  SBeg  fort  unb  fud^te  tveiter  feineg 
SD^enfdjen  ©efeUfc^aft.  7,  (Sine^  Jage^  tm  Jen^e  fag 
©alomo  ber  -Sungling  unter  ben  '^almen  im  ©arten  feinc^ 
SSater^.  8.  ©em  9?ad)ften  mug  man  ^elfen.  9,  2)ein  ^ater 
bient  bem  Sonige.  10.  ©ie  ©ebitbe  ber  9?ad^t  n)eid)en  bem 
tagenben'^  ?id)t.  11.  SReifter  So^nn,  le^re  t^m  au6)  bie  bei^ 
ben  anberen  fd)onen  Siinfte.  12.  9J?ad)e  nid^t  fc^neH  jemanb 
beinen  greunb.  13.  !5)er  3^^^9  ^^^  S^itm  mad)te  mid)  ^u 
il)rem  ©egner.  14.  33in  id^  bie  ritterli^en  ?fttd)k  nid)t 
n)ert^?    15.  (Sr  rebete  ben  gangen  %benb  unb  ben  anberen 

11915.     2  199. 


112  SELECTED  SENTENCES. 

ixJcotgen  fein  aSSort  mit  t^m.  16,  ®er  ^ouig  unb  ble  jungc 
Sonigin  tebten  in  Suft  unb  g^reube  ein  gan^e^  -Sa^r  lang, 
17.  &  regnete  ben  gangen  Sag.  18.  S)iefe^  gefagt,  ent== 
bto^te  ber  rebltd^e  SSater  bie  ©d^eiteL 


[,    SPECIAL  USES  OF  THE  FOEMSJ^F  QON- 

JUGATION^  ^^    4^'^"    '^^^^ 
1.  Unb  tDte  er  fi^t  unb  njie  er  taufc^t,  t^eitffid^  bte  g^tut^  ^^^ 

^^^;4*|iB^^or.    2.  -3e^t  (a§  mtc^  (o^,  tc^  !omme  balb  gurutf.    3.  (Sie 
fatten  !eine  gurc^t  t>or  §eino,  bcnn   fie  fannten  i^n  fcfjon 
longe.    4  ,,S^  njirb  n)ol)(  ®e(b   im  goffer  fein/'  badjten    ■  -. 
bie  Seute.    6.  SKit  fonigltc^en  ©ittern  fe^e  bid)  bie  ©ottin!"'^-* 
^    6.  ^citte  ic^  bid)  fru()ei:  fo  gered)t  erfannt,  e^  njcire  2$iele^ 

*'^'''  '  ungefd^e^en  geblieben.  7.  SBa^  n^dre  au^  ntir  gen)orben, 
battel  i^r  mic^  ntd^t  aufgenommen?  8.  ®(ud(id)er  ujdre 
and)  id),  njenn  ic^  nad)  2lfien  gegogen  iDdre.  9.  g§  ^ieg, 
er  t)erlange  ni^t  gu  tniffen,  ob  er  e^  biirfe,  fonbern  ob  er  e^ 
miiffe.  10.  „%i)/'  feuf^te  grin,  „ba^  bu  eine  ©terbnd)e 
iDdreft,  ober  bag  tc^  njcire  trie  bu !''  11.  311^  er  merfte,  ba^ 
er  ein  SKo^r  njttr,  fagte  er,  er  fei  ein  t)orne^mer  §err  unb 
UJoUe  i^n  in  feinen  ©ienft  ne^men.  Sr  foUe  nid)t^  me  iter 
gu  t^un  befontmen^  al^  l^inten  auf  feinem  SBagen  gu  fteljen, 
ttjenn  er  mit  feiner  g^rau  fpa,^ieren  fii^re,  bamit  man  gleid) 
fdt}e,  ha^  t>ornel)mc  ?eute  !dmen.  12.  £),  ha^  fie  etrig 
griinen^  bliebe,  bie  fd^one  ^txt  ber  iungcn  Siebe ! 

1196. 


12.    INFINITIVES  AND  PARTICIPLES. 

1.  O  n)ad)fen,  n)adj[en,  grog  unb  aii  n^erben,  ba6  tft  bodft 
ba§  ein^ige  ©d)one  in  biefer  S5e(t,  ba^te  ber  Saum.  2.  S)a 
merfte  bie  g^rau  tooljl,  bag  ba«  93etle(n  fd)mer  fei.  3.  3c^ 
mag  unb  mitt  nic^t  glauben,  \>a^  mid)  ber  Wta^  t)er!affen 
!ann.  4.  SBa^  gelten  fott,  mug  merfen  unb  mug  bienen. 
5.  ®d)nett  mirft  bu  bie  ?tot^menbig!eit  t)erfd^minben,  unb 
ated^t  unb  Unred^t  fic^  t)ertt)anbetn  fel^en.     6.  -Sd^  mitt  nid^t 


SELECTED   SENTENCES.  113 

cinen  9);enfci)eu,  an  beffen  @d)utb  id)  md)t  glaube,  Mtett 
33lute6  tobten  (affen,  7.  S6)  mu^  betteln  ^e^en ;  ber  liebc 
@ott  mU  e^  fo  tjabcn.  8.  55or  feincm  Sobe  ift  D^iemanb 
gludlid)  gu  preifen.  9»  g5  ift  bem  9}?eufd^en  ieid)ter  unb 
gelciufiger  ^u  fd)meirf)eln  al^  p  (oben.  10.  ^er  ^ettel  pel, 
o^ne  t)on  i^m  bemertt  ^u  itjerben,  auf  ben  Soben.  11.  £), 
Wave  id)  bod)  au(^  grog  genug,  urn  iiber  ba^  aj^eer  ^infa^ren 
gn  fonnen!  12.  50?it  grower  iJreube  empfing  ber  fiegenbe 
^aifer  feinen  ftcgenben  ©ol^n.  13.  @r  glaubte  in  feinem 
?eben  nid)t§  rei^enbere^  gefe^en  gn  l^aben  a(^  i^r  l^tb  t)er:= 
iuunberte^,  f)alb  Idd^elnbe^,  t)on  bem  2}torgenrot^  rofig 
(Tttendjtete^,  feine^  ©eftd^t^em  14.  3)er  alte  9Kantt  fa^ 
fopffc^nttetnb  t)or  fid^  nieber,  15.  ^n  einen  i^nieig  ^angten 
fit  !(eine  %elje,  au^gef^nitten  an§  farbigem  "SPa^ier.  16.  Slu^ 
feiner  |)of)'  fommt  ba^  leid^te  9te^  in§  tiefc  ®ra^  ge^ 
fprnngen. 


VOCABULARY. 

GERMAN-ENGLISH. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


accus.  accusative. 

adj.  adjective. 

adv.  adverb. 

art.  article. 

conj.  conjunction. 

dat  dative. 

dem.  demonstrative. 

ex,  exercise. 

/.  feminine  noun. 

impers.  impersonal. 

indech  indeclinable. 

interrog.  interrogative. 

ii'^reg,  irregular. 

m.  masculine  noun. 


n,  neuter  noun. 
N.  New  conjugation. 
num.  numeral. 
0.  Old  conjugation. 
pers.  personal. 
pi.  plural. 
poss.  possessive. 
ppl.  past  participle. 
prep,  preposition. 
pron.  pronoun. 
reflex,  reflexive. 
rel.  relative. 
V,  verb. 


EXPLANA  TIONS, 

Verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  and  of  the  New  if  irregu- 
lar, are  so  noted  (by  an  added  0. ,  or  iV.  irreg. ,  respectively). 
Their  forms  are  to  be  sought  in  the  List  of  Irregular  Verbs. 
Verbs  taking  feiit  as  auxiliary  have  an  f  added  after  them. 

Nouns  have  the  sign  of  their  gender  appended,  and  the  end- 
ings of  their  genitive  singular  (except  of  f eminines)  and  nomi- 
native plural. 

Adverbs  in  -ly  derived  from  adjectives  and  having  the  same 
form  as  the  adjectives  (79)  are  not  separately  entered. 

Figures  in  parentheses  refer  to  the  Grammar. 


%16 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


^bmb,  m.  ;b8,  sbc.  evening. 

nbcr,  conj.  but. 

ah f aflat,  v.  O.  I  fall  off,  fall  down. 

abveiicn,  v.  iV.  f.  journey  away. 

abid^laQcn,  v.  O.  refuse. 

abidyveibcn,  v.  0.  copy. 

abi^Ubcn,  v.  0.  draw  off,  take  off. 

ad) !  ah  !  alas ! 

adyten,  v.  iVi  prize,  notice. 

Slrfer,  m.  sx%,  2tccfer.  cultivated 
field,  tilled  land,  acre. 

mibrcd)t,  Albert. 

an,  pron.  and  adj.  all,  entire,  or 
every,  each;  attcS,  everything, 
all. 

allem,  adv.  alone. 

aXlQtmtin,  adj.  general. 

ali,  conj.  as,  than. 

ait,  adj.  old. 

am  =  on  bcm. 

filter  if  a,  America. 

an,  prep,  at,  on,  in. 

attber,  adj.  other,  else. 

anbertt,  v.  N.  change,  alter. 

anfangctt,  v.  0.  begin. 

anfangd,  adv.  in  the  beginning. 

awQaxtbrn,  adj.  pleasant. 

^ettgftltc^fett,/  anxiety,  timidity. 

anfletbett,  v.  N.  put  clothes  upon, 
clothe,  dress. 

anf ommett,  v.  0.  f.  to  arrive. 

anfelien,  v.  O.  look  at ;  {loith  accus. 
and  dat. )  see  to  belong  to,  per- 
ceive in. 

a\\HaU,prep.  instead. 

anttvorten,  v.  N.  answer. 

anoertraucn,  v.  N.  confide. 

att)tef)cn,  v.  0.  draw  on,  put  on. 

5lpfel,  m.  A%,  3tepfel.  apple. 

^npfelbdum,  m.  ^meg,  sdume.  apple- 
tree. 

^ragoniett,  Aragon. 

arbettett,  v.  N.  work. 

arm,  adj.  poor. 

arttg,  adj.  good,  obedient. 

^ften,  Asia. 

aud),  conj.  or  adv.  also,  too. 

aui,  prep,  upon,  on. 

aufcrflebcn,  v.  0.  f.  rise  up,  rise 
from  the  dead. 

^ufgabe,/.  sbcn.  task. 

aufqebcn,  v.  O.  f.  go  up,  rise. 

auiaviifm,  v.  0.  pick  up^  seize. 


aufl^ebett,  t\  0.  lift  up,  put  an  end 

to. 
atifborcn,  v.  iV!  stop. 
fHu^age,/.  sgen.  edition: 
anfnef)tnen,  v.  O.  take  up. 
auiiicbcn,  v.  0.  f.  get  up,  rise. 
Sluge,  n.   =geg,  ^gen.  eye. 
Slugenblict,  m.  =fg,  =fe.  instant. 
aud,  prep,  or  adv.  out  of,  from, 

away  from. 
audgct^ett,  v.  0.  j.  go  out. 
attdfd)neit>en,  v.  O.  cut  out. 
audfe^ett,  v,  O,  look,  appear.     * 
ait^erbem,  adv.  moreover. 
aii^erbalb,j9rej9.  outside  of.  • 

avifitvit,  adj.  uttermost,  extreme. 
audfpred)eti,  v.  O.  pronounce. 
audfuci^en,  v.  N.  pick  out,  choose, 
audtragen,  v.  O.  carry  out. 
audtoeic^ett,  v.  0.  f.  avoid. 

33a^rc,/.  cren.  bier. 

balb,  a^v.  soon. 

^ant,  ].  n.  ?bc8,  sbc.  bond,  tie;  2. 

n.    =be8,   sanber.   ribbon ;  3.   m, 

sbeS,  sanbc.  volume. 
SBanf,/.  sanfe.  bench. 
^aum,  m.  smc§,  sdume.  tree. 
befe^Ien, «;.  O.  command,  order, 
begegnen,  w.  AT.  f.  meet. 
begletten, «.  AT.  accompany. 
bcgrti^en,  v.  A^  greet. 
bel)anbeln,  v.  N.  handle,  treat. 
btbtvib,  adj.  adroit,  nimble. 
btifprep.  by,  with, 
bcibc,  adj.  both, 
betfltmmett,  v.  N.  agree. 
befennen,  v.  -N.  irreg.  confess. 
bcfommen,  v.  O.  get,  obtain. 
bclcud)tcn,  i^.  N.  light. 
bemcrfcn,  v.  A^.  remark,  observe. 
aSemcrf ung, /.  =gen.  remark. 
35crg,  m.  sge§,  =ge.  mountain. 
bt^dyaiti^t,  adj.  busy. 
bcffer,  sec  gut. 

beffcrti,  v.  N.  to  better,  improve; 
be#,  see  gut. 

befiteben,  i;.  0.  persist,  consist. 
betrtigeit,  v.  0.  deceive,  betray. 
35ett,  n.  -Am,  =tten.  bed. 
betteln,  v.  A^  beg. 
bemunbem,  v.  N.  admire. 
bt^abUn,  v.  N.  pay. 


GEHMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


117* 


fSicr,  n.  steS.  beer. 

S3ilb,  n.  =be§,  =ber.  picture. 

btI^en,  V.  N.  form,  make. 

bill,  from  fein,  am. 

hixxmn^prep.  within. 

hii,  prep,  or  cojij.  tilTj  until. 

93ittc,  /  sten,  request. 

hittm,  V.  0.  beg,  implore. 

^iatt,  71.  stteS,  sdtter.  leaf. 

blati,  ac/;.  blue. 

hUihtw,  V.  O.  f.  remain. 

hXint,  adj.  blind. 

hin^^tn,  V.  N.  bloom. 

astume,/.  stnen.  flower. 

fbiixmUin,  n.  =n8,  =n.  little  flower. 

©hit,  71.  steS.  blood. 

aSliitljc,/.  st^en.  blossom. 

©obett,  m.  ;n6.  floor,  ground. 

©oilmen,  Bohemia. 

brentten,  v.  iV.  ir>v^.  bum. 

©ricf,  m.  s|*§,  ;fe.  letter,  epistle. 

Sricftragcr,  m.  =r8,  sr.  letter-car- 
rier. 

brtngen,  v.  iV!  irreg.  bring,  car- 
ry. 

SBrob,  n.  =bc8,  sBbe.  bread. 

SJriibcr,  m.  st8,  suber.  brother. 

SBud),  71.  5c^e3,  sucker,  book. 

bunt,  adj.  gay,  bright. 

S3uttciv/.  butter. 

<5I)olcra,/.  cholera. 

bfl,    «dy.    or   coTij.    there,    then; 

when,  since. 
baburc^,  adv.    therethrough,    by 

that  means. 
®amc,/.  =men,  lady. 
bamit,  adv.    or  co7ij.   therewith, 

with  it  or  that,  in  order  that. 
banfen,  v.  N.  thank. 
^ann,  adv.  then,  at  that  time. 
barait,  adv.  thereon,  at  or  on  it 

or  them. 
fcarawf,  adv.  thereupon,  upon  or 

on  it  or  them. 
bariibcr,  adv.  thereover,  above  or 

about  it  or  them. 
barum,  adv.    thereabout,    there- 
fore. 
baft,  coTij.  that,  so  that ;   ba^  .  .  . 

nld)t,  lest. 
bauern,  v.  N.  last,  endure. 


ba»or,  adv.  before  or  in  front  of 
or  because  of  it  or  them. 

ttin,  poss.  adj.  thy,  thine. 

bertfcit,  V.  JV.  irreg.  think.  * 

bcntt,  coTij.  or  adv.  then,  for. 

ber,  tic,  ba^,  1.  demoTist.  pron. 
and  adj.  this,  this  one,  that, 
that  one  ;  as  emphatic  pe7's. 
pron.  he,  she,  it ;  3.  def.  art. 
the ;  3.  rel.  pron.  who,  which, 
that. 

tcvicnxQtf  adj.  and  pron.  that  or 
that  one,  those. 

berfelbe,  adj.  and  pron.  the  self- 
same or  same,  he,  she,  it. 

beMyaib,  adv.  or  conj.  on  that  ac- 
count, therefore. 

bcutfd),  adj.  German;  (Deutfc^,  n. 
German  language ;  ©eutfc^er, 
adj.  as  7ioun.  a  German. 

i5)eutfd)lanb,  7i.  ;b8..  Germany. 

'i^idyitv,  m.  =r3,  ;r.  poet. 

bicnen,  v.  N.  serve. 

^ienft,  m..  steg,  stc.   service. 

tk^  (biefer,  bic^e,  biefeS),  dem.  adj. 
orpi'on.  this  or  that,  this  one 
or  that  one. 

!^tn9,  n.  sgeS,  =gc.  thing. 

bod),  adv.  or  conj.  though,  yet, 
nevertheless ;  surely. 

!$)om,  7n.  sttieS,  smc.  cathedral. 

bort,  adv.  there,  yonder. 

bramattfd),  adj.  dramatic. 

brci,  num.  three. 

bringcn,  v.  O.  f.  or^.  press,  throng. 

bii,  pe7's.  pron.  thou. 

bufti^,  adj.  fragrant. 

btiibeit,  V.  iY.  bear,  endure. 

buvd),  p7'ep.  through. 

burc^brtngcii,  v.  O.  (sep.)  press 
through,  pierce,  penetrate  ;  {in- 
Sep.)  penetrate,  permeate,  per- 
vade. 

biirfcn,  v.  N".  i7'reg.  be  allowed, 
feel  authorized ;  sometimes  rew 
dered  by  may  or  might. 

15)urfi,  m.  steS.    thirst. 

ebett,  adv.  even,  just,  exactly. 
cf)Vtn,  V.  N.  honor. 
citi,  n7tm>.  one ;  indef  art.  a,  an- 
etn^eftelictt,  v.  O.  confess,  own. 
t\n\)oUn,  V.  N.  overtake. 


118 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


tiniQ,  adj.  one,  united ;  pi.  einigc, 
some,  a  few. 

tinUi)rcn,  v.  JV.  f.  turn  in,  enter. 

einlaben,  v.  O.  invite. 

etitmal,  adv.  once,  one  time. 

tmi^,  adj.  only. 

cmpfattQcn,  v.  0.  receive,  take,  ac- 
cept. 

tmpfel)Un,  v.  O.  recommend. 

empor,  adv.  upward. 

(Snbe,  n.  sbeS,  sfcen.  end. 

enMid),  ad?j.  at  last. 

^ftgcl,  m.  sig,  ;I»  angel. 

tntblo^at,  V.  N.  bare,  lay  bare. 

entbecfen,  v.  JV.  discover,  disclose. 

cntfevncn,v.  N.  remove,  put  far  off. 

entf[tel)cii,  v.  0,  f.  fly,  escape. 

enti)altett,  v.  O.  contain. 

eiitlocfcii,  V.  JV.  entice  away,  draw 
away. 

@ntfd)Iu^,  m.   sffeS,   siiffe.  resolu- 
tion, determination. 

entwcbcr,  conj.  either. 

entjikl)cn,  v.  O.  take  away. 

tv,  pers.pron.  he. 

erbarmett,  v.  iV.  reflex,  pity,  have 
mercy  on. 

@rbc,  m.  sBc§,  sSen.  heir. 

erbltcfen,  v.  JV.  catch  sight  of,  de- 
scry. 

@rbe,/.  sben.  earth,  ground. 

<r^cnFcll,  v.  JV.  think  out,  invent. 

cvQC^cn,  V.   O.  \.  happen,  go  on, 
fare. 
"  ertttnern,  v.  JV.  reflex,  remember. 
^tvfetincn,    v.  N'.    irreg.   perceive, 
recognize. 

crfttngctt,  v.  0.  f.  sound  forth. 

erlcbett,  v.  JV.  live  through,  experi- 
ence. 

(rnenncn,  v.  iV".   in^eg.    appoint, 
name. 

tvidyattcn,  v.  JV.  f.  resound. 
-crfd)cincn,  v.  0.  j.  appear,  seem. 
-  erfdjrccf Hd),  adj.  frightful. 

evft,  adj.  and  adv.  first. 
-ertragen,  v.  0.  bear,  endure. 

-crtDartcn,  v.  JV.  await. 

-©rwartung,/  sgen.  expectation. 

er^ablen,  v.  iVi  tell,  recount. 

©rjiebuiig,/.  education. 

cd,  pron.  it. 

&ie{in,  f.  slnnen.  she-ass. 


ctwa,  adv.  about,  nearly. 

^mai,  indef.   pron.    something, 

somewhat. 
ctoig,  adj.  eternal. 

^atcn,  m.  ?n§,  sdben.  thread. 

fabrcn,  v.  0.  f.  or  ^.  go,  move, 
drive. 

^af)vt,f.  ikn.  passage,  journey. 

falfd),  adj.  false. 

mUn,  v.  0.  f.  fall. 

farbtg,  adj.  colored. 

^a%,  n.  sf[cg,  saffer.  vat,  barrel. 

fau\,ad^.  lazy. 

^tbvuar,  m.  stS.  February. 

fcin,  adj.  fine,  not  coarse. 

^cniicv,  n.  srS,  =r.  -vlfcdow. 

i?enfJerbrctt,  n.  cttS,  sttcr.  window- 
sill. 

fcfl,  adj.  firm. 

^efitag,  m.  sgc§,  sgc.  festival,  feast 
day. 

ftnbcn,  V.  0.  find. 

fJIafdK,/.  =j^en.  bottle. 

flet^ig,  adj.  industrious. 

flicQcn,  V.  0.  \.  or  ^.  fly. 

flitd)tcu,  V.  JV.  fly,  escape  ;  reflex. 
run  away,  take  flight. 

^(u#,  m.  »fye§,  ufte.  river. 

3'lut^,/.  st^en.  flood,  water. 

folgctt,  V.  iV.  f.  follow. 

forbern,  v.  JV.  demand. 

^ovm,f.  smen.  form. 

fort,  adv.  forth,  onward,  away. 

fortait,  adv.  henceforth. 

fortfc^cn,  V.  JV.  continue. 

fragctt,  v.  N'.  ask. 

fraw^ofifd),  adj.  French  :  '^^xans 
jofifc^,  n.  the  French  language. 

%rau,f.  ?aucn.  woman,  wife. 

fretgebtg,  adj.  liberal 

frcmb,  adj.  strange. 

ffreubc,/.  =ben.  joy. 

^rcubigfcit,/.  joyousness. 

frcucn,  V.  N'.  reflex,  rejoice,  be 
glad. 

fjrcunb,  m.  sbe§,  sbc.  friend. 

freunbltd),  adj.  friendly. 

»5fricbc,  m.  sbenS,  sben.  peace. 

^rtebrid),  Frederick. 

frifd),  adj.  fresh. 

frob»  <^dj.  happy,  cheerful. 

fromm,  adj.  pious. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABTJLAEY. 


119 


^voii,  m.  5te§,  ste.  frost. 

^rud)t,/.  =uc^te.  fruit. 
^frucl)tbar,  adj.  fruitful. 

fvitl),  adj.  early. 

Sfrii^ialjr,  ?i.  =rS,  sre.  spring. 
-  fu!)reii,t;.  iV.  carry,  conduct,  guide. 

??iii) rcr,  ??2.  =r§,  =r.  guide.  '^ 

fiinf,  num.  five. 

HiVfprep.  for. 

?5'iird)t,/.  fear,  terror. 

fiird)ten,  v.  iV!  fear ;  reflex,  be 
afraid  of. 

iJu^boben,  m.  5n§.  floor. 

gnitj,  afZj.  whole,  entire. 

9an$(id),  adj.  |^tal,  complete. 

gar,  ar/w.  quite,  entirely. 

®avtcn,  m.  =n§,  sarten.  garden. 

©affc,/.  :^en.  lane,  street. 

Qzbdvcn,  V.  O.  bear,  bring  forth. 

Qcben,  V.  0.  give. 

Qebc,f?'o/a  geben,  give. 

(Scbilb,  71.  ^beS,  ste.  thing  built, 
image. 

®ebtrg,  n.  sge^,  sge.  mountain 
range  or  mass. 

geborcn,/rom  gebdren. 

©ebattfe,  m.  sen^,  =en.  thought. 

Qctcilycn,  v.  0.  f.  thrive,  prosper. 

®ctid)t,  n.  5te3,  ste.  poem. 

gefanen,  v.  0.  please,  suit. 

©cfalligfctt,/.  =ten.  courtesy. 

QeQax,p7'ep.  against,  opposed  to, 
toward. 

QCQeniibcv,  adv.  opposite. 

gegenmarttg,  adj.  present. 

©cgncr,  m.  sr§,  sr.  opponent. 

Qcben,  V.  O.  \.  go,  walk. 

©eiftf  ^^.  =te8,  stcr.  spirit,  mind. 

getfttg,  ttcZy.  spiritual,  mental. 

^ti^i^,  adj.  avaricious,  greedy. 

geliiuft^,  adj.  ready,  flowing, 
easy. 

Oclb,  n.  sbeS,  sbct.  money. 

geHiidCtt,  V.  O.  imxyers.  f.  prove 
successful,  turn  out  well. 

gelteti,  ^'.  O.  have  value,  be  rec- 
ognized as  worth. 

gcmag,  prep,  conformably  to,  ac- 
cording to. 

genic^en,  v.  O.  enjoy. 

gettug,  adv.  enough,  sufficient. 

gcrcc^t,  adj.  righteous. 


gem,  adv.  with  pleasure,  gladly, 
willingly. 

©efaitg,  m.  sg3,  cangc.  singing, 
song. 

gcfdKl)en,  V.  0.  f.  happen,  occur, 
take  place. 

©cfd)enF,  n.  =feS,  =fc.  gift. 

■®efd)6pf,  n.  ?pfc§,  pfc.  creature. 

©cfcllfdjaft, /.  s ten.  company,  so- 
ciety. 

®cfid)td)^it,  w.  =n§,  =n.  little  face. 

gcftcrtt,  adv.  yesterday. 

©ctraitF,  ?i.  sfeg,  sfe.  drink,  bever- 
age. 

gcmi^,  adj.  sure,  certain. 

gibft,/rom  gcIJen,  givest. 

o^ibt,  from  geben,  gives. 

^lanj,  m.  sjeS.  radiance,  bright- 
ness. 

®\<x^,  n.  :^\^%,  safer,  glass. 

glauben,  v.  iVC  believe. 

gfetd),  adj.  like,  similar. 

®W<f,  n.  sfe8.  happiness,  good 
fortune,  luck. 

glitdP ltd),  ac?;.  fortunate,  happy. 

(^natCff.  sen.  grace,  favor. 

®oIb,  n.  =be§.  gold. 

gulbcn,  ttfZ/.  golden. 

®ott,  m.  4te§,  setter.  God. 

®oitin,f.  sinnen.  goddess. 

dJraf,  m.  sen,  sen.  count,  earl. 

®raf^'n,/.  sinnen.  countess. 

©ra^,  n.  sfeg,  safer,  grass. 

gro^,  adj.  great,  large,  big. 

©ro^muttcr,  /.  siitter.  grand- 
mother. 

grun,  adj.  green. 

grtinctt,  v.  N.  grow  green,  be  green. 

griifjcn,  v.  N.  greet,  salute. 

gut,  adj.  good;  cornp.  beffer,  sup. 
fceft. 

@ut,  71.  steS,  suter.  property,  pos- 
session. 

babCffi'om  l^aben,  have. 
bnbett,  v.  N.  irreg.  have,  possess. 
bngeltt,  2^.  iV.  impei'S.  hail. 
balb,  acZ;.  half, 
•^anb,/.  sanbe.  hand, 
bangett,  v.  N.  suspend,  attach. 
bartber,^tg,  adj.  hardhearted. 
biiaiidh  adj.  ugly. 
l)at,from  Ijahixi,  has. 


120 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   YOCABITLARY. 


^aupi,  n.  ste§,  sdupter.  head,  chief. 
^aud,   n,   sfeS,   sdufer.    house;    ju 

§aufc,  at  home. 
^cev,  n.  sie§,  :re.  army. 
Ijcilig,  ac^j.  holy. 
^txnxiiX),  Henry. 
I^ctter^  adj.  cheerful,  gay,  lively. 
^ci#,  adj.  hot. 
•^cib,  m.  sben,  =ben.  hero. 
^)clfcn,  V.  0.  help. 
l^cli,  ac?;.  bright,  clear. 
^crannal^cn,  v.  N.  \.   draw  near, 

approach. 
^err,  m.  =rrn,  =rren,  master,  lord, 

gentleman  ;  in  address,  Sir ;  be- 
fore proper  name^  Mr. 
I;crt)ortrctcn,  v.   O.   f.  step  forth, 

come  oiit,  appear. 
«^cr,i,  n,  ;5en8,  sjen.  heart. 
\^^v\\\d}f  adj.  hearty,  cordial. 
i^cnttf  adv.  to-day. 
i^^uti^,  adj.    to-day's,    belonging 

to  to-day. 
I^icr,  adv.  here. 
•^tntmet,  m.  M.  heaven. 
^in,  adv.  hence,  that  way,  away 

from  the  speaker. 
I)tttaud9e{)en,  v.  0.  \.  go  out. 
11^ inaudfe^en^  v.   0,  look  out,  look 

forth. 
^mfa^reii,  v.    O.  f.   go  hence,  go 

away. 
Iltnge^en,  v.  0.  f.  go  forth. 
l)inun,  adv.  behind. 
Winter,  jr>rep.  behindi 
hod),  adj.  high. 
l^offctt,  V.  N.  hope. 
<^of?nun9,  /.  c^zti.  hope, 
^6f)e,  f.  =cn.  height. 
^loljl,  adj.  hollow,  empty. 
^oUn,  V.  JV.  bring,  fetch. 
l^orcn,  V.  JV.  hear. 
lyuhid),  adj.  pretty. 
«^unb,  m.  sbeg,  3  be.  dog. 
^iingern,  v.  iV.  impers.  hunger,  be 

hungry. 
^utf  m.  ste6,  ?utc.  hat. 

id^,  pers.  pron.  I. 

iljr,   poss.   adj.    her,    its,   their; 

3tjr,  your. 
i!)rtg,  poss.  adj.  her,  its,  their. 
tm  =  in  bem. 


ittimcr,  adv.  always. 

in,  prep,  in^  into,  at  (175). 

iiid  -  in  bag. 

trbifd),  adj.  earthly. 

irgenb,  adv.  ever,  soever,  what- 
ever ;  ircjenb  etUjaS,  anything 
whatever. 

ifl,  from  fein,  is. 

ia,  yes. 

Sa^r,  w.  5re§,  src.  year. 

3anuar,  m.  ^rS.  January. 

icb  (ieber,  jebe,  jebeS),  j!3?'o«.  each, 

every. 
icbermann,    m.    =n8.    every  man, 

every  one. 
Scmanb,  pron.  some  or  any  one, 

anybody. 
icit   (jencr,  jenc,  iencS),  pron.  j'on, 

yonder,  that. 
ic$t,  acZz;.  now. 
Sugcnb,  /.  youth. 
^uii,  m.  M.  July, 
(ling,  adj.  young. 
SiingUtig,  in.  =ga,  ?gc.  young  man, 

youth. 

^aifer,  m.  sr3,  st.  emperor. 

fait,  rtfZ;.  cold. 

^avt,  Charles. 

fttifc,  wi.  =feg,  =fe.  cheese. 

fati)c>(ifd),  «4?-  catholic. 

faufcn,  V.  JV.  buy. 

^auflcittc,  pi.  merchants,  trades- 
men. 

^aufmantt,  m.  snnS,  manner,  mer- 
chant. 

fattm,  adv.  hardly,  scarcely. 

fcin,  pron.  no,  none,  not  one. 

fcttiicn,  V.  N.  irreg.  know,  be  ac- 
quainted with. 

^i\\t>,  n.  =be8,  sbcr.  child. 

tXa^tn,  V.  jV.  mourn,  bewail. 

I^Uib,  71.  =be§,  sber.  dress,  garment. 

f  Uiii,  adj.  little. 

^nahc,  m.  sben,  =6en.  boy. 

^noc^ett,  m.  =n8,  sn.  boae. 

Coffer,  m.  =r8,  sr.  coffer,  trunk. 

^oltt,  Cologne  (city). 

fommett,  v.  O.  ].  come. 

^DUtg,  m.  598,  =ge.  king. 

^ontgiti,  /.  =innen.  queen. 

toniQlid),  adj.  kingly,  royaL 


GEEMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULAEY. 


121 


Itonigrcid),  w.  J(^e6,  =c^c.  kingdom, 
realm. 

fonncn,  v.  iV.  irreg.  be  able,  can. 

^Qpf,  m.  spfeg,  =6pfe.  head. 

fopiid)iittdn^,  adj.  shaking  the 
head. 

fo^cn,  V.  JV.  cost ;  e3  toftet,  it  costs. 

^raft,  /.  ?ten.  power,  strength. 

f raftig,  adj.  strong,  powerful. 

^rcimer,  m.  ;r§,  -t.  shopkeeper. 

franf,  adj.  sick,  ill. 

^vieQ,  m.  sgS,  ^ge.  war. 

fuminerltd),  a<Z^.  miserable,  piti- 
ful, wretched. 

iunftiQ,  adj.  to  come,  future. 

^tinft,  /.  =unfte.  art. 

furj,  «tZ;.  short. 

^utidycv,  m.  cx^,  ?r.  coachman. 

Iad)e(tt^  V.  Nl  smile. 
£anb,  n.  sfccS/  sanbcr.  land,  coun- 
try. 
fianbrcife,  /.  cfen.  journey  in  the 

country. 
lanben,  v.  J^.  f.  land. 
laiiQ,  adj.  long. 
iatxQt,  adv.  for  a  long  time. 
laifcn,  V.  0.  leave,  let,  allow ;  with 

another  infinitive^  cause,  make, 

occasion. 
fiaflcr,  n.  -x^,  ?r.  crime, 
(aufcii,  V.  0.  f.  run. 
(aufd)cn,  v.  N.  lie  in  wait  to  hear 

or  see,  listen. 
Initter,    adj.    clear,    pure,   mere; 

adv.  mere,  downright,  nothing 

but. 
Icbcn,  V.  iVI  live, 
fiebctt,  n.  snS,  ^n.  life. 
i^ebendqucn,  m.  =tteo,  sffc.   spring 

or  fountain  of  life. 
Utt,  adj.  empty. 
fcljren,  v.  N.  teach. 
Cc^rer,  m.  ;r§,  sr.  teacher. 
ficib,  m.  =bc8,  sBer.  body. 
UxAyt,  adj.  light,  easy. 
£eib,  n.  sbeS.  harm,  pain,  sorrow. 
£cibcnfcl)aft,  /.  ?ten.  passion. 
igetben^cit^  /.  =ten.  time  of  sorrow. 
ttn\,  m.  c^t%,  ;jc.  spring. 
i*crd)e,  /.  =^en.  lark. 
(crncn,  v.  N.  learn. 
lefcn,  v.  0,  read. 


Ic^t,  «47.  l^st,  latest. 
^txxtt,  pi.  people,  men. 
tid^i,  n.  4eg,  =ter.'  light,  candle. 
Ueb,  «d;.  dear,  beloved. 
fiicbc,  /  love. 
Itebcn,  V.  N.  love. 
Sicb,  71.  ;beg,  =ber.  song. 
Siet»d>CM,  n.  =n§,  sn.  little  song. 
£i(ic,  /.  =en.  lily. 
(obctt,  v.  iV".  praise. 
IoI)tteti,  v.  iV[  reward. 
Xodf  adj.  loose,  rid  of,  free, 
fiowe,  m.  sen,  sen.  lion. 
fiuft,  /.  sufte.  air,  breeze. 
fiufi,  /.    sujle.    pleasure,   delight, 
longing. 

ittad)ett,  V.  N.  make. 

9Rdbd)ctt,  n.  sng,  sn.  girl. 

9Rai,  m.  =aie§.  May. 

SOlaior,  m.  nS.  Major. 

nta(en,  w.  N.  paint. 

man,    indef.  pron,   one,  people, 

thejs. 
matt^,  indef.  pron.  sing,  many  a, 

many  a  one  ;  pi.  many. 
^Dtann,  m.  snneS,  manner,  man. 
3Jlarf,  /.  sten.  mark  (a  weight  or 

a  coin). 
^SStavtt,    m.    =te8;   sarfte.    market, 

market-place. 
matt,  adj.  faint,  dull 
2Jlecr,  n.  ;re§,  src.  sea,  ocean. 
mcf)t%  acZv.  more. 
mcitt,  poss.  adj.  my,  mine. 
metnig,  joos*.  adj.  my,  mine. 
mcif^,  a4;.  most ;  adv.  mostly. 
SDlcificr,  m.  ;r6,  sr.  master,  teacher. 
^ciiictfiiid,  n.  s!e8.  masterpiece. 
SD^enge,  /.  =gcn.  mass,  multitude. 
SDleiifd),  m.  sfc^en,  sf^en.  man,  per- 
son, human  being. 
mcvUn,  V.  N'.  notice. 
mtf|I)anbc(n,  v.  N.  maltreat. 
mtt,  prep.  with. 
mitttcl)men,  v.  O.  take  along. 
mtttett,    adv.     midway,     in    the 

midst. 
9)ltttcrnad)t,  /.  sac^te,  midnight, 
mogcn,  v.  N.   irreg.  may,  might, 

like,  choose. 
mogltd),  adj.  possible. 
^o\)v,  m.  ixii,  sven.  Moor. 


122 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Wtonat,  m.  st§,  stc.  month. 

9>ion^,  m.  sbeS,  sbc.  moon. 

SDlorgcn,  m.  sn§,  sn.  morn,  morn- 
ing, morrow. 

morgen,  adv.  to-morrow. 

SJlorgenbotc,  m.  sten,  4en.  herald 
of  morning. 

SWorgcnrotI),  n.  st^§.  red^of  morn- 
ing, aurora. 

tnu^e,  adj.  weary,  tired. 

inufFcn,  v.  K.  irreg.  must,  be  un- 
der necessity  of,  be  forced  to. 

SDlutl),  m.  st^eS.  courage. 

S3*tutter,  /.  sutter.  mother. 

nad),  prep,  after,  to. 

nad^ciictt,  v.  N.  f.  hurry  after. 

nac^folgen,  v.  N.  f.  follow  after. 

nad)iaufcn,  v.  0.  f.  run  after. 

9?ad)ricl)t,  /  sten.  news. 

nad)fl,  a<7;.  {superlative  of  na^) 
next,  nearest ;  «s  7ioun,  neigh- 
bor. 

?flad}t,  f.  sten.  night. 

Slad)ti9an,  /.  sticn.  nightingale. 

f!ftami,  m.  senS,  sen.  name. 

fftavv,  m.  sren,  srcn.  fooL 

S^atur,  /.  sren.  nature. 

nel)men,  v.  0.  take. 

netgen,  v.  N.  bend,  incline. 

5?efl,  n.  steS,  ster.  nest. 

S^ctj,  n.  =^e§,  ;fee.  net. 

ncii,  adj.  new. 

itcitUd),  at^v.  newly,  lately. 

neutt,  num.  nine. 

nid)t,  adv.  not. 

ttid)td,  mde/.  pron,  indecl,  noth- 
ing. 

itic,  ac?v.  never. 

nicttv,  adv.  down,  downward. 

niitevhmen,  v.  N.  kneel  down. 

9ltcmanb,  indef.  pron.  no  one,  not 
any  one. 

ntrgenbd,  adv.  nowhere,  in  no 
place. 

ttod),  adv.  still,  yet. 

9lot^,  /.  need,  want. 

SJot^wcnbigfcit,/.  ^tcn.  necessity. 

nun,  adv.  now,  at  present. 

nur,  acZw.  only,  solely,  merely. 

vh,  conj.  whether. 
p^cr,  cow;,  or. 


6f?neit,  V.  iV!  open. 

oft,  adv.  often. 

oljne,  J97-CJO.  without,  but  for. 

Oljrring,  m.  sgg,  ;ge.  earring. 

Onfcl,  m.  5t§,  si.  uncle. 

^alme,  /.  smen.  palm. 
^apicv,  n.  sr§,  sre.  paper. 
^erfon,  /.   sitett-    person,  person- 
age. 
^ofaunc,  f.  sen.  trumpet, 
^oft,  /.  sten.  post,  mail. 
prcifeti,  v.  O.  praise,  value, 
^rcu^c,  m.  s^en,  s^en.  Prussian. 
^rm§,  m.  sjen,  sjen.  prince. 

^ai\),  m.  st^g,  sat^c.  counsel,  ad- 
vice. 

rauc^en,  v.  N.  smoke. 

rcd)t,  adj.  right,  just;  adv.  re- 
ally, actually ;  very. 

'Sitdyt,  n.  i^it^,  ste.  right,  privilege. 

rcbeii,  V.  N.  talk. 

reMtd),  ac^J.  honest. 

^tegenbogeit,  m.  senS,  sen.  rainbow, 

regtien,  t;.  iVi  impers.  rain. 

9tcl)»  wi.  5:^e§,  s^e.  roe,  deer. 

veid),  adj.  rich. 

rcifctt,  V.  N'.  f«  travel,  journey. 

vcitcn,  V.  O.  J},  or  f.  ride. 

ret'i^cttb,  adj.  charming. 

rcttcn,  V.  JV".  save. 

9{id)tcrf^ut)I^  m.  sleS.  judgment- 
seat. 

vittcvUd),  adj  knightly. 

9?ofc,  /.  sfen.  rose. 

rofig,  adj.  rosy. 

votl),  adj.  red. 

dtiikcn,  m.  senS,  sen.  back. 

rufett,  V.  0.  call. 

ytul)e,  f.  rest,  repose,  quiet. 

SWubefiattc,  /.  sen.  resting-place. 

rut)  19,  adj.  quiet,  restful. 

^\x\)m,  m.  sme§.  fame,  renown. 

fagcti,  V.  N.  say. 
(Sanb,  m.  sbe§.  sand, 
^arg,  m.  sgeS,  sorge.  coflfin. 
fd)ameti,  z;.  iV!  reflex,  be  ashamed. 
fd>anMid),  a<Z;.  shameful. 
®d)ai^,  w.  s^eS,  sfi^e.  treasure. 
idyd^cn,  v.  li.  treasure,  esteem. 
id)dumin,  v.  iV.  foam. 


GEEMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULAET. 


123 


^d)dttl,f.  stn.  crown  of  the  head. 

id)idcn,  V.  N.  send. 

<Sdyidiat,  n.  sI8,  =Ie.  fate,  destiny. 

idyiacsttif  V.  0.  strike. 

fdyledyt,  adj.  bad. 

fd)metd)eln^  v.  JSF.  flatter. 

®cl)mcrj,  m.  sjcnS  or  sjeS,  sjcn.  pain, 
sorrow. 

idynetl,  adj.  quick,  rapid. 

fd)pn,  adv.  already. 

fd)6ti,  adj.  beautiful,  handsome. 

(2cl)6pfimg,  /.  sgen.  creation, 
created  thing. 

idyvcdUd),  adj.  terrible,  frightfuL 

ffdyreiben,  v.  O.  write. 

^dyvitt,  m.  steS,  4c.  step. 

®d)ul),  m.  s^eg,  4e.  shoe. 

<Zd)u\b,  f.  sben.  debt. 

<Zd)uU,  f.  slen.  school. 

<S>d)uicr,  m.  sr§,  =r.  scholar. 

idymad),  adj.  weak,  feeble. 

^d)waibi,  f.  s6en.  swallow  (bird). 

fd)tt)arj,  adj.  black. 

fd)n>et9cn,  v.  0.  be  silent. 

fd)n)cr,  «^j.  heavy,  difficult. 

@d)n>cftcr,  /  =rn.  sister. 

(Sd)n)ie9crfoI)n,  m.  sneS,  so^nc.  son- 
in-law. 

idywin^tn,  v.  0.  swing;  reflex. 
swing  one's  self,  leap. 

HdM,  num.  six. 

^ttUf  f.  slen.  soul,  spirit. 

ieQtien,  v.  N".  bless. 

ic^en,  V.  0.  see,  look. 

fel)ttctt,  V.  N.  reflex,  long  for. 

U\)X,  adv.  very. 

Utin,  poss.  adj.  his,  its. 

fctn,  V.  O.  f.  be,  exist. 

Uit,  prep,  since. 

®citc,  /.  =ten.  side,  page. 

idbev,  adj.  indecl.  self. 

fctbft,  ac^J.  i7idecl.  self. 

feltett,  a^?.  rare,  unusual,  seldom. 

fci^en,  V.  N.  set,  cause  to  sit,  place. 

fcufjcn,  i;.  iV.  sigh. 

fid),  reflex,  pron.  himself,  herself, 
itself,  themselves. 

ftc,  pers.  pron.  she,  her,  it ;  they, 
them ;  ©ic,  you. 

ftegen,  v.  N.  gain. the  victory,  tri- 
umph. 

<St(ber,  n.  srS.  silver. 

iitit,  from  fein,  are. 


ftngctt,  V.  0.  sing. 

(Sinn,  m.  sne6,  =nc  or  snen.  sense, 
mind,  intention,  disposition. 

ftl^en,  V.  O.  sit. 

<Bi^uttQ,  f.  ;gen.  session. 

fo,  acZz;.  so,  thus. 

ioQaVf  adv.  even. 

fogleid),  adv.  immediately,  di- 
rectly. 

<Zof)n,  m.  cnc5,  so^nc.  son. 

<2oIbat,  m.  sten,  sten.  soldier. 

follcn,  v.  JV.  irreg.  shall,  should, 
owe,  ought  to  ;  be  to ;  be  said  to. 

(Sommer,  m.  srS,  =r.  summer. 

fonbcm,  conj.  after  negative^  but. 

®onnc,  /.  snen.  sun. 

(Sopt)te,  Sophia. 

iovQtn,  v.  N.  care,  take  care. 

fpdt,  ac?/.  late. 

fpajiicrcn,  w.  iV;  walk,  go  abroad, 
take  a  turn ;  fp.  gc^en,  take  a 
walk ;  yp.  fasten,  take  a  drive. 

<Sprad)c,/.  =(^en.  speech,  language. 

fpred)cn,  v.  0.  speak. 

fpringcn,  v.  O.  f.  or  ^.  spring. 

<^taat,  m.  ste§,  4en.  state,  country. 

(Stnbt,  /.  cabte.  city. 

^ta\\\i^\xnli,  m.  ?ft§,  sftc.  stand- 
point, point  of  view. 

flarF,  adj.  strong. 

iUXycn,  v.  0.  stand. 

(Stem,  m.  5ne§,  sne.  stone. 

©telle,  /.  slen.  place,  spot. 

f^cvben,  v.  O.  \.  die. 

flerblid),  adj.  mortal. 

®tern,  ni.  siteS,  stic.  star. 

flt((en,  V.  JV.  still,  quiet,  assuage. 

<Btod,  m.  scfe6,  socEe.  stick,  staff. 

@toff,  w^.  5fe§,  sfe.  stuflF,  material. 

<S>tval)l,  m.  iUB,  slen.  beam,  ray. 

<2>ttan^,  in.  =be8.  strand,  shore. 

®tra^e,  /.  sfen.  street. 

flrettg,  acZ;.  strict,  severe. 

fireucn,  v.  N.  strew,  scatter. 

©trom,  m.  sme§,  some,  stream, 
river. 

^iixddytn,  n.  =ng,  -n.  little  piece. 

(Stubeitt,  m.  =ten,  =tcn.  student. 

ftubiren,  w.  iY  study. 

iStitl)!,  m.  =Ie§,  =u^Ie.  chair. 

<Stunbe,  /.  =ben.  hour. 

ftu$eti,  ?^.  iV;  prop  up,  support; 
re/lex.  lean. 


124 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


fiK^cn,  V.  K  seek. 
<S>ixn^tv,  m.  stS,  sr.  sinner. 
fii^,  adj.  sweet. 


tabelti,  V.  N.  blame. 

3:ag,  m.  sgeS,  sge.  day. 

tagen,  v,  N.  dawn,  become  day. 

%oXvxi,  n.  'M,  4e.  talent. 

3;afd)c,  /.  =j(^en.  pocket. 

tciufd^en,  v.  N.  deceive,  delude, 
cheat. 

%t\x^t\,  m.  sis,  si.  devil. 

^t)aUv,  m.  srS,  sr.  dollar. 

%t}catcv,  n.  stS,  St.  theatre. 

tl^tiUttf  V.  N.  divide,  separate, 
share. 

%\)\tv,  n.  iXeB,  =rc.  animal. 

ij^pr,  m.  srcg,  ste.  door,  gate,  por- 
tal. 

Xf)tanc,  f.  sncn.  tear. 

t\)\xn,  V.  0.  do,  perform. 

%\)ixv,  f.  sten.  door. 

ticf,  ac/^;.  deep. 

XiiAy,  m.  sfci^cS,  s^c^e.  table. 

2:od)tcr,  /.  softer,  daughter. 

^6d)terd)cti,  «.  snS,  sn.  little 
daughter. 

%f)^f  m.  sbeS,  sbc.  death. 

tobtcn,  V.  N.  kill. 

tragen,  v.  O.  carry. 

traurig,  ac2^'.  sad. 

trenncn,  v.  N.  separate,  part. 

tvcttn,  V.  O.  f.  tread,  proceed, 
come,  enter. 

ixtiXf  adj.  true,  faithful. 

%xcvitf  f.  truth,  fidelity. 

troften,  v.  N.  console,  comfort. 

Sugenb,  /.  sben.  virtue. 


fiber,  prep,  over,  above,  higher 
than. 

iibcran,  adv.  everywhere. 

iibemad)ten,  v.  N.  spend  the  night. 

iiberfel^en,    v.     N.    set    over    or 

..  across ;  translate. 

iibcrfd)ubf  m.  s^eS,  =^e.  overshoe. 

tibcrtragcn,  v.  0.  carry  over,  trans- 

,.  port. 

ixhvm^f  f.  sgcn.  practice. 

UI)r,  /.  =rcn.  hour,  clock ;  invari- 
able after  fiumerah^  o'clock. 


urn,  prep,  around,  about,  respect- 
ing, concerning;  before  infiiii- 
tive  with  ju,  in  order,  so  as. 

urn  .  .  ♦  mlUn,prep.  on  account 
of. 

uttartig,  adj.  naughty. 

iintf  conj.  and. 

Uncrfal)rcnl)elt,  /.  inexperience. 

Ungarn,  Hungary. 

ungcfcibf,  «^^.  about,  nearly,  not 
far  from. 

ungel^euer,  adj.  uncanny,  mon- 
strous, huge. 

un0cfd)el)en,  adj.  unhappened, 
undone. 

ttngliicf,  n.  sdS,  sdc.  ill-luck,  mis- 
fortune. 

ung liicfltc^,  a^'.  unhappy,  imfort- 
unate. 

unmodltd),  «<?;.  impossible. 

Unred)t,  w..  st8.  wrong,  error. 

unfcr,  J90SS.  a^J.  our. 

unter,  prep,  under,  beneath, 
among. 

tintoctt,  prep,  not  far  from. 

95atcr,  m.  srS,  sfiter.  father. 

93crad)tuttg,  /.  contempt,  scorn. 

ocrbinbctt,  v.  0.  bind  up,  bind  to- 
gether, join. 

2$erbrcd)er,m.  srS,  st.  transgressor, 
criminal. 

oerbrcttcn,  v.  2V.  spread  abroad, 
diffuse,  circulate. 

oergcbcn,  v.  O.  forgive. 

ocrgcbend,  ac?y.  in  vain. 

Dcrgcffctt,  v.  O.  forget. 

t)crlangcn,  v.  N.  desire,  demand. 

ocrlaffcn,  v.  0.  leave,  desert,  for- 
sake. 

t>er(eil)ett,  v.  0.  lend,  confer,  be- 
stow. 

oerlicrcn,  v.  0.  lose. 

ocrmdblcn,  ^;.  N.  give  in  marriage ; 
reflex,  marry,  espouse. 

oermogcn,  2;.  N.  irreg.  have  power, 
be  able  to,  can. 

93ernunft,  /.  reason. 

oerrcifcn,  v.  N.  f.  go  on  a  journey, 
travel  away. 

ocrfdjroinbcn,  v.  O.  f.  disappear. 

ocrfcbcn,  w.  O.  provide,  furnish. 

oerfp redden,  v.  O.  promise. 


GEEMAK-ENQLISH   VOCABULARY. 


125 


Dcrflc^ctt,  V.  0.  understand. 

oerflcrbcn,  v.  0.  f.  die,  expire ;  bcv? 
^orben,  deceased. 

JBcrfud),  m.  sd^eS,  sd^c.  attempt, 
trial. 

ocrnjattbcrit,  «;.  N.  change,  trans- 
form. 

ocrwunbcrtt,  v.  iVi  strike  with 
wonder,  astonish,  amaze. 

t>icl,  adj.  much,  many. 

t>kticid)t,  adv.  perhaps. 

fQuvtcl,  m.  =I§,  =1.  quarter. 

9So()eI,  m.  t\%,  sogel.  bird. 

95otf,  n.  sfeS,  solfer.  people,  na- 
tion. 

t)on,  at?;,  full. 

t^odcnben,  v.  N.  complete,  accom- 
plish. 

t)on,  prep,  of,  from,  by. 

»or,  prep,  before,  for,  on  account 
of,  because  of. 

ooraud,  adv.  in  advance. 

vorbctge^cti,  e;.  0.  \.  go  by,  pass 
by. 

t)orfaI)reti,  v.  O.  f.  go  or  drive  be- 
fore, drive  up. 

t>orttcI)nt,  adj.  of  superior  rank, 
distinguished,  aristocratic. 

t»orfingcn,  v.  O.  sing  before  or  for," 
sing  for  others  to  hear. 

Dortrcfflid),  adj.  admirable,  excel- 
lent. 

Dortibcrgc^cn,  v.  0.  f.  go  past,  pass 

by. 

SSBagett,  m.  sn§,  sn.  wagon,  coach, 
carriage. 

tt»al)r,  arf;.  true. 

toaOrcnb^  J9rep.  during;  conj. 
while. 

aBabvtjaftigPctt,  /.  truthfulness. 

SQSalb,  m.  sbc§,  =dlber.  wood,  forest. 

95Sanb,  /.  =dnbe.  wall. 

to  arm,  adj.  warm. 

loartett,  v.  N.  wait,  await. 

warum,  adv.  or  conj.  why,  where- 
fore. 

wad,  pron.  interrog.  or  rel.  what, 
that  which,  whatever;  n)a3  fur, 
what  kind  of. 

n)afd)en,  v.  0.  wash. 

!S$afTcr,  n.  sr§.  water. 

!S$C9,  m.  sge^,  sgo.  way,  road.  | 


w^bf  adj.  sad,  painful. 

SBcbf  w.  5^e§,  s^c  or  fl^en.  woe, 
pain,  distress. 

aCBetb,  71.  sieS,  sBcr.  woman,  wife. 

tt)cicl)cn,  v.  0.  f.  give  way,  retire, 
yield. 

xotiXf  conj.  because,  since. 

3Betn,  m.  sne§,  sne.  wine. 

weifc,  ac^'.  wise. 

aBcidI)cit,  /.  wisdom. 

wcift,  «d;.  white. 

tt)ctt,  adj.  wide,  broad,  far  off. 

tocid),  interrog.  or  rel.  adj.  or 
pron.  which,  what,  that;  in- 
def.  pron.  some,  any. 

aScrt,  /.  =ten.  world. 

wciibcn,  V.  N.  turn,  direct,  apply. 

n)cnt9,  adj.  little,  not  much  ;  few, 
not  many. 

toenti,  conj.  when,  if. 

vocVf  pron.  interrog.  or  rel.  who, 
he  who,  whoever. 

tocrbcu,  V.  0.  S.  become. 

2Bcrf,  n.  sfe§,  ?fe.  work. 

wcrFcit,  V.  N.  work,  be  busy. 

xotvt\},  adj.  worth,  worthy,  deserv- 
ing. 

aScrtfj,  m.  st^eS,  st^e.  worth,  value. 

md)tiQf  adj.  weighty. 

voic,  adv.  how  ?  in  what  way  ? 
conj.  how,  as,  lifie  as. 

voiittVf  adv.  again. 

tt)iebcrI)oIcn,  t;.  N.  repeat. 

wicbcrtetjrctt,  2;.  iV!  f.  come  back, 
return. 

SBicgc,  /.  sen.  cradle. 

SEBtUc,  m.  sn8,  ^n.  will,  intent, 
purpose. 

SSilJlcIm,  William. 

aCBintcr,  m.  sr§,  sr.  winter. 

wir,  joers.  pron.  we. 

totrflid),  a(i;.  actual,  real,  genuine. 

9Sirt^dt)aud,  n.  =jeS,  =dujet.  public 
house,  inn. 

tvtffcn,  V.  JV.  irreg.  know. 

wo,  adv.  or  conj.  where. 

3Bod)e,  /.  'dm.  week. 

tool)cVf  adv.  or  co?ij.  whence. 

wobttt,  adv.  or  conj.  whither. 

WQl)l,  adv.  well. 

wobnctt,  V.  N'.  dwell. 

woUen,  V.  iV!  i7*re^.  will,  be  will- 
ing, intend,  desire,  wish. 


126 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


toorauf,  adv.  whereupon,  upon 
which. 

SKort,  n.  ste§,  ste  or  sorter,  word. 

SEBunbc, /.  =ben.  wound. 

tounbcHic^^  adj.  strange,  odd,  pe- 
culiar. 

wunbcrn,  v,  JV.  reflex,  wonder,  be 
astonished. 

SBunfd),  m.  sfci^eS,  sunfc^e.  wish, 
desire. 

aSiifle, /.  stcn.  desert. 

fi&uti),  f.  fury,  rage. 

^cirtltd),  adj.  tender,  soft. 

Scit,  f.  sten.  time. 

jeitlebend^  adv.  all  one's  lifetime, 

for  life. 
StititrtQ,  f.  sgen.  newspaper. 
gerretflctt,  v.  O.  tear  in  pieces. 
Settcl,  m.   sis,    si.    bit  of  paper, 

note,  card. 


jte()cti,  v.  O.  draw,  pull,  bring; 
proceed,  go,  march. 

2icvbc,  f.  sfcen.  ornament. 

3tmincr,  n.  sr§,  sr.  room. 

3orti,  m.  ;ne§.  anger,  wrath. 

jii,  j^rep.  to,  at,  for,  in ;  adj.  &e- 
foi'e  adj.  too. 

;ilIfrie^cn,  a^j.  contented. 

jugct^ait,  J9J9L  devoted,  attached- 
gum  =  ju  bent. 

guritcf^  adv.  back. 

gurticCfommcn,  v.  0.  f.  come 
back. 

guruif  gtcl^cn,  w.  0.  draw  back. 

3n)att9^  m.  sgcS,  songe.  compul- 
sion, constraint,  force. 

gnjci,  num.  two. 

Stveig,  m.  sgc§,  sge.  twig,  branch. 

gtvett,  n?^m.  arf;.  second. 

Stvicbel,  /.  4n.  onion. 


EKGLI8H-GEEMAN    VOCABULAET. 


127 


ENGLISH-GERMAN. 


a  or  an,  indef.  art.  eln,  cine. 
able,  be  able,   v.  tonnen,  N.  ir- 

reg. 
absent,  adj.  atwefcnb. 
admire,  v.  feewunbern,  N. 
afraid,   be  afraid,    v.    fi(^  furc^; 

ten,  K 
after,  conj.  nacf)bcm. 
all,  adj.   att. 
allow",  be  allowed,  v.  burfen,  N. 

irrcg. 
along,  prep,  entlang. 
already,  adv.  fc^on. 
also,  adv.  am^. 
altbongli,  co7tj.  oBgteic^. 
always,  adv.  immer. 
am,  I  am,  ic^  bin  {from  fein). 
America,  5lmerifa. 
American,  3lmerifaner,  m.  srS,  sr. 
and,  C071J.  un?, 
another,  adj.  ein  anber. 
ansTi^er,  v.  antiDorten,  N. 
any  tiling,   ^9?^o/i.    etiwaS/   irgenb 

ctiua3. 
apple,  9tpfel,  m.  -M,  Olpfel. 
approacli,  v.  ^eranna^en,  N.  f. 
are,  we  or  they  are,  [inb  {from 

fein). 
as,  conj.  or  adv.  alS. 
asbamed,   be    ashamed,    v.    \\6) 

fc^dmen,  N. 
ask,  V.  fragen,  N. 
at,  prep,  (at  such  o'clock)  um. 
Augusta,  2tugufte,  /. 
autumn,  §erbft,  m.  =tc8,  stc. 
avoid,  V,  auSrceic^en,  O.  f, 
away,  adv.  fort. 

bad,  adj.  fc^te(^t. 
ball,  93aa,  m.  =ire3,  -^aVit, 
be,  V,  fein,  O. 
beautiful,  adj.  fc^on. 
because,  co/i;.  loeil. 
become,  v.  werben,  O.  f. 
before,  prep.  Bor  ;  co7}j.  e^e. 
begin,  i'.  anfangen,  0. 


bebcad,  v.  entt^auptcn,  N. 

bebind,  prep.  Winter. 

believe,  v.  gtauben,  N. 

beloved,  geliebt,  ppl.  o/Uefccn. 

beside,  prep,  neben. 

better,  adj.  or  adv.  beffer,  artiger. 

between,  prep,  jnjifi^ett. 

bite,  V.  bei^en,  0. 

black,  adj.  fti^roarj. 

blame,  v.  tabein,  iV] 

blue,  adj.  blau. 

bond,  93anb,  7i.  sbeS,  =be. 

book,  33 ud^,  w-.  =c^e§,  =itc^er. 

born,/>j9L  geboren  (from  gebdren). 

bottle,  glaf(^e,  /.  =f4en. 

boy,  ^nabe,  m.  sben,  =ben. 

box,  ^aften,  m.  sn^,  sn. 

bread,  Srob,  w.  =be3,  =bc. 

break,  v.   bret^en,    O.  ;  break  ia 

pieces,  jerbrcci^en. 
broad,  adj.  breit. 
brotber,  58ruber,  m.  =r§,  siiber. 
but,  conj.  abet  j   after  negative., 

fonbern. 
butter,  ^Butter,  /. 
buy,  V.  fanfen,  N. 
by,  prep.  oon. 
bystanders,  bic  Umjlc^enbcn, 

can,  V.  fonnen,  N.  irreg. 

cause,  w.  laffen,  with  an  infini- 
tive^ 0. 

cbair,  ©tu'^f,  m.  sleS,  sii^tc. 

cbarming,  adj.  reijenb. 

cbild,  Jlinb,  n.  ;be§,  sber. 

cbolera,  S^olera,  /. 

cburcb,  Jlirc^e,  /.   scn, 

city,  ©tabt,  /.  idbte. 

close,  V.  jumac^en,  N. 

clotb,  %Vi^,  n.  ;(^e§,  ;it(^er. 

clotbes,  ^leibev  {pi.  of  tieife, 
dress). 

coacbman,  ^utfd^eV/  tn.  ^x^,  ',x, 

cold,  adj.  fait. 

come,  V.  foinmen,  0.  \.  ;  come 
back,  juriicEJommen. 


128 


ENGLISH-GERMAN     VOCABULARY. 


comrade,  i^amcrab,  m.  sb§,  sben. 
cool,  adj.  fu^I. 
copy,  V.  obfc^reifeen,  0. 
count,  ®raf,  m.  sfen,  sfen. 
country,   2anb,   /i.    =be§,   sanber ; 

native  c,  SSaterlanb,  n. 
cousin,  SSetter,  m.  ^rS,  ;r  ;   (Soufine, 

/.  =nen. 

dance,  v.  tanjcn,  iV! 
daughter,  3:Dc^ter,  /.  soti^tcr. 
day,  S^ag,  m.  ^geS,  sge. 
departed,  dead,    »erftor6en,  ppl. 

of  toerfterben,  0.  f. 
desire,  v.  mogen,  N.  hn'eg. 
dethrone,  v.  entt^ronen,  xV". 
die,  V.  fter&en,  0.  f. 
discover,  v.  entbeden,  Nl 
distant,  cntfernt,  2^P^-  of  cntfcts 

nen,  JV. 
do,  V.  t^un,  0. 
dog,  §unb,  m.  sbeS,  ?bc. 
door,  %^nv,  f.  sre. 
dress,  ^Icib,  n.  sbS,  ^ber. 
drive,  v.  fo^ren,  O.  f. 
during,  prep,  lod^rcnb. 

eartli,  Grbe,  /.   ?bcn. 
eat,  z;.  effen,  0. 

either  .  .  .  or,  cntnjcber  .   .  .  ober. 
£mperor,  ^aifer,  in.  -,1%,  sV. 
impress,  Eaiferin,/.  ?rinnen. 
end,  at  an  end,  ju  Gnbe. 
Englishman,  (ingldnber,wi.sr8,  sr. 
enough,  adv.  genug. 
evade,  v.  augtucic^en,  0.  f. 
evening,  5l6enb,  m.  sbS,  sbc. 
exile,  ber  SSerOanntc,  adj.  as  n. 

fall,  V.  fatten,  0.  f. 
father,  SSater,  m.  =r8,  =ater. 
fetch  back,  v.  tt)teberI)olen,  N.  sep. 
field,  gctb,  71.  sbe§,  sber. 
find,  V.  finben,  0. 
fire,  (^euer,  n.  ?r§,  st. 
floor,  S3Dben,  m.  snS,  =Dben. 
flovi'er,  S3Iume,  /.   ;mcn. 
follow,  V.  folgen,  A^.  f. 
foot,  %\x%  m.  =^eg,  =u{3C. 
for,  pr<?/).  fur ;  conj.  bcnn, 
forest,  2Balb,  m.  ;be§,  sdlbct. 
forget,  w.  toergeffcn,  O. 
friend,  greunb,  m.  sbc8,  sbc. 


garden,  ©arten,  m.  sttS,  sarten. 
German,  ac?;.  beutfc^. 
Qerman,  ber  1)eutf^e,  acf;.  as  n. 
Germany,  ©eutf^lanb,  n. 
give,  V.  geben,  0.  :  I  give,  tc^  ge* 

be ;  thou  g.,  bu  gibft ;  he  g.,   er 

gibt ;    they   g.,   fie    geben ;    give 

back,  jurudgeben. 
go,  V.  gc^en,  0.  f.  ;  go  along,  mits 

gel^en ;   go  away,    fortge^en ;    go 
'    out,  au§gc:^en. 
gone,  be  gone,  fort  fein. 
good,  adj.  gut,  artig. 
grandchild,  Snfel,  m.  st^,  ?(» 
grieve,  I  am  grieved,  eS  t^ut  rait 

leib. 
grow,  become,  v.  werben,  0.  f, 
gun,  gante,  /.  sen, 

half,  adj.  ^alh. 

hand,  §anb,  /.   sdnbe. 

handsome,  adj.  f(^on. 

happy,  adj.  glucfli^. 

hardly,  adv.  taum. 

hasten  after,  v.  nac^eilcn,  N.  f. 

hate,  V.  ^affen,  H. 

hateful,  ge^a^t,  ppl.  of  ^affen. 

have,  V.  I^aben,  iV!  irreg.  :  I  have, 

Ic^  \)abe  ;  he  has,  cr  ^at ;  we  have, 

mx   ^aben  ;   they    have,  fie    f)a: 

ben. 
have  to,  be  obliged  to,  v.  rauficn, 

iV.  irreg. 
he,  pron.  er. 

headache,  ^opfwc^,  n.  5^3. 
hear,  v.  i^oren,  A'! 
help,  V.  ^etfen,  O. 
henceforth,  «(Zt;.  funftig. 
here,  adv.  l^ler. 
high,  adj.  ^o(^  (73  rf). 
his,  J0OS.S.  fein,  feinig. 
home,  at  home,  ju  §aufc. 
how,  ado.  xo'xt. 
hungry,  adj.  l^ungrig. 

I,  pron.  \6). 
if,  conj.  wenn. 

in,  prep,  in  with   dat.  or  accus. 
(175).    Ex.  36.  13,  5u  granffort. 
industrious,  adj.  ftei^ig. 
instead  of,  prep,  anftatt. 
into,  prep,  in  with  accus.  (175). 
invite,  v.  cinlaben,  O. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN     VOCABULARY. 


129 


is,  tfl  (from  fein). 
it,  pron.  eS. 

^onrjiey,  v.  reifcn,  iV.  f.  ;  journey 
off  or  away,  ofereifen,  iVi  f. 

king,  StbniQ,  m.  =g§,  sge. 
knife,  aJZeffer,  n.  ^rS,  ?r. 
Icno^iv,  V.  wiffen,  N.  irreg. 

language,  ©pra(i^e,  /  sc^cn. 
large,  arf;'.  gro^. 
lay,  V.  legen,  iV". 
learn,  v,  lerncn,  N". 
learned,  adj.  gelc^rt. 
leave,  v.  toerlaftcn,  0. 
lesson,  9lufga6e,  /.  sbcn. 
letter,  93rief,  m.  sfe5,  sfc. 
life,  Se6en,  n.  ^nS,  stt. 
like,  like  to,  v.  mogen,  iV.  irre^r. 
little,  adj.  titin  ;  ac^e;.  wenig. 
live,  V.  leben,  iV^.,  or  wol^nen,  iV. 
long,  tit^*.  lang  ;  for  a  long  time, 
adv.  lange  ;  no  longer,  nic^t  me^r. 
long  for,  V.  [ic^  fc^nen,  N, 
look  upon,  V.  betrad^tcn,  iV^ 
lose,  V.  wevUeren,  O. 
louder,  adj.  or  adv.  l^ol^cif. 
love,  V.  Ucben,  N. 

madman,  SBa^nftnitigcr,  adj.  as  n. 
^         maintain,  v.  be^aupten,  N. 
make,  v.  maiden,  N. 
man,  3D2ann,  m.  =nneS,  sanner. 
man  (a  human  being,  mankind), 

2Weuf(^,  m.  sft^en,  =fc^en. 
many,  adj.  tolet. 
may  (23.*  4),  fcfirfen,  N.    irreg.  ; 

adv.^  fe^r. 
meet,  v.    begegnen,   N.   f.  ;  go  to 

meet,  entgegen  ge^en. 
mercliant,  Jlaufmaun,  m.  snneS, 

manner,  ^aufleute. 
moment,  3J2inute,  /.  sten. 
monarcli,  go^onar^r  »^i.  =^cn,  s(i^en. 
money,  ©clb,  7i.  st)eg,  =fcier. 
montli,  SUJoncit,  ra.  ii%,  -M. 
morning,    ajjorgcn,  m.    sn§,    ?n ; 

this  morning,  ^eute  morgen. 
mother,  9Jiutter,  f.  =utter. 
mountain,  93evg,  in.  =gc§,  =gc. 
mountain-range. 


macli,  o/f;.  and  adv.  toiel. 
must,  ?;.  miij'fen,  N.  irreg. 
my,  J90SS.  mein. 

naughty,  adj.  unartig. 

never,  adv.  nie,  niemalS. 

ne-w,  adj.  neu. 

nev»^s,  SfJad^ric^t,  /.  sten. 

next,  ad],  nd^ft. 

no,  acfy.  nein  ;  adj.  fein ;  no  one, 

9'2iemanb. 
noble,  a(^'.  ebcl. 
not,  adv.  nic^t. 

notliing,  indecl.  pron.  nic^tS. 
noMT,  acZv.  jefet. 

o'clock,  U^r,  /.  (115  d). 

of,  prep.  tocn. 

often,  acZv.   oft. 

old,  adj.  alt. 

on,  prep.  auf. 

only,  a(Zv.  nut. 

open,  V.  aufmai^en,  iV! 

order,  in  order  to,  conj.  urn  .  .  .  ju. 

ougkt,  V.  fotten,  iV]  irr^^/. 

outside, /? rep.  au^er^alb. 

over,  prep.^  u&er. 

overskoe,  Uberjci^u:^,  m.  s^eg,  =^e. 

part,  %l)d\,  m.  4§,  sle. 
people,  Ceute,  pi. 
picture,  93iib,  n.  =be3,  sber. 
piece,  ©turf,  n.  sfcg,  =!e. 
pity,  take  pity,  v.  ft(^  crSarmen, 

iV.  (182  b). 
plainly,  adv.  beuttic^. 
plate,  Stetler,  m.  sr8,  sr, 
play  together,  v.  jufammcnfplels 

en,  N. 
poor,  adj.  arm. 
pound,  gjfunb,  n.  =bc8/  ;be. 
praise,  «;.  loBcn,  iV". 
present,  ©efi^enf,  7i.  sf§,  sfc. 
present,  acZ;.  anwejenb,  adj.  as  n. 
pretty,  adj.  ^ubf(^. 
promise,  v.  verfprc(!^en,  0. 
pronounce,  v.  au3fpre(i^en,  O. 
put  on,  V.  anjlc^en,  0. 

raise,  v.  aufl^etcn,  0. 
read,  v.  Icfen,  O. 
receive,  v.  cmpfangen,  0. 
recognize,  v.  anerfennen,  N.  irreg. 


130 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY. 


red,  adj.  tof^. 
rejoice,  v.  [ic^  freuen,  iVI 
remain,  v.  bleiben,  0.  f. 
repeat,  v.  ttjicberl^olen,  iV.  ifisep. 
rest,  V.  fi^  au^ru'^en,  JV. 
return,  v.  jurucffommen,  0.  f. 
ribbon,  iBanb,  n.  ste§,  sdnber. 
ricli,  ad^.  xci^, 
rid,  be  rid  of,  lo8  tnerbcn  (186). 
ring,  9Jing,  m.  ;gg,  sgc. 
river,  gtu^,  m.  sffeS,  =uffe. 
room,  3"nmer,  m.  sr3,  sr. 
ro^iv,  9iei^e,  /.  ^en. 

gave,  V.  rettcn,  iV! 

say,  V.  fagen,  iV". 

scliool,  (gd^ule,  /.  stcn. 

seat  one's  self,  v.  [ic^  fefeen,  iV^. 

see,  f.  fel^en,  0. 

sell,  2;.  eerfaufen,  iV! 

set  ^^the  sun),  2>.  untcrge^en,  0.  f. 

slie,prow.  fie. 

sliort,  adj.  furj. 

sick,  «4;.  !ranf. 

sing,  V.  fmgcn,  O. 

sink,  V.  ^inuntcrge^cn,  O.  f. 

sister,  ©c^irefter,  /.  srn. 

sit,  V.  fi^en,  O. 

slovFly,  rt^v.  tangfam. 

small,  adj.  !Iein. 

snoTv,  V.  fd^ncien,  iVi  impers. 

so,  acZ?;.  or  con;,  fo. 

society,  ©cfeUfd^aft,  /.  =ten. 

some,  indef.  pron.  etwoS. 

some,  a<^'.  einige,  pi. 

son,  ©o^^n,  m.  sne§,  so^nc. 

song,  Cicb,   n.    5be3,   sbcr  j    little 

song,  fiiebd^en,  n.  sn8,  sn. 
soon,  ac/y.  balb. 

sorry,  I  am  sorry,  e§  t^ut  mir  Ictb. 
speak,  V.  fprec^en,  O. 
spend    (time),    v.    jubtingeit,   iV! 

spite,  in  spite  of,  prep,  trofe. 
spring   along,  v.   ^eranfprtngen/ 

stand,  V.  fte^en,  O. 
stay,  V.  fcleiben,  0.  f. 
story,  SSKdrc^en,  /?-.  =ng,  ;n. 
strike,  v.  fc!^lagcn,  0. 
student,  (Stubent,  m.  ;ten,  sten. 
study,  ?^.  ftubieren,  N. 
successor,  9?a(^folgcr,  m.  sr6,  sr. 


sugar,  3uctcr,  m.  ;r*. 
sun,  (Sonne,  /  =nen. 
sweet,  adj.  fu^. 
swim,  V.  fc^ttjimmcn,  0. 

table,  SClfc^,  m.  sfc^eS,  =fe^c. 
take,  v.  ne^men,   0.;  take  along, 

mitne^men  ;  take  a  walk,  fpajieren 

ge^en. 
talk,  V.  fpre(!^ett,  0. 
tall,  adj.  gro^,  l^od^. 
teaclier,  Se:^rcr,  in.  srS,  »r. 
tell,  v.  fagen,  N. 
tban,  conj.  al§. 
that,  dem.  pron.  jener  ;  rel.  pron. 

njeli^er,  bet ;  conj.  ba^. 
tbe,  art.  ber,  bie,  bag. 
tlielr,  poss.  pron.  i^r. 
tben,  adv.  bann. 
tbere,  adv.  ba,  bort ;  there  is  or 

are,  c§  giBt,  e8  finb. 
tliine,poss.  bein  betnig,  (89  6). 
tbis,  dem.  pron.  biefer. 
threaten,  v.  bro^^en,  N. 
three,  num.  bret. 
through,  prep.  bur^. 
thro^iv  down,  v.  umwerfcn,  O. 
till,  conj.  Bi8. 
to,  prep,  ju,  tta(i^. 
to-day,  acZt;.  -^eutc. 
to-morrow,  adv.  morgcn. 
to-night,  adv.  l^eute  5lbenb. 
too,  adv.  a\x6^. 

translate,  v.  uBerfefecn,  N.  insep. 
travel,  v.  reijen,  N.  \. 
tree,  iSaunt,  m.  sineS,  sdumc. 
true,  adj.  wa^r. 
truth,  2Ba^r^cit,  /.  sten. 
Tuesday,  ©ienjlag,  m.  sg§,  =ge. 

ugly,  a^^*.  ^d^It(i^. 
uncle,  Dn!el,  m.  4B,  A. 
under,  prep,  unter. 
understand,  v.  toerftel;en,  0. 
until,  conj.  6i§. 
up  and  down,  auf  unb  a6. 

^rery^  adv.  fe^r. 
virtue,  SCugenb,  /.  sbcn. 
visit,  v.  befu(i^cn,  N. 

wait,  v.  warten,  N.  (182). 
wander,  v.  tcanbern,  N.  f. 


ENGLISH-GEEMAN   VOOABULAET. 


131 


want,  2;.  wotten,  -iV.  irreg.  ^  rouxie 

y^en,  N'. 
•war,  ^rieg,  m.  =g§,  ;ge. 
warm,  adj.  warm. 
we,  pron.  mir. 
-weak,  a<?/  fc^mad^. 
weatlier,  SSetter,  n.  sr§. 
■wcelc,  2Bo^e,/.  si^en. 
■well,  adv.  tro^I,  gut. 
wliat,  pron.  interrog.  or  rel.  w<x%, 

iDcIcler  (97,    98,    101-3);    what 

kind  of,  waa  fur  (99). 
wlien,  adv.  al§,  irann. 
wlietlier,  conj.  ob. 
wliicli,  pron.  rel.  or  interrog. 

welc^er  (98—103). 
while,  conj.  ical^renb,  intern. 
wlilte,  adj.  wei^. 
Tfliltlier,  adv.  wo^in. 
who,  pron.  interrog.  wer  ?   reZ. 

or  interrog.  ber. 
-whole,  ac?i;.  gan^. 
why,  adv.  warum. 
William,  SQ,i\^t\m,  m.  ^mS. 


"windo-w,  i^cnfler,  n.  cvB,  sr. 
■wine,  aSein,  m.  cn§,  sue. 
winter,  SBinter,  m.  cx%,  sr. 
wise,  «<i;.  wetfe. 
wish,  ?;.  ttjunjd^en,  iV. 
with,  prep.  mit. 
within,  ^rep.  inner^alB. 
-without,  prep,  and  conj.  c^ne. 
-woman,  2Beib,  7i.  slJeS,  sBer  ;  j^rau, 

/.  sen. 
■wood,  9Batb,  m.  =be3,  =alber. 
-word,  SSort,  ti.  =te§,  =te  or  sorter. 
-work,  v.  arbetten,  N. 
-write,  V.  fc^reiOen,  0. 


yard,  (Sae,  /  4cn. 

year,  ^a^r,  m.  sreS,  ?rc. 

yes,  \a. 

yesterday,  adv.  geflern. 

yet,  adv.  noc^  ;   not  yet,  nod)  nirf;t. 

yon,  ^ron.  t^r,  ©ie  (85). 

young,  adj.  jung. 

your,  poss.  euer,  ^^x  (88), 


LIST  OF  lEREGULAE  VEEBS. 


Mcplanations.  —  ln  the  following  table  are  given  the  principal 
parts  of  all  the  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  together  with  the 
preterit  subjunctive;  also  the  second  and  third  singular  indi- 
cative present  and  the  second  singular  imperative,  whenever 
these  are  otherwise  formed  than  they  would  be  in  the  New  con- 
jugation. Forms  given  in  full-faced  type  (thus,  gebaifen)  are 
those  which  are  alone  in  use;  for  those  in  ordinary  type  (thus, 
Md\tf  Bd(Jt)  the  more  regular  forms,  or  those  made  after  the 
manner  of  the  New  conjugation,  are  also  allowed;  forms  en- 
closed in  parenthesis  are  especially  unusual,  poetical  or  dia- 
lectic: a  subjoined  remark  gives  additional  explanation,  if  any 
is  needed. 

For  convenience,  the  forms  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  other 
irregular  verbs  of  the  New  conjugation  are  included  in  the 
List.  They  are  distinguished  by  being  put  in  ordinary  type 
throughout. 

No  verb  is  given  in  the  List  as  a  compound.  If  found  only  in 
composition,  hyphens  are  prefixed  to  all  its  forms,  and  an  added 
note  gives  its  compounds. 


Infinitive.  pres't  indie,  sing,      pret.  indie,  pret.  subj.    imper. 

JBadfcn, '"bake*  Ud^,Udt         Buf         Ute         

often  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive;  except  the 
sMun,  ^Oicrft,  -Mext      that       iifate      -Wx 

only  in  gcSarcn,  'bear,  bring  forth '  (formerly  geBcrcn). 


©dfeen, '  bite ' 
f&ct^ett,  'hide' 


f}XtQ%  l&ltflt 


JBctftCtt, 'burst*         Birfiejl,  Birfl 


JBlcoen,  *bend' 
f&icien,  'offer' 
JBin^cn,  'bind' 
mUen,  'beg' 
SBlafcn,  '  blow ' 
f&ieiifen,  'remain' 
f&Ui^en,  'bleach' 


(Bcutft,  teut) 


Barfl 
Borfl 

hot 

han'9     ibantie 

hat        Mic 


hiXQ 


hnxac 

t&rftc        Blrjl 
Borjlc 

hoie        (tcut) 


u&u%hmt  mc»  uu^e  — 

.    .  —  —        md)  md)e  — 

as  iatransitive,  of  either  conj. ;  as  transitive,  of  New  only. 

f&taUtt,  'roast'         tratft,  hxht  Brlct  Brtete  

JBre(f)«n,  'break'       f}ti(i}\i,  htiOii  htaOi  Ibtftdje  hti^ 

SSrcnnen, 'bum'         tranntc  Brenntc 

35ringcn,  'bring'         .  Brai^tc  Bra^te  

5t>eiI)Ctt  —   —         s^lel^  s^lelie  — 

obsolete  except  in  gebei^en,  'thrive.' 

133 


past  part, 
participle. 

geBorfien 

gei^unben 
QcWien 

aehlUifcn 

gcSHc^en 

QchtaUn 

gcbrannt 
getrac^t 


134 


LIST  OF  IBEEGULAK  VERBS. 


imper. 


past  part. 

gcba<^t 

sfclrb      sborben 


Infinitive.  pres't  indie,  sing.     pret.  ind.  pret.  subj. 

^^  (Dcnfcn,  *  think '  bac^tc      ih6)te 

s^etffm  sfctrBft,  MxU      sbor6      ^birfee 

only  in  tevberScn,  'perish; '  which,  as  transitive,  'destroy,'  is  of  New  conj. 

*  linden,  *  engage '      — -    bung  bungc        gcbungen 

\  (bang) 

^tefd^eit, 'thresh'     brifd^cfl,  brifd^t    hxa\^  brif(I)e       brif(^    0ct>i?of(f)en 

bro^c^  brcf(^c 

sbtiefeett  (--brcu^t)    sbtoft     sbirdffe     (=brcu^)  5t>ronen 

only  in  tocrbrieOcn,  *  vex.' 

Stingen, 'press'      —   —         ^tam   ^tftnge    —     oet^Yungen 


'D^rfcn,   'be  per- 
mitted ' 


rf,  barffl,  barf  burftc  biivftc 

^ffen, 'eat'              ifTeiX  ifet         aft  ftfee 

#al^i?en,  'go'           faijufi,  fftOtt    fttl^i;  fuJ)te 

fatten, 'faU'           fattft,faat        fleJ  ficle 

f^dttden,  'catch*       fftnflft,  fatidt    flttg  flngc 

fiend  fteitge 

f^ecf)tcn, 'fight'        fic^tefl,  fi^t         fodit  fddjte 

sfoljle 

only  in  Befel^Icn,  'command,'  cmpfc^tcn,  *  commend.' 

Sflnben, 'find'         —   —         fan^  f&tttje 

flftedftten, '  twine '     flit^p,  fitc^t        flo^i  fCotftte 

S'lel^ en, 'apply'      f(l^  ftiffe 

antiquated  except  in  [ic^  beflei^cn,  '  exert  one's  self.' 

^Ueflen, 'fly'           (ficugfl,  ficugt)     fCofi  ftdge 

g^llel^en, 'flee'          (fleuc^jt,  ficudjt)    ffo]^  f(dr)e 

^Ue^en,  'flow'        (fleu^cft,  flcu^t)   ftofe  fldffe 

iJragcn,  '  ask '              fr&gfl,  frJgt         frug  frfigc 

properly  a  verb  of  the  New  conjugation  only. 

^ejTen, '  devour '     fviffeft,  ftlfet   ftafe  ft&fee 

f^tleren,  'freeze'      —   —         'fxot  ftote 

@&l)ten,  'ferment'   gol^r  go^rc 

also  spelt  garen  etc.,  without  f), 

^©el&en, 'give'           giebft,  diel>i     aalb  oftiie 
fliaft,  fliH 
©el^en,  'go*             —   —         Oing 
©elten,    be  worth »  filHft,  e«t       fialt 


wanting  geburft 

i%  (jegeffcn 

(jefaljten 

—  oefatten 

—  fiefangen 

W  ftefdditen 

cflelil  ^foQlen 


-  0efunt»en 
fl^t  ecfi0d)tcn 

fieflifTen 

(Peug)  (ieU0Qen 

(fleud^)  oef(of)cn 

(fleu^)  (jefloffen 

gefragt 


only  in  cergcffen,  '  forget.' 
©iefeen'pour'  (gcu^ejl,  gcu^t)     gofe 

sfiinnen  —   —         fQann 


fiittfle 
gaite 
gdlte 


05fTe 

^O^nne 

;0dnne 


ftlft 


fiielb 

gilt 


(geu^) 


fieftfeffen 
Oefroten 

gcgoi&vcn 

degei^en 
fieflanoen 

sfleffen 

fieaofTcn 
sgonnen 


only  in  bcginncn,  'begin.' 
^leidien,  'resemble'  atlc^  glie^c  gegtic^cn 

usually  of  New  conj.  when  transitive,  '  make  similar.' 

©lelten,  'glide'         glitt         glittc        gcgtUt^n 

^^limnten,  '  gleam '   glomm      glommc     gegtonnneu 


LIST  OF  IBBEGULAR  VEEBS. 


135 


Infinitive.                  pres't  indie,  sing.      pret.  ind.  pret.  subj.  imper.  past  part. 

®taffen,'dig'          at&W,  Qt&M  Qtub       ^tube  —  qe^taften 

©tcifctt, 'gripe'       (jtiff       fitiffe      Qe^tlf^eti 

§al)en, 'have'  ^a^,  ^at  f^atu        ^ite         cje^abt 

•^altcn, 'hold'         l^&ltft,  JjftU      J^lclt       fiUlU      oei^alfcn 

^attficn,  'hang'       l)an(iH,  h&mi  him       hinac      Qchanacn 

(^angft,  I)angt)     ^ietifl      l)iengc 
eometimes  confounded  in  its  forms  with  ^angcn,  '  hang  '(trans.).  New  conj. 


^auen, '  hew ' 
^el^ett,  'raise' 

^Ifeen,  'call' 
^clUn,  'help' 


Dilfft,  DUft 


Dalf 


^Clfctt,  '  chide '  tiff 

£enncn,  *  know  *  fannte 

^icfcii,  *  choose '       log  ^     . 

antiquated,  and  most  often  met  in  erficfctt:  fiiveu  is  the  same  word. 

^lemtnen,  'press'    flomm       floramc      geflominen 

forms  of  Old  conj.  very  rare  except  from  teflemmen. 


t}ie6c 

huhe 
l)lefee 
f)(tlfe 
))ulfe 

tiffc 

!cnnte 

fofe 


i^irt 


Qchauen 
Qcffchen 

del^olfen 


gefiffen 
gctannt 
gcfofctt 


^licliett/  *  cleave' 
^i^ammen.  'climb 
^Unoen, '  sound ' 


flob 

ftomm 

flang 


flommc 


flange 
Kitngc 
rarely  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive. 


^nclfcn,  'pinch' 
^ttCl^en,  'pinch' 
^ommcit,  '  come ' 
^cnncn,  'can' 
^tUOiCn,  '  creep ' 
^Uteit,  'choose  ' 
i^a^cn,  •  load ' 
Saffen,  'let' 
Saufcn,  'run' 
iiJcit>en,  'suffer' 
S^eihen, '  lend ' 
SeTCtt,  '  read ' 
l^iecen, '  lie ' 
'lUxtti, 

only  in  MtxWtxtti, 

sUttden 


!niff 

fntpp 

(fcmmfit,  fommt)  faxix 

f  ann,  f  annjl,  fann  f  onnte 
(freud;jl,  frcudjt)  Xto^) 

lor 

labft,  labt 
laS\c%  lafjt 
laufft,  lauft 


UcTcIt,  llcft 


lub 
Utt 

slot; 


!niffc 

!nlppc 

tame 

fonnte 

tx0<iit 

!5re 

lube 

Ucfee 

Uete 

Uttc 


gcftoBcn 

gcttoramen 

geflungcn 

gcfniffcit 

gcfnippcn 

-  ^tt^mmen 
wanting  getonnt 

(treu(i^)   0cftod)en 
geforctt 

^ela^ctt 

gelaufen 

dcUttm 

gelefcn 


Keg 


-~      slunoen 


—   —         slattd 

only  in  gelingcn,  'succeed,'  mi^ingen,  'fail;'  used  in  third  person  only. 

&b\<i\cti,  'extinguish'  Iifd)cft,  Uf(^t       lofi^  Iof(^c         Iif(^  gelof^en 

the  forms  of  New  conj.  preferably  limited  to  transitive  meaning 

Sftgen, 'lie'  (Icugft,  tcugt)       U^         Id^e        (Icug)  ^eloa^n 

SWal^lcn, '  grind '      mat)tfl,  m&p      miil)l        md^Ic d^maf)(ett 

the  forms  of  Old  conj.  now  in  use  only  in  the  participle. 

SWciDctt,  •  shun '       tttie^       mlcbc (jetttiet>cn 

SJlcWcn,  '  miili '  (milfft,  ttiUft)      tnolf         niolte         (milt)  getnoUen 


136 


LIST  OP  lEKEGULAB  YEKBS. 


pret.  8ubj. 

m5d)te 


ncnute 


Infinitive.  pres't  indlc.  sing,      pret.  Ind. 

W^t^cn,  '  measure '    tnifieft,  tttlfet    tttafe 

9K5gcn,  *  may '  mag,  mac\^,  mag  med;tc 

ajiujfen,  'must'  mu^,  mupt,  mutj  niu^tc 

9lef)men, '  take '     nimmfi^  nimmt  naf^ni 

iKenncn, '  name'  nannte 

snefen  —   ^na^ 

only  in  gcncfen,  '  recover,  get  well.' 

sttipfeen  (=neu^cfl,  =ncuf{t)  sttoft 

obsolete,  except  in  geniepen,  'enjoy.' 

Jl^feifcn,  'whistle'    p^^ 

jPfKegen,  'cherish'    »f(og 

»>f^ag 

^treif en,  '  praise '       Vtlcd 

forms  of  the  New  conj.  are  occasionally  met  with. 

jOtteEctt,  '  gush '        quitffl,  qniUt        quoH         quelle 
of  New  conj.  when  transitive,  '  swell,  soak.' 

fH&^en,  'avenge'       (roi^)         (roc^c) 

forms  of  Old  conj.  very  rare,  except  the  participle, 


imper.        past  part. 

wife      gctnefjett 

wanting  gemoc^t 
wanting  gcmu^t 


na\)mc  nlmm  Qenommcn 


genanut 
sncfen 


sttoffc      (?neu^)   snoffeit 


pflogc 


(Hatl^ett,  'advise' 
Slclhcn,  'rub* 
Oleifeen,  'tear' 
fHciien,  'ride' 
3Jcnncn,  'run' 

8lie(l)en,  'smell' 
fHitlQcn,  'wring' 

{Rinnen, '  run ' 


xht^%  rat^ 


(rcuc^jl,  rcuc^t) 


tle^ 
tig 
Xiii 

ranntc 
(renutc) 

tatto 
tung 

tattn 
tief 


aiufen,  'call'  

rarely  of  New  conj.  in  preterit. 

®auf en,  '  drink '        f aufft,  f auf t  f  off 

@an(jen, 'suck'        fog 

forms  of  New  conj.  occasionally  met ; 
jiugen   'suckle,' 

©d^affen. 'create' — —  fc^iif 


-  fie^flffett 

gepflcgcn 

-  fici^tlefen 

quitt  gcquoHen 

geroi^en 

-  0evat]^en 

QCtiebcn 

fietiffen 

aniiteu 

gerannt 

(gerennt) 

(rcud))  oetocf)en 

Qcxmt^cn 

aexonncn 

oetufcn 

flcfoffen 

gcfogen 

sometimes  confounded  with 


ticbe 
tiffe 
tiiie 

rennte 

tdd)e 
tancie 

tUtlQC 

t.inn^ 
toxme 
tlefe 

fpffe 

fogc  _ 


WU 


\ft*-}^im,       v^xcai/D  l"/»*l  I"/"!*-  »'- 

generally  of  New  conj.  when  meaning  'be  busy,'  or  'procure. 


gcfi^affen 


&^aUm,  '  sound ' 
sf(Qef)en, 


footle 
sfdjaFje    


only  in  ge^c^ci^cn,  'happen;'  used  in  third  person  alone. 


®())ei^en/  'part' 
^^cinen,  '  appear ' 
^d^elten,  'scold' 

^iS)tXtXX,  'shear' 
®(f)teben,  'shove' 
3(fiiefeen,  '  shoot ' 
^^xtC^^ti,  'flay* 


ft^ie^  fdjlebe 

f(J)ien  f(f)iene 

f^iUft,  Wxli  \^<ai  f(f)a(te 
f(f)dlte 

fd^icrjl,  fc^lcrt       fdjot  fcDdte 

— -    f4)0&  S6)o\>t 

(fc^eu^ejl,  Wvi'^i)  fd)ofe  fcftiJffe 

—   —         fc^un^  fd^un^e 


fd^ter 


ge^i^ollcn 
5f(f>ef>en 

OefcTneben 
def(^ienen 
defc^oUen 


oefaioten 

0ef{f)o()en 

(jc^eu^)  (jcfd)offett 

—  (jef^ttn^en 


LIST  OF  IKEEGtJLAK  VERBS. 


137 


InfinUive.  pres't  indie,  sinjr.     pret.  ind.  pret.  subj.        imper.         past  part. 

©dilrtfett, 'Sleep'       id)lftfft,fcljl<lttfd)aef     fdjllefe    ocf*lafen 

^thlaacn,  'Strike'  fd)ladft,fd)lftdt fc()ltid     f(f)lttde    0e|d)ladeu 

Bd}Ui(!hcn,  'sneak' T(()(ic(|      fd)U(()e    ec^a)liiimt 

^(ftlcifen, 'whet'      fdjiiff         jc^tiffe        gefc^Uffen- 

in  other  senses  than  •  whet,  sharpen,'  properly  of  New  conj. 

@cr)lci6en,  'slit'       f<f)U^      fd)liffe     ge|d)lifTcn 

^cfjlicfen,  'slip'       fd)(off     fcfildffe    gefcfiloffen 

®d)Ucfeett, '  shut '    (fi^Icu^cft,  fd}tcu^t)f (f)lofe 

^a)linQeit,  'sling'    fcf)laitd 

@d)mclfecn,  '  smite ' f djmi^ 

<S(f)mel3Ctt,  'melt'  f(!)mU5efl,f(^miIjfl  jd^motj 


f(Qmiffe  fief d) miff ett 

fc^moljc     fdjmilj    gef^^molseix 


usually  and  properly  of  the  New  conj.  when  transitive. 

^ii)nau\fcnf  '  snort' f^noC       ^djnblt      gef'5)nD6enl 

^())tteit>ctt,  'cut'      — .         f(f)niti    fc^nltte   def(()nittcn 

'Sditau^cn,  '  screw ' fc^rob        \i}vbi>^       gefd^ro&en 

Sd)te<feit,' be  afraid' j^ridft,  fc^rtcJt     fc=^raf        fd^rife       fd^rid     gcf(^rocfcn 
of  New  conj.  as  transitive,  'frighten.' 

^^tci^en,  'write'    —   fc{)tiel»    fd)ttcibe  oefcf)tlc&en 

@c^tcic«,  •  cry '          fcr)tlc      f(f)Hce     (jefdjmcn 

^ti)teiien,  'stride'    f(()titi     f())titte    (jcfdjtittctt 

@(if)lDaten,  'suppurate'  (f(^n)ier[t,  f(!^TOiert)  fcfjttiot  f (Titatoire ficf (J)to>orcn 

<S4)to)ei0cn,  be  silent' —   —         frfjttilea  f(f)ta)lcae fief  eft  toiicoen 

sometimes  of  New  conj.  as  transitive,  '  silence.' 
®(ftit)eaett» 'swell'     fdjwUIft,  fdjnjiat,  fi^wott      ^^rt^bUe     fc^mia    gcfc^njoUen 

of  New  conj.  as  transitive. 


@(l)tt)lmmen,  'swim' 

' 

f(f)it)amm 
fd)  uiomm 

fd)tt>amme—  fic 
fd)wdtumc 

(fdj^Dmmcn 

®(f)tDinben,  'vanish' 

fdnnant)  fdihianbc — fief d)ta»un^en 
fd|ttmnt>  fd)tt)unt>e 

^(ftttfinfien,  'swing 

ditoattfi  fd)to<lnfie — fief(ftit)unfien 
d)it>ttttfi  fd)U>ttttfie 

<Sd)U>dten,  '  swear ' 

fd)tt>at 

fd)lt)U¥ 

fcfttpute 

fiefd)U)^ten 

^eftett,  'see' 

fleljfi,  fleftt. 

f<tD 

fftfte        fieD 

fiefeften 

eein,  'be' 

Hn,  l»ifi,  ift 

jc.  H)at 

ttjftte       fei 

fietoefett 

©cnben,  'send' 
®lct)en,  'boil' 

fanbtc 

fcnbetc 

fott 

fenbetc       

ficbetc       

gefanbt 
gcfenbet 
gcfotten 

^litfien, 'sing' 

faitfi 

fftnfie      

fiefttitfien 

@ittlen,  'sink' 

faitf 

fiittfe      

fief  unf  en 

®innen,  'think' 

fatm 

fftttne     < — 
foitne 

gcfounen 

@l^en,  'sit' 

frt^ 

fiefeffen 

©ollen,  'shall* 

fDH,  foUft,  foil      fcHtc 

fotttc       wanting  gcfoUt 

@l>eten, 'spit'          

rarely,  of  the  New  conj. 

fple 

fplcc          

gcfpiccn 

eviitnett,  •  spin ' 

f^ann 

f^ftntte    

f^dnne 

fief^ottnen 

138 


LIST  OF  IKEEGtJIAR  TEEBS. 


Infinitive.                   pres't  indie,  sing.    pret.  indie,  pret.  subj.      imper.        past  part, 

^pUificn,  'split* f^Uft       t^Uffe     fief^affen 

@^ ted) ett, 'speak'  f^ticTtfi, f^tici)t  f^tra(Q  f^tadie    f^Hd)  eef^t«»d)en 

<S^tUfecit,  •  sprout '(^preuJ3cft,fprcuf3t)fVto^  f^toffe     {jpreu^)gcfVtoffett 

Bptimen, '  spring ' f ^taitg    f Vi^&ttfle  gef^tttitgctt 

BUOien,   prick'        fUd)fi,  ftitf)t     Ua<ti  m^e      fiicQ      oeftDd)cn 

@tccf en, 'stick'         fticEft,  ftidt          fta!  ft&fc 
usually  of  New  conj.,  especially  when  transitive. 

^telictx,  'stand'        Itattb 

ft«ttt> 

<^i€lfUn,  *  steal '        fiiel)lf<,  ftlelpt  ftaftl  ftftljle 

fton(  ftPDle 

eteioen,  'ascend'     — -    ftleo  ftiefie       —        o^T^^ffi^w 

@<ctl»en, 'die'  ftitMt,  ftltlbt   ftat^ 


fiid         geftctfen 

ftanbe     (jeftanben 

ftiel^l    (jef<oJ)len 


ftat^e      ftltlJ     0ef<otl»e» 


^tielben,  '  disperse  ♦ 
^iinUn,  'stink* 

^io^eit/  'push' 
^tteidjeit,  '  stroke ' 
<»ttei<ett,  'strive' 
%\)\X\X,  'do 


ftattl 

ftUttf 

rtdfeeft,  ftofet  ftlefe 

(ttirf) 

rttitt 


ftftnfe 
fiitnfe 
ftiefee 
fiticfje 
fttitte 
t()iUe 


(tcftoOen 
dcfiunfen 

eeftofeen 

fiefttidien 

flefttttten 


the  pret.  indie,  t^&t  is  common  in  dialectic  German,  esp'ly  as  auxiliary. 

2:ta8ett, 'carry'        ivagft,  ttaQt   ttttg        ttttoe      — ^  oetraflen 

a:teffen, 'hit*  itiffft/ ttifft     itaf         ttftfc       ttiff  oe^roffett 

Xxtihm,  'drive'       itXcb       tnel»e      ^tixUhm 

%ttUti,  'tread*  itXHM,  ixMi     ixni         ix'aU       ttitt  ^etteteit 

2;tieten,  'drip '  (treufft,  treuft)    troff  trcffe         (trcuf)  getrofien 

atlnleu, 'drink'       ixant      ixanU     dettuttfen 

ixwnt      ixmxU 

2;ttt(jen,  '  deceive '     ttofi         tt<>oe       ^cix^^tn 

SBad) fen,  'grow'        njMjfefl,  wac^ft   >pttcf)§     >t)ttd)Te     ^c\o(i6)\en 

^a^ttx,  'weigh'       n)0(j        tooge       deiP00en 

compare  =it>cgen  and  wtegcn,  which  are  th^  same  word. 

S3(iTd)en,  'wash'       waf^eft,  xo^^t    )»\x\iS)      tPiifcfte    octoafdien 

SESelben, '  weave  *         woB  wobe         gciroben 

?h>eoen,  =»og         =n?6gc        --wcgen 

only  in  Betoegcn,  'induce;'  beiregen  in  other  senses  is  of  New  conj. 

SSeicfien,  'yield'        xo\^  iric^c         gcwlc^en 

of  New  conj.  when  meaning  '  soften '  (as  trans,  or  intrans.) 

SS^eifen,  'show'        ti>U^       toiefe        —  oektiiefen 

SEcnben, 'turn'  n?anbtc      tccnbetc     ^ gewantt 

irenbetc  geweubet 


SSSetben,  'sue' 


SEdet^en,  'become*    i»\xM,  tDttb      Itiatb 
SSetf en,  '  throw '       iDitf ft,  U>itft  tpatf 


tt)Stbe     tt>itl&    ^m^xhtn 

toux\>t 

touvt>e     —      eetDotben 


tofitfe 
Iputfe 


ti>\xi     fiewotfen 


LIST  OF  IRKEGULAR  VERBS. 


139 


fS&ie^m, '  weigh '      —   — 

the  same  word  with  siuftgcn  and 
SSln^cit,  *wind'        


pres't  indie,  sing.     pret.  iudic.  pret.  subj.      imper.         past  part. 

wog  ttjogc 

:tt)cgcn:  wicgen,  'rock,'  is  of 


getcogcn 
f  New  conj. 


stvattn 


only  used  in  gcnjtnncn,  'win.' 

933tffcn,  •  know '  wct^,  trei^t,  tccl^  wu^tt  tru^tc  gcwu^t 

SSoCcn,  *wiU'  njttt,  ttJiKft,  tDttt  iroUtc  tooHtc  gcwoat 

Seificn,  'accuse'      jicl)  jielP|e  ficsicl^en 

3leli en, 'draw'         (jcud^fl,  jeu(f^t)     j(»(j  $dfle  (jcuc^)    dcjooen 

3lt»lno^tt, 'force'     —  —        it»am  $tt>S«flc  —  oe$tt»tt«fien 


INDEX. 


^^^^  The  Refeeences  aiie  to  Pabagbaphs. 


absolute  accusative,  187c. 

accent,  43. 

accusative  with  prepositions, 
1 74-1 75 ;  two  obj ect  accusa- 
tives, 185  ;  otlier  accusative 
constructions,  186-187. 

address,  pronouns  used  in,  85. 

adjectives,  70-82 ;  declension, 
70-77  ;  used  as  nouns,  78 
as  adverbs,  79,  82,  169a 
comparison  of,  80-82 ;  deri 
vation  of,  211;  compound 
adjectives,  215. 

adjective  clause,  205d 

adverbs,  169-170  ;  adjectives 
used  as,  79,  82,  169a; 
comparison  of,  170. 

adverbial  clause,  205e. 

adverbial  genitive,  183a. 

alphabet,  1-2. 

arrangement  of  the  sentence, 
125,  133,  140,  148,  202 
—6. 

articles,  inflection,  48  ;  uses, 
49-50. 

auxiliary  verbs,  of  tense,  122  ; 
of  mode  142-146. 

Brin^^en,  132. 

capital  letters,  2. 

cardinal  numerals,  112-114. 

cases,  44 ;  special  uses  of, 
181-187. 

classes  of  the  first  noun-de- 
clension, 54-61. 

comparison  of  adjectives,  80- 
82  ;  of  adverbs,  170. 

compound  forms  of  the  verb, 
126-128. 

compound  verbs,  159-168  ; 
separable,  161-162  ;  insep- 
arable, 163-167  ;  separable 
or  inseparable,  168, 


compound  words,  212-215  ; 
verbs,  213 ;  nouns,  214  ; 
adjectives,  215. 

conditional  sentences,  191  c,d 

conjugation,  118-168;  sim- 
ple forms,  118;  principal 
parts,  119;  auxiliaries,  122 
— 124 ;  compound  forms, 
126-128;  New  conjugation, 
1206,  129-132;  Old  conju- 
gation, 120a,  134-139 ; 
mixed  conjugation,  141- 
147;  passive,  149-154; 
reflexive,  1^5-156  ;  imper- 
sonal, 157-158;  compound, 
159-168. 

conjunctions,  177-180. 

consonants,  pronunciation  of, 
19-42. 

dative  with  prepositions,  173, 
175  ;  other  dative  construc- 
tions, 184. 

declension,  44-117  ;  of  ar- 
ticles, 48;  of  nouns,  51-69  ; 
of  adjectives  ;  70-77  ;  of 
pronouns,  83-111  ;  of  nu- 
merals, 114. 

demonstrative  pronouns,  91- 
9d. 

benfen,  132. 

dependent  clauses  and  their 
order,  205. 

derivation,  207-211 ;  of  verbs, 
208  ;  of  nouns,  209-210 ; 
of  adjectives,  211. 

diphthongs,  pronunciation  of, 
14-18. 

burfen,  142-146. 

ein,  as  article,  48 ;  as  numeral, 
114a. 

English  and  German,  relations 
of,  216-217. 


142 


INDEX. 


e§,  nses  of,  87  ;  its  omissiou 
as  impersonal  subject,  158. 

^hva§,  78b,  109. 

foreign  nouns,  declension  of, 
65 ;  gender,  46e. 

feminine  nouns,  466. 

gender,  45-47. 

genitive  with  prepositions, 
172 ;  other  genitive  con- 
structions, 182-183. 

German  language,  relations  of, 
to  English,  216-217  ;  to 
other  languages,  216  ;  its 
age  and  periods,  218. 

Grimm's  Law  of  correspond- 
ences among  Germanic 
words,  217. 

l^aBett,  122a. 

imperative  mode,  118,  124, 
1916. 

impersonal  verbs,   157,   158. 

indefinite  article,  48  ;  pro- 
nouns, 107-111. 

indirect  discourse,  subjunctive 
of,  192. 

infinitive,  118,  119,  121  ; 
constructions  of,  193-198. 

inseparable  compound  verbs, 
163-168. 

interrogative  pronouns,  96- 
100. 

inverted  order  of  the  sentence, 
202,  204. 

}emanb,  108. 

Umm,  142-146. 

(a[fcn,  1436. 

man,  107. 

mand),  110. 

masculine  nouns,  4:6a. 

measurement,  expression  of, 
115. 

mixed  conjugation,  141-147. 

mixed  declension  of  nouns, 
64;  of  adjectives,  76. 

modal  auxiliaries,  142-146. 

modified  vowels,  10-13. 

mof^en,  142-146. 

muffen;  142-146. 


neuter  nouns,  46c. 

New  conjugation  of  verbs, 
1206,  129-132. 

nid)t^,  786,  109. 

niemanb;  108. 

normal  order  of  sentence,  202 
—203. 

nouns,  51-69 ;  first  declension, 
53-61  ;  second  declension, 
62-63 ;  irregular  declen- 
sion, 64 ;  foreign  nouns, 
65  ;  proper  names,  66-69  ; 
adjectives  as  nouns,  78  ;  de- 
rivation of  nouns,  209-210; 
compound  nouns,  214. 

numerals,  112-117;  rules  of 
use  of,  115. 

Old  conjugation  of  verbs, 
120a,  134-139. 

order  of  the  sentence,  202- 
206. 

ordinal  numerals,  116. 

participles,  118;  their  con- 
struction, 199-201. 

passive  verbs,  14i9-154. 

personal  pronouns^  83-87. 

possessives,  88-90. 

prefixes,  verbal,  159  ;  separ- 
able, 160,  168 ;  insepar- 
able, 163,  168. 

prefixes  making  nouns  and 
adjectives,  210,  211c. 

prepositions,  171-176  ;  gov- 
erning genitive,  172;  dative, 
173  ;  accusative,  174  ;  dat- 
ive or  accusative,  175  ;  in- 

'    finitive,  197. 

present  tense,  senses  of,  1226, 
189. 

preterit  tense,  senses  of,  1226, 
1896. 

principal  parts  of  a  verb,  119. 

pronouns,  83-111  ;  personal, 
83-87  ;  possessives,  88-90; 
demonstratives,  91-95;  in- 
terrogatives,  96-100  ;  rela- 
tives, 101-106  ;  indefinite, 
107-111. 


INDEX. 


143 


pronunciation,  3-42;  of  vow- 
els, 3-18 ;  of  consonants, 
19-42. 

proper  ncuns,  inflection  of, 
66-69. 

quantity  of  vowels,  3. 

reflexive  pronouns,  84  ;  verbs, 
155-156. 

relative     pronouns,     101- 
106. 

feitt,  122c. 

separable  compound  verbs, 

161-162,  168. 
fold),  110. 
follen,  142-146. 
f^agieren,  196. 
strong    conjugation,    see    Old 

conjugation, 
subjunctive    mode,     uses    of, 

191-192. 
subordinating  conjunctions, 

180. 
substantive  clause,  205c. 


suffixes  forming  nouns,  209c ; 
adjectives,  2115. 

superlative  phrases,  826-e. 

time,  accusative  of,  187  ;  gen- 
itive, 183. 

time  of  day,  expression  of, 
115d. 

transposed  order  of  sentence, 
202,  205. 

umlauts,  10-13. 

verbs,  conjugation  of,  see  con- 
jugation ;  compound  verbs, 
159-168,  213;  derivative 
verbs,  208. 

vowels,    pronunciation    of, 
3-18 

h)a§,  78*6,  100&,  103c. 

n)a§  fur,  99. 

weak  conjugation,  see  New 
conjugation. 

n)erben,  122d,  149-150. 

n)tffeii,  147. 

iDoIIen,  142-146. 

3U  with  infinitive,  110.  194o 


Henry  Holt  &  Co.'s 
EDUCATIONAL  A¥ORKS. 


ENGLISH. 

XWThi  j>yiciS  aye  for  cloth  lettered^  uftless  oiherivise  expressed. 
American  Science  Series,  for  High  Schools  and  Colleges,     izmo. 

I.  Newcomb  &  Holden's  Astronomy,  Advanced  course,  $2.50; 
Briefer  course^  $1.40.  II.  Packard's  Zoology,  Advanced  course^ 
$3.00;  Briefer  course^  $1.40;  Elementary  course,  i^i.oo.  III. 
JBessey's  Botany,  Advanced  course^  $2.75;  Briefer  course, 
$1.35.  IV.  Martin's  Human  Body,  Advanced  course^  $2.75; 
liriefer  course^  ^\.SO',  Eletnentary  course,  cjo  cts.  V.  Walker's 
Political  Economy,  Advanced  course,  $2.25  ;  Briefer  course,  ^1.50. 

VI.  Remsen's  Chemistry,  Briefer  course,  $1.40. 

Arthur,  Barnes  &  Coulter.     Plant  Dissection $1  50 

Bain.     Brief  English  Grammar.     z8mo.     Boards,  450.;  Key 45 

Higher  English  Grammar i  00 

Composition  Grammar • i  40 

Cairns.     Quantitative  Analysis.    8vo 200 

Champlin.    Young  Folks' Catechism.     i6mo 60 

Young  Folks'  Astronomy.     i6mo 60 

Cyclopaedia  of  Common  Thinss.     Large  1 2mo 2  50 

Cyclopaedia  of  Persons  and  Places.     Large  i2mo 2  50 

Clark.    Practical  Rhetoric.     i2mo 150 

Corson.     Handbook  of  Anglo-Saxon  and  Early  English.     i2mo 2  50 

Cox.     Mythology.     i6mo.     90 

Freeman.     Historical  Course  for  Schools.     i6mo. 

I.  General  Sketch  of  History,  $1.40.     II.  History  of  England,  $1.10. 

III.  History  of  Scotland,  ^i.oo.     IV.  History  of  Italy,    $1.00.     V. 

History  of  Germany,  $1.00.    VI.  History  of  the  United  States,  $1.25. 

VII.  History  of  France,  $1.00. 

Gallaudet.    Manual  of  International  Law.     i2mo 160 

Gardiner.     English  History  for  Schools.     x6mo 100 

Introduction  to  English  History.     i6mo i  00 

Gostwick  and  Harrison.     Outlines  of  German  Literature.     i2mo 2  50 

Handbooks  for  Students  and  General  Readers: — Ball's  Astronomy,  60c. 
McGuthrie's  Practical  Physics,  60c.  Johnson's  The  Studio  Art, 
60c.  Macalister's  Zoology,  $1.00.  Johnston's  American  Politics, 
$1.00.  Lounsbury's  English  Language,  $1.00.  Ball's  Mechanics, 
60c.  Bain's  Higher  English  Grammar,  $1.00.  McNab's  Botany, 
$1.00.     Otis'  Elementary  German,  90c.     Banister's  Music,  $i.oo. 

Johnston.     History  of  the  United  States.     i2mo,  $1.25  ;  Briefer 

Koehler.     Practical  Botany.     i2mo 250 

Lacomb.    The  Growth  of  a  People.     i6mo  i  00 

Macloskie.     Elements  of  Botany.     i2mo z  60 

Newcomb.  Algebra  for  Schools,  $1.20  (Key  $1.20).  Plane  Geometry 
and  Trigonometry,  with  Tables,  fi.40.  Algebra  for  Colleges,  $i.6o 
(Key  $1.60).  Elements  of  Geometry,  $1.50.  Essentials  of  Plane 
and  Spherical  Trigonometry,  with  3  and  4  place  Tables,  $1.25. 
Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry,  with  Tables,  $2.00.  Trigonome- 
try (separate),  $1.50;  Tables  (separate),  $1.40.  Analytical  Geome- 
try, $1.50.     (Calculus 

Packard.     Guide  to  the  Study  of  Insects.    8vo 500 

Phillips  &  Beebe.     Graphic  Algebra.     Svo ....     200 

Porter.     Outlinesof  the  Constitutional  History  of  the  United  States.   i2mo,     15a 

Sewreil  and  Urbino.     Dictation  Exercises.     i6mo.     Boards 55 

Skionec^    Approximate Comfutatioas.    z6mo ...it    ^  ao 


STANDARD    EDUCATIONAL     WORKS, 

Siglar.     English  Grammar.     i2mo.     Boards $070 

Step.     Plant  Life.     lamo... 125 

Sumner.    Problems  in  Political  Economy 125 

Taine.     English  Literature.     Condensed  for  Schools.     i2mo 1  75 

White.     Classic  Literature.     i2mo , 200 

Witt.     Classic  Mythology.     i2mo ,   ...     125 

Yonge  (jMiss),  Landmarks  of  History.  I.  Ancient.  i2mo.  95c.;  IL 
Mediaeval.      i2mo,   $1.00;    IIL      Modern.      i2mo,    $1.30;    Kings  of 

England.     i6mo g5 

Zeller.     Greek  Philosophy i  75 

FRENCH. 

^sop.     Fables  in  French.    With  a  Dictionary.     i8mo $065 

Aliot-Boymier.     Les  Auteurs  Contemporaine.     With  Notes,  i2mo 150 

Aubert.     Colloquial  French  Drill.     i6mo...    60 

Litterature  Fran^aise  I  Annee.    i6mo i  25 

Bellows.     French  and  English  Dictionary.  32mo.    Roan,  with  tucks 3  co 

The  same,  Morocco,  with  tucks , 3  65 

Bibliotheque  d'Instruction  et  de  Recreation, 

Achard — Clos-Pommier,  et  les  Prisonniers,  par  Xavier  de  Maistre,  85 
cents.  Bidollie7-e — Mere  Michel,  New  Vocabulary,  by  Pylodet,  75 
cents.  Biographies  des  Musiciens  Celebres,  $1.25,  Carraud — 
Contes,  $1.00.  Choix  de  Contes  Contemporains,  $1.25.  Ercktnann- 
Chatrian — Conscrit  de  18 13.  With  Notes,  $1.10.  Erckmann-Chat' 
Tian  —  Le  Blocus.  With  Notes,  $1.25.  Erck7nann-Chatrian  — 
Madame  Th^r^se.  With  Notes,  $1.10.  Fallet—Yxvaz^s  de  I'Art,  $1.50. 
Feuillet — Roman  d'un  Jeune  Homme  Pauvre,  $1.10.  Fevat— 
Chouans  et  Bleus.     With  Notes,  $i.co.      Foa — Contes  Biographiques. 

With  Vocab.,  $1.00.    Petit  Robinson   de   Paris.     With  Vocab.,  85 

cents.  Mace — Bouchee  de  Pain.  With  Vocab.,  $1.25.  Maistre — 
CEuvres  Completes,  $1.40.  Porchat — Trois  Mois  sous  la  Neige,  83 
cents.  Presse7isk — Rosa.  With  Vocab.,  $1.25.  Saint-Germain — 
Pour  une  Epingle.  With  Vocab.,  95  cents.  Sand — Petite  Fadette, 
$1.25.  Segur — Contes,  $1.00.  Souvestre — Philosophe  sous  les  Toits, 
75  cents. 

Borel.     Grammalre  Frangalse.     i2mo  1  60 

Buckingham's  Eugene.     French  Grammar  and  Exercises,     ismo 160 

Elementary  French  Lessons.     i2mo 75 

Bul^ver.     Lady  of  Lyons.     For  translating  into  French.     By  B.  Maurice. 

i2mo I  00 

Delille.     Condensed  French  Instruction.     i8mo 50 

Fisher.     Easy  French  Reading.     With  Vocabulary.     i6mo  95 

Fleury .     Histoire  de  France.     i2mo , i  40 

Ancient  History.     Translated,  with  Notes.     i2mo 85 

Gasc.     French- English  Dictionary.     8vo 3  75 

do.  do.    ^  i8mo.     Pocket  Edition,  $1.40,  2  vols,     i  60 

Translator.     (English  into  French) i  23 

Gibert.     Introductory  French  Manual.     i2mo 85 

Janon,  De.     Recueil  de  Poesies.     i6mo 100 

Jeu  des  Auteurs.     In  a  box 100 

Julien's  Petites  Legons  de  Conversation  et  de  Grammaire.     Sq.  izmo i  00 

Practical  and  Conversational  Reader.     Sq.  i2mo 90 

Lacombe.     Histoire  du  Peuple  Frangaise.     i6mo 75 

Maistre  (X.  de).   Voyage  autour  de  ma  Chambre.     i2mo.      Paper 45 

Moutonnier.     Les  Premiers  pas  dans  I'Etude  du  Frangais.     i2mo 90 

Musset.     Un  Caprice,  Comedie.     i2mo.      Paper 30 

Otto.     French  Conversation  Grammar,     i2mo.     Roan,  $1.60;  Key 75 

Bocher's  French  Reader.     i2mo.     Roan I  40 

First  Book  in  French.     i2mo.     Boards 35 

Introductory  French  Lessons.     i2mo i  25 

Introductory  French  Reader.     i2mo i  00 

Parlez-vous  Frangais  ?  or   Do  You  Speak  French  ?     T8mo.     Boards j« 

Plays.  College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays.  _  With  English  Notes 
by  Profl  Bocher.  i2mo.  Paper.  La  joie  Fait  Peur,  30  cents  ;  La 
JkJataille   des  Dames,   35  cents;    La  Maison  de  Penarvan,  35  cents; 


STANDARD    EDUCATIONAL     WORKS. 

La  Poiidre  aux  Yeux,  35  cents ;  Les  Petits  Oiseaux,  35  cents  ;  Mad- 
emoiselle de  la  Seigliere,  35  cents;  Le  Roman-  d'un  Jeune  Homme 
Pauvre,  35  cents  ;  Les  Doigts  de  Fee,  35  cents ;  Jean  Baudry,  35  cents. 

The  foregoing  in  two  volumes.     i2mo.     Cloth.     Each  vol $1  60 

Modern  French  Comedies.  Le  Village,  25  cents  ,*  La  Cagnotte,  35  cents  ; 
Les  Femmes  qui  Pleurent,  25  cents  ;  Les  Petites  Miseres  de  la  vie 
Humaine,  25  cents  ;  La  Niaise  de  St.  Flour,  25  cents  ;  Trois  Proverbes, 
30  cents;  Valerie,  30 cents  ;  Le  Collier  de  Perles,  30  cents.  The  three 
last  named  have  vocabularies. 
Selected  French  Comedies.  Text  and  English  translation  on  opposite 
pages.  Arranged  by  Baptiste  M^ras.  i2mo.  Paper.  I.  En  Wagon. 
By  Eugene  Verconsin,  35  cents.     IL  C'Etait  Gertrude.     By  Eugene 

Verconsin 3^ 

French  Plays  Jor  Children,  With  Vocabularies.  i2mo.  Paper.  La 
Vieille  Cousine  :  Les  Ricochets,  25  cents;  Le  Testament  de  Madame 
Patural;  La  Mademoiselle  de  St.  Cyr,  25  c«nts;  La  Petite  Maman  ;  Le 
Bracelet,  25  cents;  La  Lotterie  de  Francfort ;  Jeune  Savante,  25  cents. 
Siudenfs  Collection  0/  Classic  French  Plays.  With  full  notes  by  Prof. 
E.  S.  Joynes.  i2mo.  Paper.  50  cents  per  vol.  Corneille.  Le  Cid, 
Cinna.  Horace.  Racine.  Athalie.  Moliere.  Le  Misanthrope. 
L'Avare.  Le  Burgeois  Gentilhomme.  Racine.  Esther,  40  cents. 
Les    Plaideurs.     The  foregoing  in  3  vols.      lamo.      Cloth.     Per  vol.     i  50 

Pylodet's  Beginning  French.     i6mo.     Boards ....•         55 

Beginner's  French  Reader.    With  illustrations.     i6mo.     Boards 55 

Second  French  Reader.     With  illustrations i  10 

La  Littdrature  Frangaise  Classique.     i2mo i  60 

La  Litt^rature  Frangaise  Contemporaine.     i2mo i  40 

Gouttes  de  Rosee.     French  Lyric  Poetry.     i8mo (^-^ 

Mere  L'Oie.     Illustrated.     8vo.     Boards.. ,1        50 

Riodu.     Lucie.     French  and  English  Conversations.     lamo 75 

Sadler.     Translating  English  into  French.     i2mo 1  25 

Stern  and  Meras.     Etude  Progressive  de  La  Langue  Frangaise.     izmo..     i  50 

Whitney.     French  Grammar.     i2mo 

Witcomb  and  Bellenger.     French  Conversation.     i8mo (y^ 

Zender,    Abec^daire,  French  and  English  Primer.     i2mo.     Boards 50 

GERMAN. 

^^"  The  prices  are /or  ^aper  covers^  unless  otherwise  expressed, 

Evans.     Otto's  German  Reader.     Half  Roan $1  35 

Game  for  German  Conversation.     In  a  box i  00 

Heness.     Der  Neue  Leitfaden.     i2mo.     Cloth 150 

Der  Sprechlehrer  unter  seinen  Schiilern 1  35 

Huss's  Oral  Instruction  in  German.     i2mo 135 

Keetels' Oral  Method  with  German.     i2mo.     Half  Roan 160 

Klemm.     Lese  und  Sprachbuecher.     In  8  conaentrischen  Kreisen.     i2mo.. 

Geschichte  der  Deutschen  Literatur i  50 

Lessing.     Minna  von  Barnhelm.     In  English  with  German  Notes.     i2mo.        50 

Otis'  Elementary  Grammar.    Text  in  Roman  90 

Otto.     German  Grammar.     i2mo.     Roan,  $1.60 ;  Key 75 

Evans' German  Reader.     With  Notes  and  Vocab.     i2mo.     Roan....     i  35 

■ First  Book  in  German.     i2mo.    Boards   35 

• Introductory  Lessons  ;  or.  Beginning  German.     i2mo.     Cloth 95 

Introductory  Reader.     With  Notes  and  Vocabulary.     i2mo.     Cloth.,     i  20 

Otto.    Translating  English  into  German.     i2mo,    $1.00.    Key 100 

Plays.     College  Series  0/  German  Plays.     i2mo.     Paper. 

Gorner.  Englisch.  Ein  Lustspiel.  30c.  Putlitz.  Badekuren.  Ein 
Lustspiel.  With  Notes,  30c.  Putlitz.  Das  Herz  Vergessen.  Ein 
Lustspiel.  With  Notes,  30c.  Three  German  Comedies.  I.  EIz.  Er 
ist  nicht  eifcrsiichtig  ;  II.  Benedix.  Der  Weiberfeimd;  III.  Miiller. 
Im  Wartesalon  Erster  Classe.    The  three  together,  350.     "Wilhelmi. 

Einer  muss  heirathen  ;  and,  Benedix.    Eigensinn.  With  Notes 33 

Studenfs  Classic  German  Plays.     i2mo.     Paper.  • 

Goeths.     EgiBont,  50c.       Herrman  und  Dorothea,   35c.     KoerDer. 
3 


STANDARD    EDUCATIONAL     WORKS. 

Zriny,  6oc.  Lessing.  Minna  von  Barnhelm  in  English  ;  Notes  for 
translating  into  Germr.n,  50c.  Emilia  Galotti,  35c.  Schiller.  Wallen- 
Stein's  Lager,  with  Notes,  40c.  Die  Piccolomini,  with  Notes,  50c. 
Wallenstein's  Tod,  with  Notes,  50c.  Wallenstein,  complete,  with 
Notes,  i2mo,  cloth,  $1.50.  Jungfrau  von  Orleans,  with  Notes,  50c. 
Der  NefFe  als  Onkel,  with  Notes  and  Vocabulary,  50c.  See  also 
under  Whitney. 

Simonson.     German  Ballad  Book.     With  Notes,     ismo.     Cloth $1  40 

Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  ?  or,  Do  You  Speak  German?  i8mo.     Boards...         50 
Stern.     Studien  und  Plaudereien.     i2mo.     I.   Series,   $1.35.      II.   Series,     i  50 
Selected  German  Comedies.     Prepared  for  Students.     With  Tables 
of  Difficulties  (in  German)  by  Sigmon  M.  Stern.     i2mo.     Paper. 
1.  Rosen's  Ein  Knopf,  30c.     11.  Von   Moser's   Der  Schimmel,  30c. 
III.  Konigswinter's  Sie  hat  ihr  Herz  entdcckt,  40c.     IV.  Claar's 
Simson  und  Delila,  30c.     V.  Jungman's  Er  sucht  einen  Vetter,  30c. 
VI.  Paul's  Er  muss  tanzen,  30c.     Vll.  Friedrich's  Ganschen  von 
Buchenau,  40c. 

Storma.     Easy  German  Beading.     i6mo.     Cloth 95 

Unterhaltungs  Bibliothek.     i2mo.     Paper. 

Andersen's  Bilderbuch  ohne  Bilder,  with  Notes,  30c.  Die  Eisjung- 
frau,  und  andere  Geschichten  with  Notes,  50c.  Carove's  Das  Mar- 
chen  ohne  Ende,  25c.  Eichendorf's  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugen- 
ichts,  50C.  Fouqiie's  Undine,  with  Vocabulary,  40c.  Sintram,  40c. 
Grimm's  Die  Venus  von  Milo  ;  Rafael  und  Michel- Angelo,  50c.  Kin- 
der und  Hausmarchen,  with  Notes,  50c.  Heine's  Die  Harzreise  uud 
Das  Buch  Le  Grand,  with  Notes,  60c.  Heyse's  Die  Einsamen,  25c. 
Anfang  und  Ende,  30c.  Hillern's  Hoher  als  die  Kirche,  25c. 
Miigge's  Signa  die  Seterin,  30c.  Riukan  Voss,  30c.  Mliller's 
Deutsche  Liebc,  40c.  Nathusius's  Tagebuch  eines  armen  Frauleinsi 
60C.  Ploennies's  Prinzessin  Use,  with  Notes,  25c.  Putlitz's  Was 
sich  der  Wald  erzahlt,  30c.  Vergissmeinnicht,  25c.  Schiller's 
Das  Lied  von  der  Glocke,  with  Notes,  40c.  Storm's  Immensee,  with 
Notes,  25c.  Tieck's  Die  Elfen ;  das  Rothkappchen,  with  Notes.  35c. 
Whitney-Klemm  German  Series.  i2mo.  Cloth.  I.  Rudiments  of  Ger- 
man. II.  German  by  Practice.     $1.10.     III.  Elementary  Reader,     i  co 

Whitney.     Prof.  W.  D.     Brief- German  Grammar.     i2mo.     Cloth 73 

• German  Grammar.     i2mo.     Roan 1  50 

German  Reader,     lamo.     Roan 180 

German-English  and  English-German  Dictionary.     i2mo.     Cloth...     350 

German  Texts:    Annotated  by    leading  instructors    ai^.d  edited    by 

Prof.  W.  D.  Whitney,  i2mo.  Cloth.  I.  Lessing's  Minna  von  Barn- 
helm,  75c.  II.  Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell,  75c.  III.  Goethe's  Faust, 
8oc.  IV.  Goethe's  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris,  75c.  V.  Schiller's 
Maria    Stuart,  80c.     VI.   Lessing's  Nathan  der  Weise,  75c 

■Williams'  German  Conversation  and  Composition.     i2mo I  00 

Witcomb  and  Otto's  German  Conversations.  ByL.  Pylodet,  i8mo.  Cloth        65 

ITALIAN. 

Cuore.     Italian  Grammar.     i2mo.     Roan.     $1.50*,  Key 75 

Ongaro.     La  Rosa  Deli'  Alpi.     With  Notes.     i2mo.     Paper 7:5 

Nota  (Alberto).     La  Fiera.     With  Notes.     i2mo.     Paper  75 

Parlate  Italiano  ?  or,  Do  You  Speak  Italian  ?     i6mo.     Boards 50 

Pellico*    Francesca  da  Rimini.     lamo.     Paper 75 

LATIN    AND     GREEK. 

Brooks.     Introduction  to  Attic  Greek.     i2mo. % 

Goodell.    The  Greek  in  English.     i6mo .".... 

Preparatory  Greek  and  Latin  Texts.     i2mo i  50 

Latin  Part  separately.     i2mo.   i  00 

—         Greek  Part  separately.     i2mo 75 


HENRY  HpLT  *fe  CO-?  Publishers,  New  York, 


0  r^ 


P 


^'^  "^   i 


^a^3A 


